AVEVA™ Process Simulation

Simulation Building Guide

Version 2024
October 2023

aveva.com
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any
means, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of AVEVA
Group Limited. No liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein.
Although precaution has been taken in the preparation of this documentation, AVEVA assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. The information in this documentation is subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of AVEVA. The software described in this documentation is furnished under
a license agreement. This software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license
agreement. AVEVA, the AVEVA logo and logotype, OSIsoft, the OSIsoft logo and logotype, ArchestrA, Avantis,
Citect, DYNSIM, eDNA, EYESIM, InBatch, InduSoft, InStep, IntelaTrac, InTouch, Managed PI, OASyS, OSIsoft
Advanced Services, OSIsoft Cloud Services, OSIsoft Connected Services, OSIsoft EDS, PIPEPHASE, PI ACE, PI
Advanced Computing Engine, PI AF SDK, PI API, PI Asset Framework, PI Audit Viewer, PI Builder, PI Cloud
Connect, PI Connectors, PI Data Archive, PI DataLink, PI DataLink Server, PI Developers Club, PI Integrator for
Business Analytics, PI Interfaces, PI JDBC Driver, PI Manual Logger, PI Notifications, PI ODBC Driver, PI OLEDB
Enterprise, PI OLEDB Provider, PI OPC DA Server, PI OPC HDA Server, PI ProcessBook, PI SDK, PI Server, PI Square,
PI System, PI System Access, PI Vision, PI Visualization Suite, PI Web API, PI WebParts, PI Web Services, PRiSM,
PRO/II, PROVISION, ROMeo, RLINK, RtReports, SIM4ME, SimCentral, SimSci, Skelta, SmartGlance, Spiral Software,
WindowMaker, WindowViewer, and Wonderware are trademarks of AVEVA and/or its subsidiaries. All other
brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions set forth in the license agreement
with AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries and as provided in DFARS 227.7202, DFARS 252.227-7013, FAR
12-212, FAR 52.227-19, or their successors, as applicable.
AVEVA Third Party Software Notices and Licenses: https://www.aveva.com/en/legal/third-party-software-
license/
Publication date: Wednesday, October 4, 2023
Publication ID: 1195539
Contact information
AVEVA Group Limited
High Cross
Madingley Road
Cambridge
CB3 0HB. UK
https://sw.aveva.com/
For information on how to contact sales and customer training, see https://sw.aveva.com/contact.
For information on how to contact technical support, see https://sw.aveva.com/support.
To access the AVEVA Knowledge and Support center, visit https://softwaresupport.aveva.com.
Acknowledgements

CSPARSE
To analyze and report proper variable specification, AVEVA Process Simulation uses CSPARSE, a library of direct
methods for sparse linear systems by Timothy Davis. CSPARSE is free software and is distributed under the GNU
Lesser General Public License. We provide a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with the AVEVA
Process Simulation installation files. You can also locate this license at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
lgpl-3.0.txt. You can find more information about CSPARSE at http://www.suitesparse.com.
The source code used in AVEVA Process Simulation is available at http://github.com/DrTimothyAldenDavis/
SuiteSparse. We do not modify the original code.
© 2006 Timothy A. Davis
KLU
AVEVA Process Simulation uses KLU as its linear equation solver. KLU is an open-source solver package with a
focus on solving sparse linear systems of equations. KLU is free software and is distributed under the GNU Lesser
General Public License. We provide a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with the AVEVA
Process Simulation installation files. You can also locate this license at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
lgpl-3.0.txt. You can find more information about KLU at http://www.suitesparse.com.
The source code used in AVEVA Process Simulation is available at http://github.com/DrTimothyAldenDavis/
SuiteSparse. We do not modify the original code.
© 2004-2013 University of Florida
by Timothy A. Davis and Ekanathan Palamadai
Contents

Acknowledgements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 1 Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Chapter 2 User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Filtering Capabilities by Role. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Opening the Roles Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Creating or Modifying a Role. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Creating a Quick Filter for a Role. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Viewing Hidden Models, Submodels, and Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
User Interface Badging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Simulation and User Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Monitoring the Solved Status of a Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Navigating the Canvas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Printing the Canvas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Floating, Docking, and Hiding Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Showing and Hiding Model Libraries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Copying and Pasting Models or Shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting Models on the Simulation Canvas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Adding Submodels to Model Instances on the Canvas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Filtering Variables and Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Creating a Flowsheet Equation on the Canvas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Internal Units of Measure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Enabling Flowsheet Equations by Simulation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Modifying the Simulation Canvas Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Defining Global Parameters and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Finding an Object in the Flowsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Viewing the Changed Specifications in a Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Specification Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Managing the Default User Interface Layout and Appearance Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Managing the Connector Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 4
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Contents

Changing the Connector Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Managing the Variable Reference Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Aligning Variable References on the Canvas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Managing the Flowsheet Equation Appearance on the Canvas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Undoing and Redoing Simulation Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Opening Thermo Data Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Migration for AVEVA PRO/II Simulation Data into AVEVA Process Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
General Workflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Migrating AVEVA PRO/II Simulation Fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Migrating AVEVA PRO/II Simulation Stream Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Chapter 3 Repository. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Managing Simulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Importing and Exporting Simulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Closing a Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Chapter 4 Simulation Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Process Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fluid Flow Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Dynamics Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Switching Between Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Enabling or Disabling Automatic Solving (Auto Solve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Applying Model Library Changes While Manually Solving Your Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Disabling the Specifications Analysis While Manually Solving Your Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Changing the Speed of a Dynamics Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Resetting the Run Time to Zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Chapter 5 Simulation Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Filtering Simulation Manager Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Applying a Simulation Manager Quick Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Showing and Hiding Changed Variable Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Expanding Multi-Component Array Equations and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Chapter 6 Keyword View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Understanding How the Simulation Manager and Keyword View Work Together. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Expanding and Modifying Variable Arrays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Chapter 7 Subflowsheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Managing Subflowsheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Managing Model References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 5
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Contents

Example of Modifying Simulations to Use Subflowsheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Chapter 8 Properties Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Opening the Properties Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Filtering Variables and Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Sorting or Grouping Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Using Fluid Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Expanding and Modifying Variable Arrays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Defining Favorite Variables and Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Defining Invariant Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Returning to Previously Specified Invariant Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Changing the Tracking for Global Parameters and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Chapter 9 Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Chapter 10 Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Block Decomposition Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Homotopy Iteration Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Solver Iteration Report for a Failed Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Report Sections of the Optimizer Output Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Chapter 11 Fluid Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Opening the Fluid Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Configuring a Fluid Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Configuring Single-Component Fluid Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Configuring an Equation-based Fluid Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Configuring an Isomeric Hydrogen Fluid Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the Ideal Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses an Equation of State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the PSRK Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the NRTL, UNIQUAC, or Wilson Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the Electrolyte NRTL Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the Dortmund UNIFAC Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the Grayson-Streed or Improved Grayson-Streed Method. .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the Regular Solution Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Changing the Mixing Rules for Transport Property Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Available Mixing Rules for Vapor Conductivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Available Mixing Rules for Liquid Conductivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Available Mixing Rules for Liquid Surface Tension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 6
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Contents

Available Mixing Rules for Vapor Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Available Mixing Rules for Liquid Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Adding Components to a Compositional Fluid Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Disabling Components in a Compositional Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Specifying Components as Solids in a Compositional Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Adding a Salt Precipitation Reaction Submodel to a Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Overrides for Thermodynamic Method Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Overriding the Binary Interaction Data for an NRTL-Based Fluid Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Overriding the Binary Interaction Data for a Wilson-Based Fluid Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Overriding the Binary Interaction Data for a UNIQUAC-Based Fluid Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Overriding the Binary Interaction Parameters for a Fluid Type that Uses the SRK or PR Equation of State. 154
Overriding the Binary Interaction Parameters for a Fluid Type that Uses the SRKM or PRM Equation of State.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Overriding Henry's Coefficient Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Overriding the Interaction Parameters for the eNRTL Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Overrides for Component Property Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Overriding Temperature-Dependent Property Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Relationship Between Specific Heat Capacity and Enthalpy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Overriding Constant Property Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Available Constant Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Viewing Thermophysical Plots for the Temperature-Dependent Properties of Pure Components. . . . . . . . . 163
Changes to the Enthalpy Basis and Reference State for Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Data Banks for a Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Component Picker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Filtering Components in the Component Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Copying a Fluid Type to the Simulation-Specific Model Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Associating a New Icon with a Fluid Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Chapter 12 Curve Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Opening the Curve Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Defining Variables and Plotting Curve Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Scaling Curve Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Managing Points on the Curve Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Adding a Background Image to Help Accurately Replicate a Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Defining the Maximum and Minimum Curve Chart Axis Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Adding Parametric Variables to a Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Defining Curve Sets for a Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Chapter 13 Mini Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Working with the Mini Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Copying and Pasting between Excel and the Mini Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 7
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Contents

Chapter 14 Trends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Managing Trends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Configuring Trends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Chapter 15 Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Managing Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Configuring Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Chapter 16 Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Managing Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Adding Back Deleted Rows to the Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Generating an Excel Report from Table Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Copying and Pasting Values in a Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Chapter 17 Heat Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Managing Heat Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Configuring a Heat Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Exporting Heat Curve Data to an Excel Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Exporting Heat Curve Data to an HTRI Data File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 18 Phase Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Managing Phase Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Configuring a Phase Envelope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Exporting Phase Envelope Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Chapter 19 Binary Phase Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Managing Binary Phase Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Configuring a Binary Phase Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Exporting Binary Phase Diagram Data to an Excel Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Chapter 20 Ternary Phase Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Managing Ternary Phase Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Configuring a Ternary Phase Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Exporting Ternary Phase Diagram Data to an Excel Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Chapter 21 Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Sorting the Property Inspector by Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 8
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Contents

Chapter 22 Units of Measure (UOMs) and UOM Slates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Opening the UOM Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Creating UOM Slates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Sorting the UOM Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Copying a UOM Slate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Deleting a UOM Slate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Specifying a Default UOM Slate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Chapter 23 Snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Opening the Snapshot Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Managing Snapshots in the Snapshot Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Specified Snapshot Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Managing Snapshots on the Ribbon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Comparing a Snapshot to the Current Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Applying Snapshot Comparison Values to the Current Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Chapter 24 Scenario Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Opening the Scenario Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Managing Scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Recording a Scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Running a Scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Understanding Command Arguments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Chapter 25 Optimization Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Opening the Optimization Set Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Managing Optimization Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Changing the Independent Status of a Variable in an Optimization Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Chapter 26 Case Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Opening the Case Study Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Managing Case Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Specifying the Fallback Snapshot for a Case Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Adding a Variable or Parameter to a Case Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Specifying the Manipulated Variables and Parameters for a Case Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Number of Cases and Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Reordering Variables and Parameters in a Case Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Returning the Simulation to the Initial Point After a Case Study Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Viewing the Results of a Case Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Copying the Results of a Case Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 9
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Contents

Generating and Configuring a Case Study Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Chapter 27 External Data Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Connecting to an OSIsoft PI Data Archive Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Connecting to an OSIsoft PI Asset Framework Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Managing Tag Collections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Adding UOM Mappings for OSIsoft PI Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Excluding Tags from the Tag Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Changing the Time Selection for a Tag Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Reading In Tag Values from an External Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Setting Data Clipping Options for Tag Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Screening Tag Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Setting Model Variables to the Screened Tag Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Updating the Last Good Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Getting Tag Values from the Model Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Reverting to Tag Collections from a Snapshot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Writing Tag Values to the External Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Chapter 28 Script Runner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Opening the AVEVA Process Simulation Scripting Interface Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Adding Scripts to the List of Available Scripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Running a Script (.csx File). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Chapter 29 History Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Opening the History Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Managing the Collection of Data in the History Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Managing Historical Data in the Snapshot Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Chapter 30 AVEVA Unified Engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Appendix A Glossary of Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 10
Chapter 1

Getting Started

This section is intended to provide you with a high-level overview on using AVEVA Process Simulation to build
Simulations. In refers to the various concepts and topics in this document.
For information on writing Model Types, refer to the Model Writing Guide.
Defining Your Role
Based on your role, you can begin writing models or building simulations. When you select a role, certain
elements will be filtered out of the UI. You can create a custom role or switch roles using the Role Manager.
Building Simulations
Simulations are saved to the Repository, where the Model Library and UOM Slates are also stored. The
Repository is stored on your local computer. AVEVA Process Simulation manages access to simulations in the
Repository through a Repository Manager.
AVEVA Process Simulation includes three Simulation Modes: Process Mode, Fluid Flow Mode and Dynamics
Mode. Process mode performs steady-state simulations to create and improve process design, Fluid Flow mode
is a steady-state simulator that models piping networks, and Dynamics mode simulates system transients over
time. You can create a simulation in Process mode, for example, and switch it to Fluid Flow mode by changing
the mode.
Understanding the Simulation Building Components
The Canvas is where you build a visual representation of your simulation. You can drag models onto the Canvas,
connect them using connectors and ports, and add a trend and variable references to it.
The Simulation Manager is a hierarchical view of your simulation and the models contained within it. You can use
the Simulation Manager to view or add models, parameters, variables, equations, submodels, connectors and
ports of a flowsheet. The Keyword View allows you to view and edit objects selected in the Simulation Manager.
When you select a simulation object in the Simulation Manager, the Keyword View displays a detailed view of
your selection; you can edit specific variables and parameter values.
The Properties Inspector allows you quickly to view and edit models from the Canvas without needing to open
the Model Editor.
After you have built a simulation, you can add a Trends to it. Trends plot the time history of a variable in
Dynamics Mode. You can manage trends in AVEVA Process Simulation through the Trend Manager. You can
modify the look and feel of a trend and your changes will be automatically saved and visible on the Trend Chart.
Simulation Building Workflow
The following diagram illustrates a plausible simulation building scenario.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 11
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 1 – Getting Started

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 12
Chapter 2

User Interface

About the User Interface

The AVEVA Process Simulation user interface allows you to write models, build simulations, and view results. The
user interface is intuitive so that you can easily navigate it. As a result, the AVEVA Process Simulation
documentation does not include tasks that are easily understood through the user interface.
The AVEVA Process Simulation user interface is composed of several windows that you can dock, undock, float or
hide. You can change the layout of the windows and your preferences will automatically be saved and displayed
the next time you load AVEVA Process Simulation.

The File menu allows you to create, import, open, rename, copy, delete, and export simulations.
The Application Ribbon contains tabs to help you invoke process, fluid flow, and dynamics simulation actions; set
view preferences; and display the product help. You can switch between tabs at any time.
The Model Library is where Model Types, Fluid Types, Curve Types, and Port Types are stored. It is housed within
a repository on a shared server or on your local computer. Multiple people can access and save items in the
Model Library in a shared repository.
The Model Editor is where you create and modify Model Types representing process equipment, controls, and
other mathematical relationships.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 13
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

The Fluid Editor (not pictured) is where you modify Fluid Types representing the fluids used in your environment.
The Port Editor (not pictured) is where you define how models are connected.
The Curve Editor (not pictured) is where you define and modify Curve Types, which establish dependencies
between variables.
The Mini Inspector (not pictured) is where you quickly view and modify variable specifications and values on the
Canvas.
Through the Canvas, you can build a process simulation composed of the model types in the Model Library. You
can zoom in to, zoom out from, or pan the Canvas.
The Simulation Manager provides an hierarchical tree view of your simulation and the models contained within
it. You can expand items in the tree, specify variables, view the state of equations, modify variable and
parameter values, and more. The Simulation Manager can be modified for your role, or filtered by using custom
filters.
The Snapshot Manager (not pictured) allows you to capture, rename, and delete Snapshots, provide a
description, and select a snapshot to load to return to a previous state.
The Scenario Manager (not pictured) is where you script detailed scenarios so that you can perform a simulation
without manually executing the steps on your own.
The History Manager (not pictured) is where you define the frequency and quantity of simulation data that you
want to save for historical reference.
Through the Keyword View, you can quickly view and edit data when you select a simulation object in the
Simulation Manager. The Keyword View displays a detailed view of your selection.
The Properties Inspector (not pictured) allows you to quickly view and edit model data for models on the
Canvas.
The Messages pane displays a consolidated list of the error and warning messages on the Canvas.
The Status Bar displays server connectivity information, the product version, and more.
The Create a new simulation tab (not pictured) contains a list of simulation templates that you can use to create
a new simulation. This tab appears when you first open AVEVA Process Simulation, when you create a new
simulation by using the File menu, and when you create a new simulation by clicking beside an existing
simulation tab on the Canvas.

Roles
This section describes how you can select a specific role and filter out content that is not relevant to you.

Filtering Capabilities by Role

AVEVA Process Simulation uses roles to hide unnecessary detail and capabilities that you will likely not need. You
can change your role selection, or remove role filtering at a later time, from the Start tab.
AVEVA Process Simulation comes with three built-in roles:
• No Role: For users who will be writing models and writing simulations.
• Simulation Building: For users who will be using existing Model Libraries to build and solve simulations

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 14
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

• Model Writing: For users who will be creating or modifying Model Types in Model Libraries
When you create a role, it is saved in the %LocalAppData%\SimSci\SimCentral\Custom directory, and will be
retained if you uninstall and reinstall AVEVA Process Simulation.
To select a role:
• On the Start tab, in the Roles group, select a different role from the list box. If you do not want to define a
role, you can select No Role.

If you select a task-specific role, the capabilities of AVEVA Process Simulation outside of the role will be
filtered out.

Opening the Roles Manager

To display the Roles Manager:
1. Select the Start tab.

2. In the Roles group, click Create and modify Roles .

Creating or Modifying a Role

You can create or modify a role to hide unnecessary detail and capabilities you will likely not perform.
To create or modify a role:
1. Open the Roles Manager.

2. Click or select an existing role.

3. Enter the Name of the role.

4. Select the appropriate checkbox to show the Process tab, Fluid Flow tab, or Dynamics tab in the user
interface.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 15
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

5. Select the appropriate checkbox to show editing options for Model Library help and properties.
6. Select the appropriate checkbox to show hidden Model Types in the Library Manager.
7. Select the appropriate checkbox to allow editing in the Model Library.
8. Select the appropriate checkbox to display only favorites in your simulation.
9. In the Sim Manager Filter list, select Simulation Building, Model Writing, the name of a previously saved
filter, or Create Filter.
▪ If you select Simulation Building, Model Writing, or a previously saved filter, the settings for the role are
automatically applied to the Simulation Manager view. You can then close the Roles Manager.
▪ If you select Create Filter, refer to Creating a Quick Filter for a Role. After creating your Quick Filter,
select it from the Sim Manager Filter list for your new role.

Creating a Quick Filter for a Role

You can use the Simulation Manager Quick Filter to configure what the Simulation Manager shows based on your
chosen role.
To create a new Quick Filter for a role:
1. From within the Roles Manager, select the list in the Sim Manager Filter column to which you want to apply
a filter and select Create Filter.
The Quick Filter dialog box appears:

If you do not see the options shown in the preceding figure, first select an existing Quick Filter from the list
at the top of the Quick Filter dialog box.
2. Define your filter:
a. Select a category's checkbox to include all items within that category, or clear the checkbox to hide
them.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 16
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

b. To include or exclude specific items, expand a category by selecting the chevron (>) first. You can then
select individual items within that category for inclusion or exclusion.
c. You can also select the Show/Hide All checkbox to display all item types regardless of other checkbox
selections, or clear this checkbox to rely on the individual selections below it.
3. Enter a name for this Quick Filter in the Save Quick Filter as text box.
4. Click Save.
Your Quick Filter is now ready to be applied to the Simulation Manager based on the role from the Roles
Manager's Sim Manager Filter list.

Viewing Hidden Models, Submodels, and Ports

The Roles Manager allows you to show or hide models, submodels, and ports in the Model Library that are
marked as hidden in the Model Editor or Port Editor.
To view hidden models, submodels, and ports:
1. Open the Roles Manager from the application ribbon.
2. Select the role for which you want to view hidden models, submodels, and ports, and then ensure that the

checkbox is selected.

User Interface Badging

To convey information in an intuitive way close to the source of the problem, AVEVA Process Simulation
dynamically badges objects displayed on the user interface.
As a rule of thumb, green badges signify a good, solvable state or default data, blue badges signify that
something has been set or touched by a user, yellow badges indicate a warning state and red badges mean that
there is an error.
The following table lists the variety of badges used in AVEVA Process Simulation, and what each badge means.
Badge or Attribute Where Found Applies To Description

Model Editor, Fluid Parameters, The item is OK.

Editor, Port Editor conditions,
connections,
variables, equations,
models, ports, and
external
Model Editor, Fluid Parameters, The item contains a problem.
Editor, Port Editor conditions, Hover over the badge for more
connections, information.
variables, equations,
models, ports, and
external

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 17
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Badge or Attribute Where Found Applies To Description

Simulation Manager Equations The equation is part of a system of

equations that is correctly
specified and can be solved.
Simulation Manager Equations The equation is part of a system of
equations that cannot be solved.
Hover over the badge to see more
information.
Simulation Manager, Variables, parameters Default data or action that may be
Properties Inspector, overridden.
Keyword View
The badge is not displayed in the
Simulation Manager or Keyword
View, but it is displayed in the
Property Inspector.
Simulation Manager, Variables, Required data must be supplied or
Properties Inspector, parameters, Canvas confirm the current value.
Mini Inspector,
You can also recover the value
Canvas
from a snapshot. If the variable is
invariant, you can use the recover
invariant data option from the
Snapshot Manager.
Simulation Manager, Variables, User-supplied data is outside of
Properties Inspector, parameters, Canvas normal limits.
Keyword View,
simulation Canvas

Canvas, Simulation Models Equipment model refers to a

Manager Model Type that cannot be found.
The model can still be solved
unless the red "X" (not solved)
badge is displayed.
Simulation Manager, Variables, parameters User-supplied data; entry satisfied.
Properties Inspector,
The badge is not displayed in the
Keyword View
Simulation Manager or Keyword
View, but it is displayed in the
Properties Inspector.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 18
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Badge or Attribute Where Found Applies To Description

Properties Inspector, Equations, model The equation or model instance is

Simulation Manager, instances not solved.
Keyword View, Canvas
variable references,
Mini Inspector
Properties Inspector, Variable values The variable value is not solved.
Simulation Manager,
Keyword View, Canvas
variable references,
Mini Inspector
Simulation Manager, Variable specification A cleared checkbox indicates that
Keyword View, the variable is calculated.
Properties Inspector,
A selected checkbox indicates that
Mini Inspector
the value of the variable is
specified.
Simulation Manager, Variable specification A black checkbox background
Properties Inspector, indicates that you cannot change
Mini Inspector the Specified status for the
variable. For example, if the
variable is calculated, you cannot
change the variable to a specified
variable.
If you need to change the
specification status for the
variable, a Model Writer must
modify the model so that you can
change the status.
Simulation Manager, Variable specification The equipment model is either
Keyword View, overspecified or underspecified.
Properties Inspector, The red checkbox background
Mini Inspector indicates that this variable can be
specified (or calculated) to get you
closer to a properly-specified
system.

Simulation Manager, Variable Specification The blue and red box indicates that
Keyword View, you have overidden the variable
Properties Inspector, and that it is also overspecified or
Mini Inspector underspecified.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 19
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Badge or Attribute Where Found Applies To Description

Simulation Manager, Variable specification The blue checkbox background

Keyword View, indicates that you have changed
Properties Inspector, the specified or calculated status
Mini Inspector so that it is now different from the
original (default) setting defined in
the Model Editor.

Simulation and User Preferences

AVEVA Process Simulation supports user and simulation preferences.
You can change user preferences, such as the Canvas background or display theme, and keep the preferences
you select when you work with different simulations. When you change a user preference, the change is
automatically saved and will remain when you close and restart AVEVA Process Simulation.
Simulation preferences, such as choosing to display model and connector labels, are saved on a per-simulation
basis; for example, if you choose to hide model labels on simulation A, but want to display them on simulation B,
each preference will be saved in the simulation to which it applies.

Monitoring the Solved Status of a Simulation

You can monitor that your simulation and its components are solved via the Simulation Manager and Properties
Inspector.
To check that a simulation is solved:
Refer to the Solution Status section of any of the AVEVA Process Simulation tabs other than the Help tab to
check if the simulation currently displayed on the Canvas is solved. This feature analyzes the simulation as a
whole to indicate the following, from left to right:
• The simulation's required data has been confirmed
• The simulation is properly specified
• The solution is solved
For example, the following indicates a solved simulation in which all three of these criteria are met:

While the following indicates an unsolved simulation in which none of the criteria are met:

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 20
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

To correct a simulation:
1. Refer to the Simulation Manager. When a simulation is unsolved, a red badge appears next to the simulation,
the main Flowsheet, and the Canvas object(s) responsible for the unsolved status. Hover the mouse pointer
over the badge for details.
The icon indicates that required data is not provided.
The icon indicates that the simulation is unsolved because it is not properly specified.
In the example below, the Flowsheet displays an unsolved status, indicating that the XV1 Canvas object
requires user input.

2. Open the Mini Inspector for the responsible Canvas objects to correct the variables responsible for the
status. Variables responsible for causing an unsolved status due to improper specification appear with a red
background in their checkboxes. In this case, you may want to add a checkbox to Q, to DP, or possibly both.
Knowing what to specify depends on your understanding of the problem that you are trying to solve.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 21
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Note: The checkboxes indicate the specification status of a variable. If the checkbox is selected, the variable
is user-specified. If cleared, the variable is calculated by AVEVA Process Simulation.
3. Correct the indicated items by specifying appropriate values.
4. Once you have corrected the items responsible for the unsolved status, the red badges are removed from
the Simulation Manager and the Mini Inspector.
A solved simulation displays as follows in the Simulation Manager:

Navigating the Canvas

You can zoom in to, out from, and pan the Canvas.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 22
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

To navigate the Canvas using the Canvas controls:

1. Open or create a new simulation.
2. Locate the Canvas controls on the upper right corner of the Canvas pane and use them to do the following:

▪ Click Zoom-In or Zoom-Out to increase or decrease the size of the Canvas.

▪ Click Pan to navigate the Canvas.

▪ Click Zoom to fit to make the entire flowsheet fit in the Canvas pane.

▪ Click Reset to reset the Canvas to its default orientation.

To navigate the Canvas using the Overview:
1. Open or create a new simulation.

2. Locate the Overview bar in the lower right corner of the Canvas.

3. Click the arrow to open the Overview. You will see a small view of the entire simulation. The blue
rectangle indicates the portion that is visible in the Canvas window.
4. Drag the blue rectangle to navigate the Canvas.
5. Drag one of the corners of the blue rectangle to increase or decrease the size of the Canvas.

6. Click the arrow to close the Overview.

When you close a simulation, your Canvas orientation settings will not be saved.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 23
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Printing the Canvas

You can print the Canvas, which you can then share with others who may not have access to your AVEVA Process
Simulation repository. You can also use the print features to export the Canvas as a .pdf file. To do this, you
should change the printer to a PDF printer, for example, the Microsoft Print to PDF printer that is included with
Windows 10 operating systems.
You can use a number of different settings and paper sizes to make the printed Canvas image more aesthetic.

Activity Directions

Printing the canvas On the Start tab, in the Printing group, click Print
options . The Print Options dialog box appears.
Click Print.
Viewing the page breaks On the Start tab, in the Printing group, click Page
break . Boxes appear on the Canvas that indicate
what each page will contain when you print the
Canvas.
Changing the page orientation On the Start tab, in the Printing group, select either
Portrait or Landscape.
Or
On the Start tab, in the Printing group, click Print
options . The Print Options dialog box appears.
In the Settings area, in the page orientation list
group, select either Portrait Orientation or
Landscape Orientation.
Changing the page size On the Start tab, in the Printing group, in the list
box, select a standard paper size.
Or
On the Start tab, in the Printing group, click Print
options . The Print Options dialog box appears.
In the Settings area, in the paper size list, select the
standard paper size that you want to print to.
Changing the page scaling On the Start tab, in the Printing group, move the
Page Scale slider to adjust the scaling of the Canvas
compared to the page size. We recommend that you
view the page breaks on the Canvas when you
adjust the scaling.
Viewing the print preview On the Start tab, in the Printing group, click Print
options . The Print Options dialog box appears.
The Print Preview pane contains a preview of the
print job.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 24
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Activity Directions

Applying a stretch option On the Start tab, in the Printing group, click Print
options . The Print Options dialog box appears.
In the Settings area, in the page selection list, select
one of the following stretch options:
▪ Multiple Page: Do not resize the Canvas
image. The image will print on several
pages if it does not fit on a single page.
▪ Single Page: Resize the Canvas image so
that it fits on a single page and entirely
fills the page. This may distort the
image.
Changing the printer On the Start tab, in the Printing group, click Print
options . The Print Options dialog box appears.
In the Printer list, select the printer that you want to
use.
Printing more than one copy On the Start tab, in the Printing group, click Print
options . The Print Options dialog box appears.
In the Copies box, type or select the number of
copies that you want to print.
Changing the collation for the print job On the Start tab, in the Printing group, click Print
options . The Print Options dialog box appears.
In the Settings area, in the collation selection list,
select Collated or Uncollated.
Changing the page range for the print job On the Start tab, in the Printing group, click Print
options . The Print Options dialog box appears.
In the Settings area, in the Pages boxes, type or
select the first and last pages in the page range. The
range selection automatically changes from Print All
Pages to Custom Print when your selected page
range does not include all of the pages in the print
preview.

Floating, Docking, and Hiding Windows

You can modify the layout of the AVEVA Process Simulation application windows to fit your preference.
To modify the layout of the AVEVA Process Simulation application windows:
1. Click the Window Position chevron button in the application window you want to float, dock or hide.
2. If you select Floating, the application window will detach from the parent AVEVA Process Simulation client
window.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 25
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

3. If you select Dockable, when you move the detached application window, you will be presented with several
dock locations:

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 26
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

4. To dock the application window, drag and drop it onto one of the dock locations.

5. If you select Auto Hide, when the application window is not selected, it will be automatically nested into the
location in which it is docked. To display the application window, hover over its location.
6. If you select Hide, the window will be hidden.

Showing and Hiding Model Libraries

You can show or hide Model Libraries in your simulation. This allows you to quickly access the libraries that you
use most often and hide libraries that you rarely use. Typically, you should use as few libraries as possible for a
single simulation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 27
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Note that if all the models in the Model Library are hidden from simulation builders, you cannot show the Model
Library when you are working under the Simulation Building role. See Hiding a Model or Port for more
information.
To show or hide Model Libraries:
1. On the Model Library pane, right-click the tab for a Model Library, and then click Show/Hide Library. The
Show/Hide Library dialog box appears.
2. Select or clear the Show check box for the appropriate Model Library.

Copying and Pasting Models or Shapes

You can select multiple models or shapes on the Canvas or Simulation Manager and copy and paste them.
The following rules apply when you copy and paste on the Canvas or Simulation Manager:
• All attributes and values are copied from the originating model, including the description, parameter/
variable values, specifications, formatting, etc.
• Copied objects can be pasted multiple times
• Copied objects can be pasted into a different simulation
• You can use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl-C and Ctrl-V to perform copy and paste operations
• You can use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl-Z and Ctrl-Y to undo or redo the copy and paste operation.
To copy and paste a model or shape on the Canvas:
1. Right-click a single model or shape, or select multiple objects by clicking and dragging along the Canvas.
2. Select Copy.

3. Right-click blank space on the Canvas and select Paste.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 28
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

The model or shape will be pasted, and you can create connections to other objects.

Connecting Models on the Simulation Canvas

You can use connectors to connect models on the Canvas. You can also add models to a pre-existing stream,
provided that they have exactly one input and one output port (single or multiple) and that the output ports
match the connection type.
If a model has a single input port and a single output port and you delete it from the simulation, you do not need
to reconnect any of the connectors. AVEVA Process Simulation deletes the output connector from the deleted
model and automatically connects the input connector of the deleted model to the downstream model.

To connect models using connectors:

1. Browse to the Canvas.
2. Hover over a model.
The available ports are highlighted.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 29
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

3. Hover over an available port.

A targeting animation appears over the port.

4. Click and hold the port. While continuing to hold the mouse button, drag the end of the model connector to
the target model.
As you move the mouse over the target model, the available ports appear and are highlighted.
5. Hover over the target port.
A targeting animation appears over the port.

6. Release the mouse button to complete the connection.

After you have connected two models on the Canvas, you can reposition them and the connector shifts with
them.
To temporarily disconnect a model connector from a model:
• Click the connector to select it and then drag the desired end away from the model.
To connect a model to a pre-existing stream:
1. Click and drag a model onto a pre-existing stream.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 30
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

2. Drop the model.

The existing stream becomes the inlet stream, and AVEVA Process Simulation adds a stream from the newly
inserted model to the original destination.

Adding Submodels to Model Instances on the Canvas

You can add submodels to existing model instances on the Canvas. This feature allows you to extend the
standard library models without making local copies of or modifications to the standard library models. This
ensures that all models in your simulation continue to receive regular updates and new functionality with each
new software version.
This feature is also useful when you need additional submodels in some, but not all, model instances on the
Canvas. For example, you can use the submodels in the Economics Library to add economic data and calculations
to only the model instances that have feed costs, utility costs, or product gains associated with them.
You can add only the submodels that you have configured as replaceable submodels.
To add a submodel to a model instance on the Canvas:
• Do one of the following:
▪ In the Simulation Manager, right-click the model instance that you want to extend. Then, on the Add
Submodel submenu, on the associated library submenu, select the desired replaceable submodel.
▪ On the Canvas, right-click the model instance that you want to extend. Then, on the Submodels
submenu, on the Add submenu, on the associated library submenu, select the desired replaceable
submodel.
▪ From the Model Library, press and hold Shift, and then drag the desired replaceable submodel onto the
model instance on the Canvas.

Filtering Variables and Parameters

You can filter specific parameters and variables in the Properties Inspector or Keyword View to include or exclude
information when you are building a simulation. When you set a filter, the filter is saved and automatically
loaded when you launch AVEVA Process Simulation.
The following filter operators are supported by AVEVA Process Simulation: Equals, Not Equals, Less than, Less
than or equal to, Greater than, Greater than or equal to, Contains, Does not contain, Like (wildcards), Not like
(wildcards), Match (regular expression), Does not match (regular expression), Starts with, Does not start with,
Ends with and Does not end with.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 31
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

To set a filter:
1. Display the Properties Inspector or Keyword View, depending on where you want to filter a variable or
parameter. If you want to filter a variable or parameter in the Properties Inspector, expand the Parameters
or Variables section.

2. Click the On/Off Filter icon . A set of filters will display for each of the columns in the section or view that
contains the data set you are working with.
3. Click the filter icon directly underneath the column you want to filter and select a filter from the list that
displays. When you set a filter, the appropriate icon assigned to the filter will appear underneath the
column; for example, if you select Equals, will display. You can set individual filters on multiple columns.

4. Click the filter chevron and select a filter criterion option from the list that displays. If you select Custom,
you can create custom, more granular filters to help filter in or out the data you want to display, such as the
ability to add conditions, groups, etc. The options in the filter drop-down differ depending on the type of
filter you selected in step 3.

5. Click OK to set a custom filter.

The data in the columns will be filtered based on the defined criteria.

Creating a Flowsheet Equation on the Canvas

Flowsheet equations are equations that you add to your simulation to account for an additional specification or
requirement that you want to impose on the simulation.
For example, if you want to define a 5°F approach temperature on one side of a heat exchanger, you can add the
following equation to the Canvas:
HX1.Tto - HX2.Tsi = 5/1.8
You must specify the flowsheet equations in internal units of measure.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 32
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

You can use the same functions that Model Writers use in the model equations to define your flowsheet
equations. See Mathematical Functions in the AVEVA Process Simulation Model Writing Guide for more
information.
For each flowsheet equation that you add to your simulation, you must change one variable in the simulation
from specified to calculated. This ensures that your simulation remains square.
When you create a flowsheet equation, it automatically appears on the Canvas in its own movable box. You can
rename the flowsheet equation and define its formula within this box.
You can enable or disable a flowsheet equation for each simulation mode. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation
automatically enables a flowsheet equation in only the simulation mode in which you create it. See Enabling
Flowsheet Equations by Simulation Mode for more information.
To create a flowsheet equation:
1. On the Model Library, on the Tools tab, drag an Equation onto the Canvas.
Alternatively, in the Simulation Manager, right-click the Main flowsheet and then click Add Equation.
2. Rename the flowsheet equation if desired, and then define its formula.
Flowsheet equations must use the internal units for any variables that you include in the formula. See
Internal Units of Measure for more details.

Internal Units of Measure

AVEVA Process Simulation carries out all calculations in terms of the internal units of measure (UOMs). You
should take this into consideration when you add equations to a Model Type or add a flowsheet equation to a
simulation. If your equations include any coefficients that include UOM conversion factors or that are specific to
a UOM, you should convert those coefficients to the internal UOMs.
The following table lists the internal UOMs by category.

Variable Type Internal UOM

Controls
Signal fraction
Currency
Currency ¤
Currency / Area ¤/m2
Currency / Energy ¤/kWs
Currency / Mass ¤/kg
Currency / Time ¤/s
Currency / Volume ¤/m3
Dimensionless
Dimensionless -

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 33
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Variable Type Internal UOM

Fraction fraction
Ratio -
Real -
Electrical
Apparent Power kVA
Capacitance F
Current A
Current Density A/m2
Electrical Charge C
Electrical Conductance S
Electrical Energy kJ
Electrical Power kW
Electrical Resistivity kΩ-m
Frequency Hz
Inductance H
Inverse Capacitance 1/F
Inverse Electrical Charge 1/C
Irradiance kW/m2
Resistance kΩ
Temp Coefficient fraction/K
Voltage kV
Emissions
Emission / Energy kg/kJ
Emission / Mass kg/kg
Emission / Volume kg/m3
Emission Rate kg/s
Equipment Sizing
Diameter m
Elevation m

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 34
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Variable Type Internal UOM

Length m
Location m
Pipe Diameter m
Thermal Expansion mm/mm/C
Thickness mm
Flow Rates
Heat Flow kJ/s
Liquid Vol Flow m3/s
Mass Flow kg/s
Mole Flow kmol/s
Std Liquid Vol Flow m3/s
Std Vapor Vol Flow kmol/s
Vapor Vol Flow m3/s
Vol Flow m3/s
Heat Transfer
Heat Conductance kW/K
Heat Duty kJ/s
Heat Flux Density kW/m2
Heat Transfer Coefficient kW/m2-K
Heat Transfer Resistance m2-K/kW
Surface Area m2
Temperature Difference K
Holdup
Energy kJ
Mass kg
Metal Mass kg
Moles kmol
Volume m3
Hydraulics

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 35
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Variable Type Internal UOM

API Relief Valve Coefficient SI

Compressibility 1/kPa
Cross Sectional Area m2
Diff Pressure kPa
Elastic Modulus kPa
F-Factor √Pa
Flow Coefficient Cv
Flow Conductance (kg/s)/sqrt(kPa-kg/m3)
Gas Head kJ/kg
Joule Thomson Coefficient K/kPa
Liquid Head m
Packing Pressure Drop mbar/m
Piping Head Loss kPa/m
Velocity m/s
Mass Fluid Properties
Mass Composition mass fraction
Mass Concentration kg/m3
Mass Density kg/m3
Mass Enthalpy kJ/kg
Mass Entropy kJ/kg-K
Specific Gravity -
Specific Heat kJ/kg-K
Mass Transfer
Diffusivity m2/s
Inverted Mass Transfer Coefficient s/m
Mass Flux kg/m2-s
Mass Transfer Coefficient m/s
Molar Flux kmol/m2-s
Specific Length m/m2

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 36
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Variable Type Internal UOM

Specific Surface m2/m3

Mechanical
Acceleration m/s2
Angle rad
Heat Rate kJ/kJ
Mechanical Power kW
Rotational Inertia kg-m2
Sound dB
Speed rpm
Torque N-m
Molar Fluid Properties
Molality kmol/kg
Molar Composition mole fraction
Molar Concentration kmol/m3
Molar Density kmol/m3
Molar Enthalpy kJ/kmol
Molar Entropy kJ/kmol-K
Molar Heat Capacity kJ/kmol-K
Molar Volume m3/kmol
Molar Weight kg/kmol
Pressure and Temperature
Pressure kPa
Temperature K
Reaction Kinetics
Reaction Rate per Volume kmol/s-m3
Reaction Rate per Unit Feed kmol/kmol
Reaction Rate per Weight kmol/s-kg
Time
Inverse Time 1/s

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 37
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Variable Type Internal UOM

Time s
Transport Properties
Electrical Conductivity S/m
Kinematic Viscosity m2/s
Surface Tension N/m
Thermal Conductivity W/m-K
Viscosity Pa-s
Volume Fluid Properties
Gas Oil Ratio m3/m3
Standard Liquid Density kg/m3
Vol Composition fraction
Vol Enthalpy kJ/m3

Enabling Flowsheet Equations by Simulation Mode

You can enable or disable a flowsheet equation for each simulation mode. This feature gives you greater control
and flexibility when designing and running your simulations in the various simulation modes.
When you first create a flowsheet equation, AVEVA Process Simulation automatically enables it in the simulation
mode in which you create it. For example, if your simulation is in Process mode when you create a flowsheet
equation, the flowsheet equation is enabled in Process mode but not in Fluid Flow or Dynamics mode.
Each enabled flowsheet equation requires you to change one specified variable to a calculated variable to
maintain the squareness of your simulation. If you plan to enable a flowsheet equation in more than one
simulation mode, you should ensure that the variable that you choose to calculate has the same default
specification status in all the applicable simulation modes. Otherwise, your simulation may become unsquare
when you switch between the simulation modes and you may need to switch another specified variable to a
calculated variable. This is especially true when you switch between Process mode, a flow-driven simulation
mode, and Fluid Flow mode, a pressure-driven simulation mode.
If you disable a flowsheet equation in all the simulation modes, it has no effect on the simulation.
To enable a flowsheet equation for a simulation mode:
• Either in the Simulation Manager or on the Canvas, right-click the flowsheet equation, and then on the
Modes submenu, select the desired simulation mode.
A check mark appears next to each simulation mode for which the flowsheet equation is already enabled.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 38
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Modifying the Simulation Canvas Appearance

The Edit/View tab provides options for modifying the appearance of the Canvas. This section outlines the
capabilities of showing or hiding model and connector labels, showing or hiding grids and guides, changing the
color of the Canvas and of Canvas objects, changing the color and style of connectors, and changing the fonts
used by Canvas objects and connectors.

Edit/View Tab Section Purpose

Color and Style Change the color of the Canvas and of Canvas
objects.
Change the color and style of connectors.
Format Text Change the fonts used by Canvas objects and
connectors.
Grids and Guides Show or hide grids, rulers, and guides and choose
to "snap" items to the grid.
Show Show or hide the Simulation Manager, Keyword
View, Mini Inspector, Model Library, Messages,
and Status Bar.

Data Entry Enables colored borders for data entry fields in

the Simulation Manager, Keyword View and
Properties Inspector.
Improper values (for example, values that are not
square, or are out-of-bounds) are surrounded
with a yellow border.
Required input values that you have not
confirmed or changed are surrounded with a red
border.
Labels Show or hide model and connector labels. Lock
the position of the model and connector labels.
Canvas Various options for navigating the Canvas. See
Navigating the Simulation Canvas for more
information.
Example: Aligning Canvas Objects with Grids and Guides
Grids and guides help with the alignment of objects in your simulation.
1. Within the Grids and Guides group:
2. Check the box labeled Rulers to display ruler markings on the axes of the Canvas.
3. Check the box labeled Grid Lines to display a grid underlay in the Canvas.
4. Check the box labeled Snap to Grid to make simulation objects snap to grid lines automatically when moved.
This function works whether or not Grid Lines are enabled.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 39
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

5. Check the box labeled Guide Line to display a red line when a simulation object being moved is aligned
vertically or horizontally with an adjacent simulation object. This function requires the Snap to Grid function.

The selected changes are applied to the Canvas.

Defining Global Parameters and Variables

A global parameter or variable is a parameter or variable that has the same value for all model instances on the
Canvas. For example, if you define the ambient temperature, Tamb, as a global parameter, you can update its
value for one model instance and AVEVA Process Simulation applies that change to all model instances on the
Canvas that contain the Tamb parameter.
Only Model Editors can define a parameter or variable as a global parameter or variable. However, Simulation
Builders can turn on or turn off the tracking for a global parameter or variable for any model instance on the
Canvas. For example, if you define the pipe size as a global variable, you can choose whether a Pipe on the
Canvas tracks and uses the value of this global pipe size or maintains its own value for the pipe size separate
from the global pipe size.

On the Mini Inspector and the Properties Inspector, the Global badge appears next to global parameters and
variables. The color of this badge indicates the tracking status of the global parameter or variable for the
associated model instance. If the badge is colored, the model instance tracks and uses the global value. If the
badge is blank, the model instance maintains its own value separate from the global value.
You can turn on or turn off the tracking for a global parameter or variable by using the Properties Inspector for a
model instance. Please see Changing the Tracking for Global Parameters and Variables in the AVEVA Process
Simulation Simulation Building Guide for more information.
If you have more than one Model Type that contains a parameter or variable that you want to define as a global
parameter or variable, you should define that parameter or variable as a global parameter or variable in all the
Model Types. Otherwise, the global parameter or variable won't track across to the model instances that are
based on a Model Type that does not include the global definition for that parameter or variable.
Currently, you can define only Real and Enumerated parameters as global parameters.
To define a parameter as an Global parameter:
1. Ensure that the Model Writing role is selected. See Roles.
2. Open the Model Editor for the desired Model Type.
3. Expand the Parameters section.

4. Click the Global icon to flag the parameter as a global parameter.

To define a variable as a Global variable:
1. Ensure that the Model Writing role is selected. See Roles.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 40
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

2. Open the Model Editor for the desired Model Type.

3. Expand the Variables section.

4. Click the Global icon to flag the variable as a global variable.

Finding an Object in the Flowsheet

You can use the search box at the upper right corner of the canvas to find an object in the flowsheet. This allows
you to quickly locate objects of interest in large models.
To find an object in the flowsheet:
1. Press Ctrl+F. A search box appears in the upper right corner of the canvas.
2. In the search box, type a portion of the name of the object, and then press Enter.
3. On the canvas, AVEVA Process Simulation selects the first object that meets the search criteria.

4. Click Next to select the next object that meets the search criteria.

5. Click Previous to select the previous object that meets the search criteria.

Viewing the Changed Specifications in a Simulation

When you change the default specification status (specified or calculated) for a variable, AVEVA Process
Simulation adds the variable to the list in the Changed Specifications window. Based on how you open the
Changed Specifications window, you can limit the list to only the changed specifications for:
• A model
• A group of selected models
• A single flowsheet
• The entire simulation
AVEVA Process Simulation groups each variable into a specification set. See Specification Sets for more
information.
The following table gives the procedures for opening the Changed Specifications window for each context.

Activity Directions

Viewing the changed specifications for a model On the Canvas, right-click the model, and then
select Changed Specifications.

Viewing the changed specifications for a group On the Canvas, select the desired models. Right-
of selected models click the selection, and then select Changed
Specifications.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 41
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Activity Directions

Viewing the changed specifications for a single Right-click the tab for the flowsheet, and then select
flowsheet Changed Specifications.

Viewing the changed specifications for an entire Right-click the simulation tab, and then select
simulation Changed Specifications.

Specification Sets
About Specification Sets
Specification sets provide information about how a simulation was designed by grouping variables for which you
have changed the default specification status. AVEVA Process Simulation automatically creates specification sets
as you change the specification status for variables. When you change a simulation so that the simulation is no
longer properly specified, the software creates and opens a specification set. The specification set includes any
variables for which you change the default specification status until the simulation is once again properly
specified. When the simulation is again properly specified, the software closes the specification set.
While adding flowsheet equations affects whether the simulation is properly specified, specification sets do not
account for the impact of flowsheet equations. Therefore, a specification set can include an odd number of
variables.
If a Scenario changes the specification status of any variables, the specification sets change as the Scenario runs.
Specification sets typically contain only two variables, since the simulation switches between improperly and
properly specified as you swap the specification status for two variables. However, when the Auto Solve feature
and the specifications analysis are disabled, the specification sets can contain any number of variables, since the
simulation does not return to a properly specified state until you solve the simulation. See Disabling the
Specifications Analysis While Manually Solving Your Simulation for more information.
AVEVA Process Simulation automatically merges specification sets when you remove variables from the list of
changed specifications. You remove variables from the list by doing one of the following:
• Change the variable back to its default specification status.
• Change the configuration parameters for a model instance so that the model instance no longer includes the
variable.
• Delete the variable from the Model Type by using the Model Editor.
If the removed variable was part of a closed specification set and there are no other open specification sets, the
software keeps the modified specification set open until the simulation is once again properly specified.
If the removed variable was part of a closed specification set and there is an existing open specification set, the
software merges the two specifications sets into a single specification set.
If the removed variable was part of an open specification set, the software simply removes the variable and
deletes the specification set if it doesn't include any other variables.
Concepts
• A specification set can include multiple variables

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 42
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

• When specifications analysis is enabled, specification sets typically include only two variables
• AVEVA Process Simulation automatically creates and opens a specification set when you change a simulation
so that the simulation is no longer properly specified
• AVEVA Process Simulation closes a specification set when the simulation is once again properly specified
• AVEVA Process Simulation automatically merges or deletes specification sets when you remove variables
from the list of changed specifications
• You currently cannot rename specification sets or move variables between specification sets
Actions
• Create specification sets by changing the specification status of variables
• Sort and filter variables in the Changed Specifications window or Property Inspector by specification set (that
is, the values in the Set column)

Managing the Default User Interface Layout and Appearance

Preferences
You can save changes you make to the user interface layout and your appearance preferences, revert back to
your last saved layout and preference selections and reset to the AVEVA Process Simulation defaults by clicking
the appropriate button in the Layout section on the Edit/View ribbon menu.

Function Label Purpose

Factory Restore the default AVEVA Process Simulation

application window layout and appearance
preferences.
Restore Restore to the last saved application window
layout and appearance preferences.
Save Save the application window layout and
appearance preferences.

Managing the Connector Appearance

You can change the appearance of the connectors (streams) on the Canvas.

Activity Directions

Changing connector routing to a straight line Right-click the connector (stream). On the
Connectors submenu, on the Routing submenu,
click Straight-Line. The connector now appears as a
single angled straight line.
Hiding the labels for connectors On the Edit/View tab, in the Labels group, clear
the Connectors check box.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 43
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Activity Directions

Changing the arrow position for a connector Right-click the connector (stream). On the
Connectors submenu, on the Direction Arrow
submenu, click Center to make the direction
arrows appear at the center of the lines for the
connector; click End to make a single direction
arrow appear at the end of the connector.

Changing the Connector Type

Connectors in a simulation can use either a basic connector that displays a limited number of properties or a
connection model. A connection model is an AVEVA Process Simulation model that you can use as a connector. It
appears the same as a basic connector (a line) on the Canvas, but it has all the variables and the full functionality
of that model. The names of these connector models correspond to the AVEVA Process Simulation models that
they include.
The default connection model that a simulation uses depends on the simulation template that you use to create
the simulation. You cannot use a connector model if its model library is hidden. The following table lists the
connection models by simulation template.

Simulation Template Default Connection Model Available Connection Models

Process Process.Stream Basic connector

Process.Stream
Process.Recycle
Steam StreamLib.Stream Basic connector
SteamLib.Stream
SteamLib.Recycle
Flare Basic connector Basic connector
FlareLib.Pipe
FlareLib.PipeRig
Cooling Water CWLib.Pipe Basic connector
CWLib.Pipe

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 44
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Simulation Template Default Connection Model Available Connection Models

All Libraries Basic connector Basic connector

Process.Stream
Process.Recycle
SteamLib.Stream
SteamLib.Recycle
FlareLib.Pipe
FlareLib.PipeRig
CWLib.Pipe
The following table lists the actions that you can perform with connection models.

Activity Directions

Changing the default connector model for the In the Canvas area, right-click the tab for the
simulation simulation, and then click Connection Models. The
Connection Models dialog box appears. In the
Models list for each port, select the connector
model that you want to use for that port
connection.
Showing connector models On the Canvas, right-click a connector or a
selection that includes one or more connectors. If
the selection includes a connector model, on the
Connection Models submenu, the Show Model
submenu appears. In this submenu, click the
connector model that you want to show. The
associated model appears on the Canvas and
AVEVA Process Simulation creates basic connectors
on either side of the model.
If your selection does not include a connector
model, you cannot see the Show Model submenu.
Hiding connector models On the Canvas, select one or more models. Right-
click the selection. If you can use any of the models
in the selection as a connector model, on the
Connection Models submenu, the Hide Model
submenu appears. In this submenu, click the
connector type that you want to hide. AVEVA
Process Simulation converts the model and its two
basic connectors to a single connector model.
If your selection does not include a model that you
can use as a connector model, you cannot see the
Hide Model submenu.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 45
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Activity Directions

Converting a basic connector to a connection On the Canvas, select one or more connectors.
model Right-click the selection. If the selection includes a
basic connector, on the Connection Models
submenu, the Make Model submenu appears. In
this submenu, click the connector type to which
you want to convert all of the basic connectors in
the selection.
If your selection does not include a basic
connector, you cannot see the Make Model
submenu.
Converting a connection model to a basic On the Canvas, select one or more connectors.
connector Right-click the selection. If the selection includes a
connection model, on the Connection Models
submenu, the Remove Model submenu appears. In
this submenu, click the connector type that you
want to convert to basic connectors.
If your selection does not include a connector
model, you cannot see the Remove Model
submenu.

Managing the Variable Reference Appearance

You can change the appearance of the Variable References on the Canvas.

Activity Directions

Hiding the name of the variable Right-click the Variable Reference. On the Variable
References submenu, if the Show Name command
is checked, select it to hide the name.
You can always hover over the Variable Reference
to see the name and description displayed in a
tooltip.
Hiding the display units of the variable Right-click the Variable Reference. On the Variable
References submenu, if the Show Units command
is checked, select it to hide the display units.
Hiding the specification status for the variable Right-click the Variable Reference. On the Variable
References submenu, if the Show Specification
command is checked, select it to hide the
specification status checkbox for the variable.
You can change the specification status by clearing
or selecting this checkbox.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 46
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Activity Directions

Displaying the Canvas description for the variable Right-click the Variable Reference. On the Variable
References submenu, select Show Specification to
display the Canvas description for the variable.
The Canvas descriptions are different from the
descriptions that you see in tooltips or in the
Property Inspector. They are blank until you type in
your own descriptions. You can use the Canvas
descriptions to annotate your simulations.
For example, if you change the specification status
for a variable, you can then add notes regarding
when and why you changed the specification
status. This is especially useful if you plan to share
your simulations with others.

Aligning Variable References on the Canvas

When you add numerous Variable References to the Canvas, it may be difficult and time-consuming to manually
align the Variable References to create an orderly, neat appearance. You can use the alignment commands to
quickly align your Variable References and create a neat, professional simulation.
To align Variable References on the Canvas:
1. Select the set of Variable References that you want to align.
2. Right-click one of the Variable References in the selection, and then on the Align menu, select one of the
following commands:
▪ Align Left — Vertically align the selected Variable References so that the left sides of all the Variable
References start at the same horizontal position as the topmost Variable Reference in the selection.
▪ Align Top — Horizontally align the selected Variable References so that the top sides of all the Variable
References start at the same vertical position.
▪ Align Right — Vertically align the selected Variable References so that the right sides of all the Variable
References end at the same horizontal position as the topmost Variable Reference in the selection.
▪ Align Bottom — Horizontally align the selected Variable References so that the bottom sides of all the
Variable References end at the same vertical position.
▪ Same Width — Change the width of the selected Variable References to equal the width of the widest
Variable Reference.
▪ Same Height — Change the height of the selected Variable References to equal the height of the tallest
Variable Reference.
▪ Space Down — Evenly distribute the selected Variable References between the topmost and
bottommost Variable Reference.
▪ Space Across — Evenly distribute the selected Variable References between the leftmost and rightmost
Variable Reference.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 47
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

▪ Align Variable References — Vertically align the selected Variable References so that the left sides of all
the Variable References start at the same horizontal position as the leftmost Variable Reference in the
selection.
3. Repeat step 2 until you have aligned the Variable References as desired.
We recommend that you do not follow an Align Right or Align Left command with an Align Top or Align
Bottom command, or vice versa. Otherwise, the Variable References appear on top of each other.

Select Undo if you make any undesirable alignment changes.

Managing the Flowsheet Equation Appearance on the Canvas

You can change the appearance of the flowsheet equations on the Canvas.

Activity Directions

Hiding the name for a flowsheet equation Right-click the flowsheet equation. On the
Equations submenu, uncheck Show Name to hide
the name.
Hiding the formula for a flowsheet equation Right-click the flowsheet equation. On the
Equations submenu, uncheck Show Formula to
hide the formula.

Undoing and Redoing Simulation Changes

You can undo and redo certain actions taken on the Canvas, in the Simulation Manager, Keyword View, and
Properties Inspector, such as adding a Model to or deleting a Model from the Canvas. You can also undo or redo
changes made from the View/Edit menu that are saved with the simulation, such as changing the color of icons
and streams. When you hover over the Undo or Redo buttons, you will see a list of up to five a changes that you
can undo or redo in the form of tool-tips.
More specifically, you can undo/redo the following:
• Specifying variables
• Setting variable and parameter values
• Setting variable and parameter units of measure (UOM)
• Adding or deleting models
• Adding or deleting variables, parameters and Equations
• Adding or deleting connections
• Adding or deleting variable references
• Transitioning between Simulation Modes
• Moving the location of a model on the Canvas

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 48
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

Notes: When running a simulation in Dynamics Mode, you cannot undo or redo an action. You can only undo or
redo an action in Dynamics Mode when the simulation is paused or stopped. If you make a change to a Library
Model Type, the redo "stack" is cleared.

Button Purpose

Undo Undo a change to a simulation.

You can also press CTRL+Z to undo an action.

Redo Redo an action that has been undone from the

Process, Fluid Flow, or Dynamics tabs.
You can also press CTRL+Y to redo an action.
Example: Undoing a Specification Value Change
1. Import the U2 - Steam Turbine example simulation from the %userprofile%\My Simulations\Examples
folder. At this stage Undo and Redo buttons are in disabled state as no changes have been made yet.
2. Double-click Feed1 in the Simulation Manager and note that the W, P, and T variables are specified in the
Keyword View. Navigate to the Simulation Manager and observe that W, P, and T are specified.
3. Observe that W is specified as 30 kg/s. Now change the value of W to 40 and observe that F and Q are
calculated.
4. Click the Undo button in the application ribbon.
5. Observe that W is once again 30 kg/s and F and Q are recalculated.

Opening Thermo Data Manager

AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager is thermodynamic software that you can use to view and manage the
thermodynamic data that AVEVA Process Simulation uses for its thermodynamic calculations. You can open
AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager directly from the AVEVA Process Simulation UI. Changes that you make to
your thermodynamic data in AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager are immediately available in AVEVA Process
Simulation.
To open AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager from AVEVA Process Simulation:
• On the Advanced tab, in the Thermo Data group, click Launch the Thermo Data Manager (TDM).

The AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager UI appears.

Migration for AVEVA PRO/II Simulation Data into AVEVA Process

Simulation
You can use the Migration feature to import the following AVEVA™ PRO/II™ Simulation data into AVEVA Process
Simulation:

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 49
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

• Fluids
• Stream data
The Migration feature uses Microsoft Excel as an intermediary between AVEVA PRO/II Simulation and AVEVA
Process Simulation so that you can choose the data to migrate. You must have AVEVA PRO/II Simulation and
Microsoft Excel installed on the same computer as AVEVA Process Simulation to use the Migration feature.
The Migration feature translates the data from the component slate and method slate for an AVEVA PRO/II
Simulation fluid into a single Fluid in AVEVA Process Simulation; a Fluid includes both component data and
thermodynamic method data as part of a single fluid object in the simulation. The migrated AVEVA Process
Simulation Fluid uses the same thermodynamic method and data as the AVEVA PRO/II Simulation fluid whenever
possible. However, AVEVA Process Simulation currently does not support all the thermodynamic methods and
data that are available in AVEVA PRO/II Simulation. Warning messages appear in Excel if the Migration feature
cannot map the AVEVA PRO/II Simulation thermodynamic data to existing data entries in AVEVA Process
Simulation. You can modify the fluid configuration in Excel to address any issues with the thermodynamic data
before you migrate the fluid into AVEVA Process Simulation.
The Migration feature translates AVEVA PRO/II Simulation stream data into Source models on the Canvas in
AVEVA Process Simulation. You can view and modify the model mappings and Source properties before you
migrate the AVEVA PRO/II Simulation stream data into AVEVA Process Simulation.
You can independently migrate the AVEVA PRO/II Simulation fluids or stream data. However, we recommend that
you migrate the AVEVA PRO/II Simulation fluids before you migrate the stream data.

General Workflow
The following procedure presents a summarized, general workflow for migrating AVEVA PRO/II SImulation data
into AVEVA Process Simulation. You can use this workflow to familiarize yourself with the overall migration
process. For detailed, step-by-step procedures on how to migrate the AVEVA PRO/II Simulation data, see
Migrating AVEVA PRO/II Simulation Fluids and Migrating AVEVA PRO/II Simulation Stream Data instead.

1. In AVEVA Process Simulation, on the Advanced tab, in the Migrate group, select .
The Migration.xlsm file opens in Microsoft Excel.
2. In Excel, import the desired AVEVA PRO/II Simulation data.
3. On the Configuration worksheet, specify the name of the AVEVA Process Simulation simulation that you
want to migrate the data into.
4. On the Sources worksheet and the various fluid worksheets, review the imported AVEVA PRO/II Simulation
data and update the data as desired.
Currently, AVEVA Process Simulation does not support all of the thermodynamic methods and data that are
available in AVEVA PRO/II Simulation. We provide messages on the various fluid worksheets that suggest
possible equivalences and modifications for any unsupported thermodynamic selections from AVEVA PRO/II
Simulation. Please carefully review the messages on the worksheets for each fluid that you want to migrate.
5. If your simulation in AVEVA PRO/II Simulation uses a custom thermodynamic library that contains
component data or binary interaction data, you must add the custom library to AVEVA Thermodynamic Data
Manager (TMD) by doing the following:
a. Copy the corresponding .lb1 and .lb2 files to the %userprofile%\My Thermo Data folder.
b. Open your custom library in TDM and save it.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 50
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

If the custom library includes pure component (PURECOMP) databanks, TDM creates the .bnk and .cmp
files for the custom library. The software needs these files to properly transfer fluid data.
You have to complete this step only once for each custom library. After that, you can reuse
the .lb1, .lb2, .bnk, and .cmp files with any simulation from AVEVA PRO/II Simulation that uses the associated
custom library.
6. Migrate the fluid data into the specified AVEVA Process Simulation simulation.
7. Migrate the stream data into the specified AVEVA Process Simulation simulation.
8. In AVEVA Process Simulation, open the simulation, open the migrated Fluids and Source models, and then
verify that you see all the desired data.
If you are not satisfied with the migrated data and you want to make additional changes, you can repeat
steps 4 through 6 as many times as necessary until you are satisfied with the results.

Migrating AVEVA PRO/II Simulation Fluids

The Migration feature translates AVEVA PRO/II Simulation fluids into Fluids in AVEVA Process Simulation.
Typically, an AVEVA PRO/II Simulation fluid uses information from both a component slate and a method slate to
define the properties of the fluid. Instead of component slates and methods slates, AVEVA Process Simulation
uses Fluids. A Fluid includes both component data and thermodynamic method data to define the properties of
a fluid in the simulation.
To migrate AVEVA PRO/II Simulation fluids into AVEVA Process Simulation:

1. In AVEVA Process Simulation, on the Advanced tab, in the Migrate group, select .
The Migration.xlsm file opens in Microsoft Excel.
This file is a macro-enabled Excel workbook. Depending on your Excel settings, you may need to select
Enable Content when the file first opens.
2. In Excel, on the Configuration worksheet, in the Version list, select the AVEVA PRO/II Simulation version that
you want to use for the migration.
All installed versions of AVEVA PRO/II Simulation appear in this list.
3. On the AVEVA Migrate tab on the Excel ribbon, in the Import group, select PROII.
The Open dialog box appears.
4. Navigate to and select the .prz file that contains the fluids that you want to import, and then select Open.
The Configuration worksheet loads the data from the .prz file, including a list of streams and model data
from the .prz file along with suggested AVEVA Process Simulation names. Also, new worksheets appear for
each fluid in the .prz file that provide detailed information on the corresponding fluid's intended
configuration in AVEVA Process Simulation.
5. On the Configuration worksheet, in the outlined cell next to AVEVA Process Simulation Repository
Simulation Name, enter the name of the AVEVA Process Simulation simulation that you want to migrate the
fluids into.
6. On the worksheets for each fluid in the simulation, review the fluid configuration and make changes if
needed.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 51
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

The Log worksheet shows potential areas to review for each fluid. There are some thermodynamic selections
in AVEVA PRO/II Simulation that do not have corresponding selections in AVEVA Process Simulation. For
these cases, the Migration feature provides proposed equivalences on the fluid worksheet, which you can
review and change if needed.
7. If your simulation in AVEVA PRO/II Simulation uses a custom thermodynamic library that contains
component data or binary interaction data, you must add the custom library to AVEVA Thermodynamic Data
Manager (TDM) by doing the following:
a. Copy the corresponding .lb1 and .lb2 files to the %userprofile%\My Thermo Data folder.
b. Open your custom library in TDM and save it.
If the custom library includes pure component (PURECOMP) databanks, TDM creates the .bnk and .cmp
files for the custom library. The software needs these files to properly transfer fluid data.
You have to complete this step only once for each custom library. After that, you can reuse
the .lb1, .lb2, .bnk, and .cmp files with any simulation from AVEVA PRO/II Simulation that uses the associated
custom library.
8. On the AVEVA Migrate tab, in the Export group, select Fluids.
The Log worksheet appears with messages related to the migration status. If the migration successfully
completes, the software creates an AVEVA Process Simulation simulation (.simx) with the name specified in
the C5 cell on the Configuration worksheet. If this simulation already exists, the software adds the migrated
Fluids to the simulation.
You can find the new simulation file in the Repository Manager of AVEVA Process Simulation. If desired, you
can export the simulation to a different folder location after the migration is complete.
You can find the migrated Fluids in the simulation-specific library in this simulation.
9. In AVEVA Process Simulation, open the simulation and review the data in the migrated Fluids.
If you are not satisfied with the migrated data, you can repeat steps 6 and 7 as many times as needed until
you are satisfied with the data. Each time you perform the migration, the software creates new Fluids that
use the current data on the worksheets for the each fluid. The new Fluids use the same names as the original
Fluids but append the original name with a number.

Migrating AVEVA PRO/II Simulation Stream Data

The Migration feature translates AVEVA PRO/II Simulation stream data into Source models on the Canvas in
AVEVA Process Simulation.
To migrate AVEVA PRO/II Simulation stream data into AVEVA Process Simulation:
1. Migrate your AVEVA PRO/II Simulation fluids by using the procedure in Migrating AVEVA PRO/II Simulation
Fluids.
Important: If the AVEVA Process Simulation simulation doesn't contain the required fluids, the migrated
Source models do not include any composition data because the required variables are not added to the
Source models during the migration. To solve this, we recommend that you migrate the AVEVA PRO/II
Simulation fluids before you migrate the stream data.
2. In Microsoft Excel, on the Sources worksheet, review the Source data and make changes if needed.
3. On the AVEVA Migrate tab, in the Export group, select Models.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 52
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 2 – User Interface

The Model Selection dialog box appears.

4. In the Available list, select Stream, select Add, and then select OK.
The Log worksheet appears with messages related to the migration status. If the migration successfully
completes, the software adds the migrated Source models to the simulation with the name specified in the
C5 cell on the Configuration worksheet.
You can find the migrated Source models on the Canvas in this simulation.
5. In AVEVA Process Simulation, open the simulation and review the data in the migrated Source models.
If you are not satisfied with the migrated data, you can repeat steps 2 through 4 as many times as needed
until you are satisfied with the data. Each time you perform the migration, the software overwrites the data
for any existing Source models with the current data on the Sources worksheet. If you do not want to
overwrite the data for a Source model, you can rename the Source model on the Configuration and Sources
worksheets to create a new Source model in the simulation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 53
Chapter 3

Repository

About the Repository

The Repository is where simulations, Model Libraries, and UOM Slates are stored. The Repository is stored on
your local computer and is specific to your user account. AVEVA Process Simulation manages access to the
Repository's simulations through a Repository Manager. The information housed in the Repository is current and
always accessible to you.

Concepts
• The Repository stores simulations, Model Libraries, and UOM Slates.
• You can access the Repository Manager by selecting the File menu on the Application Ribbon.
• Changes you make to a simulation, Model Library, or UOM Slate are automatically persisted to the
Repository.
• You can export simulations from the Repository and share them with other users on different Repositories.
Actions
• Create, open, delete, and rename a simulation.
• Import and export a simulation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 54
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 3 – Repository

Managing Simulations
This section describes a variety of simulation actions within the Repository Manager. These commands are
available from the File menu on the application ribbon.

Command Label Purpose

New Opens the Create a new simulation tab. Click a

simulation template to create a new simulation
with a default name. You may rename a new
simulation by typing over any place the name
appears.
Or

Click beside an existing simulation tab on the

Canvas, and then click the simulation template
that you want to use for the new simulation.
When you first open AVEVA Process Simulation,
the Create a new simulation tab already appears
on the Canvas.
Open Opens the selected simulation.
When you open a simulation, all calculated
variables are reset to the unsolved state and the
simulation is marked as unsolved.
Or

Right-click and select Open Simulation.

Copy Creates a copy of the selected simulation. This is
saved in the Repository under a default name
which you may later rename.
Delete Deletes the selected simulation from the
Repository.
Rename Allows you to enter a new name for the selected
simulation.
Note: Since the Repository you are working in may be accessible by a number of users, it is important to ensure
that you do not delete a simulation which other users have open or need without first notifying them.
Example: Renaming a Simulation
1. Open the File menu on the application ribbon.
2. Select the simulation that you want to rename.
3. Select Rename, enter the new name of the simulation, and press Enter.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 55
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 3 – Repository

You can also rename a simulation by clicking the simulation tab at the top of the Canvas, modifying the Name
field in the Keyword View, or renaming the parent node in the Simulation Manager hierarchy.
When you rename a simulation, the new name will automatically be visible in the Repository Manager. As a
result, it is important to communicate the new name to other users contributing to the simulation.

Importing and Exporting Simulations

This section describes importing and exporting simulations. Both commands are available from the File menu on
the application ribbon.

Function Label Purpose

Import Imports a previously exported simulation by

choosing the appropriate file from a file browser.
Or

Right-click the button and select Import

Simulation.
When you import a simulation, all calculated
variables are reset to the unsolved state and the
simulation is marked as unsolved.
Export Exports the selected simulation to the location
specified from a file browser. Includes Snapshot
information included with the simulation.

Example: Exporting a simulation

1. Open the File menu on the application ribbon.
2. Select the simulation that you want to export.
3. Select Export.
4. Browse to the location where you want to export the simulation file.
5. Select Save to export the selected simulation.
The simulation is exported from the Repository.

Closing a Simulation
To close a simulation:
• Right-click the simulation tab and select Close Simulation from the context menu.
or
• Hover over the simulation tab and click the "X" that displays.
The simulation will close.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 56
Chapter 4

Simulation Modes

About Simulation Modes

AVEVA Process Simulation includes three built-in Simulation Modes for solving different types of simulation
problems that have been traditionally addressed by separate programs.
The three Simulation Modes included in AVEVA Process Simulation are:

• Process Mode: A steady state Simulation Mode used for creating heat and material balances

• Fluid Flow Mode: A steady state Simulation Mode used to rate a piping or equipment design

• Dynamics Mode: A mode which can evaluate the process dynamics given a piping or equipment design
and control system
When you build a simulation, you can quickly toggle between Process, Fluid Flow and Dynamics Mode by
selecting the mode you desire in the application ribbon on the Process, Fluid Flow and Dynamics tabs,
respectively. When you create a new simulation, Process Mode is selected.
When you switch Simulation modes, the variable specification in your Simulation will automatically change
based on the default settings for each mode for each Model Type, as defined by the Model Library. A snapshot
will also automatically be taken when you switch between modes.
The different Simulation Modes also include options relevant to the mode selected; for example, the ability to
automatically solve in Process Mode and go-to steady state in Dynamics Mode.

Process Mode
About Process Mode
Process mode performs steady state simulations to create and improve process design; it is designed to help you
perform mass and energy balance calculations. You can switch to Process mode on-the-fly by selecting Process
under the Mode section on the Application Ribbon. When you work in Process mode, the variable specification
of equipment in your simulation will change according to the definition for each Model Type.
Concepts
• Switch between simulation modes
• Auto solve can be set to manual if solution time is slow, allowing you to make multiple changes

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 57
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 4 – Simulation Modes

• Variable specifications switch along with the simulation mode, based on how they are configured for each
Model Type
• Automatically calculate the size of an equipment in Process mode and then specify that size in Fluid Flow
mode.

Fluid Flow Mode

About Fluid Flow Mode
Fluid Flow mode is a steady state simulator that models piping networks. You can switch to Fluid Flow mode on-
the-fly by selecting Fluid Flow under the Mode section on the Application Ribbon. When you switch to Fluid
Flow mode, the variable specification of equipment in your simulation will change according to the definition for
each Model Type.
Concepts
• Create fluid flow simulations
• Switch fluid flow simulations to dynamic simulations
• Auto solve can be set to manual if solution time is slow, allowing you to make multiple changes
• Variable specifications switch along with the simulation mode, based on how they are configured for each
Model Type
• Automatically calculate the size of an equipment in Fluid Flow mode and then specify that value in Process
mode

Dynamics Mode
About Dynamics Mode
Dynamics mode simulates system transients over time. You can switch to Dynamics Mode on-the-fly by selecting
Dynamics in the Mode group on the Application Ribbon. When you switch to Dynamics mode, the variable
specification of equipment in your simulation will change according to the definition for each Model Type.
Concepts
• Run simulations continuously, or advance by a single step
• Change the time step to suit your needs
• Reset the run time to zero to clear the history data
• Run simulations in real time or run them as fast as possible
• Solve dynamic simulations to their final steady state at once
• Variable specifications switch along with the simulation mode, based on how they are configured for each
Model Type
• Run or pause a dynamic simulation
• Solve a dynamic simulation to its final steady state

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 58
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 4 – Simulation Modes

Switching Between Modes

You can quickly toggle between simulation modes.
To switch between Simulation Modes:
1. Browse to the Mode group on the Application Ribbon.

2. Click the mode that you want to switch to. When you switch to a new simulation mode, a snapshot will
automatically be taken if the simulation is solved.
The Mode tab in the Application Ribbon will change to the mode you select.

Enabling or Disabling Automatic Solving (Auto Solve)

By default, when you create a new Process or Fluid Flow simulation, Auto Solve is enabled. Enabling Auto Solve
allows AVEVA Process Simulation to "solve" configuration changes when sufficient information is available.
When you disable Auto Solve (that is, when you are manually solving your simulation), Fluid changes do not
propagate to your simulation while in Process mode or Fluid Flow mode. See Applying Model Library Changes
While Manually Solving Your Simulation for more information.
To enable or disable Auto Solve:
• On the Process tab or the Fluid Flow tab, in the Solve group, click the slider button.

When Auto appears, Auto Solve is enabled

When Manual appears, Auto Solve is disabled, and you must click the Solve button to manually solve
your simulation.

Applying Model Library Changes While Manually Solving Your

Simulation
When you are manually solving a simulation (that is, you have disabled the Auto Solve feature), changes to the
following Model Library objects do not propagate to your simulation while in Process mode or Fluid Flow mode:
• Fluids
• Curves

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 59
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 4 – Simulation Modes

• Model Types
This allows you to quickly make multiple changes to a Fluid, Curve, or Model Type without solving the simulation
after each change. This is especially useful for large simulations, which may take a significant amount of time to
solve for each change.
If you change a Fluid, Curve, or Model Type while the Auto Solve feature is disabled, the solution status for the
simulation changes to unsolved. Also, warning badges appear on the Canvas and in the Simulation Manager on
all top-level model instances and connectors that use a changed Fluid or Curve or are based on a changed Model
Type. The solution status and the warning badges indicate that the simulation does not use the latest Fluid,
Curve, or Model Type data, which may affect the simulation results.
In Dynamics mode, Model Library changes always propagate to the simulation.
To apply Fluid, Curve, or Model Type changes to a manually solved simulation:
• Do one of the following (for large simulations, this may take a significant amount of time):

▪ On the Process or Fluid Flow tab, in the Solve group, click Solve .
▪ Close and reopen the simulation.
▪ Re-enable the Auto Solve feature.

Disabling the Specifications Analysis While Manually Solving Your

Simulation
When you are manually solving a simulation (that is, you have disabled the Auto Solve feature), you can also turn
off the specifications analysis. The specifications analysis determines the number of specification changes that
you need to make to keep your simulation properly specified.
Note: A simulation is properly specified when the total number of specified variables and equations equals the
number of calculated variables.
Disabling the specifications analysis allows for faster performance. This feature is especially useful when you are
working with large simulations and you want to make small changes, such as adding or renaming a model
instance.
You should disable the specifications analysis with caution. If you make multiple changes that can lead to a
specification change, you may encounter specification errors the next time you try to solve your simulation.
Specification errors are often difficult to diagnose and fix. If you decide to disable the specifications analysis, we
recommend that you periodically re-enable the specifications analysis or solve your simulation to ensure that
your simulation remains properly specified.
You can disable the specification analysis only in Process mode and Fluid Flow mode, not in Dynamics mode.
To disable the specifications analysis:
1. On the Process or Fluid Flow tab, in the Solve group, ensure that the slider button shows Manual.

2. Clear the Analyze in Manual check box.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 60
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 4 – Simulation Modes

Changing the Speed of a Dynamics Run

When your switch your simulation to Dynamics mode, the simulation is in a paused state. You can use the
following options to run your simulation in Dynamics mode:
• Run the simulation continuously
• Advance the solution by a single time step
• Solve the simulation to steady state
Note: Typically, you advance the solution by a single time step as an analysis aid to debug simulations.
When you run the simulation continuously, you can run the simulation in real time or as fast as possible. When
you run the simulation in real time, the simulation proceeds as wall-clock time and reflects the true response
time of the plant or process. When you run the simulation as fast as possible, the simulation proceeds quickly
and allows you to gather more analysis data in a shorter amount of time.

Activity Directions

Specifying a time step On the Dynamics tab, in the Speed group, in the Step
list, type the value and select the unit of measure that
you want to use for the time step.
Specifying the run-time option On the Dynamics tab, in the Speed group, click the
slider button shown in the following figure.

When Fast appears, the Dynamics simulation runs as

fast as possible. When Real appears, the Dynamics
simulation runs in real time.

Resetting the Run Time to Zero

In Dynamics mode, you can reset the run time to zero. This deletes all the history data for the Trends and sets
the t variable to zero for the simulation.
To reset the run time to zero:

• On the Dynamics tab, in the Run/Step group, click Reset .

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 61
Chapter 5

Simulation Manager

About the Simulation Manager

The Simulation Manager is a hierarchical view of your simulation and the models contained within it. You can
expand items in the tree, specify variables and enter values, view the state of equations, modify variable and
parameter values, and add Trends. When you make a change in the Simulation Manager, the change is
automatically reflected in the other application views and on the simulation Canvas.

Concepts
• Roles apply predefined filters to the Simulation Manager for Simulation Builders and Model Writers
• You can filter what you see to reduce clutter or show only a specific Model Type
• You can select items in the Simulation Manager's tree and change variable and parameter values for the
selected item in the Keyword View
• Changes you make in the Simulation Manager are automatically reflected in the other application views and
on the Canvas
Actions
• View or add models, parameters, variables, equations, submodels, connectors and ports of a Flowsheet
• Change variable and parameter values
• View the variable specification status
• View the status of an equation in Model Writing mode
• Add a Trend

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 62
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 5 – Simulation Manager

Note: Access to the above actions depends on the role selected.

Filtering Simulation Manager Results

You can filter the Simulation Manager to include or exclude the following items:
• Models (fluids, models and submodels)
• Connections
• Parameters (model and Flowsheet)
• Variables (model, Flowsheet and connection)
• Equations (model, Flowsheet and connection)
• Trends
You can also load previously saved filters, or create new filters.

Applying a Simulation Manager Quick Filter

You can filter out information by role or create a quick filter to filter out specific components.
To apply a quick filter:
1. Display the Simulation Manager.

2. Click the On/Off Filter button. The Quick Filter window appears, listing types of items displayed in the
Simulation Manager.

3. From here, you may do one or more of the following.

a. Select a saved filter from the drop-down menu at the top of the Quick Filter window. The default filter is
defined by the role.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 63
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 5 – Simulation Manager

b. Check a category's checkbox to include all items within that category, or uncheck to hide them.
c. To include or exclude specific items, expand a category by clicking the chevron ( > ) first. You may then
select individual items within that category for inclusion or exclusion.
d. You may also check the box marked Show/Hide All to display all item types regardless of other
selections/checkboxes, or uncheck it to rely on the individual selections below it.
4. If you wish to use this filter again, enter a name in the Save Quick Filter as: text box, and click Save.
Your quick filter is now ready for selection from the drop-down list of saved filters.
When you create a filter, it is saved in the <drive>:\ProgramData\SimSci\Custom directory, and will be retained
if you uninstall and reinstall AVEVA Process Simulation.

Showing and Hiding Changed Variable Specifications

You can choose to show or hide changed variable specifications in the Properties Inspector.
To show or hide changed variable specifications:
1. Browse to the Simulation Manager.
2. Right-click the Main flowsheet and select Changed Specifications.

If you have overridden a variable specification, it appears in the list of variables.

3. To show all variables, click the Show/Hide overridden specifications button .

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 64
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 5 – Simulation Manager

Expanding Multi-Component Array Equations and Variables

When you add a Fluid Type to a simulation, array variables and equations are dynamically created on the AVEVA
Process Simulation server and the Simulation Manager refreshes with the new equations.
Expanding an array equation
You can expand an equation array in the Simulation Manager.
1. Browse to the Simulation Manager.
2. Expand an array equation by clicking the chevron (>) beside it.

The required data or solved badge of the array equation is displayed beside the equation in the Simulation
Manager.
Looking at the example above, the equation requires data before it can be solved. Equations created by a
model are read-only. If you create a custom equation, you can edit it. Hover over the badge to display a
tooltip that describes the problem.
Expanding a variable array and modifying its elements in the Keyword View
You can expand a variable array in the Simulation Manager and view and modify its elements in the Keyword
View.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 65
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 5 – Simulation Manager

1. Expand the Simulation Manager and click the model that contains the array variables.
2. Expand the variable array by clicking the chevron (>) beside it. In the example below, the variable arrays are z
and M.

The Keyword View will display the variable array elements. You can modify the value and units of the array in
the Keyword View and rename the array in the Model Editor.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 66
Chapter 6

Keyword View

About the Keyword View

The Keyword View allows you quickly to view and edit objects selected in the Simulation Manager. When you
select a simulation object in the Simulation Manager, the Keyword View displays a detailed view of your
selection; you can edit specific variables and parameter values.

Concepts
• Displays a detailed view of the simulation object you select in the Simulation Manager
• You can enter parameter and specified variable values
• You can change variable specification status
• You can view favorite variables if they have been defined as favorites in the Model Editor
• Changes you make in the Keyword View are automatically reflected in the other application views
Actions
• Sort and group variables and parameters
• Filter variables and parameters

Understanding How the Simulation Manager and Keyword View

Work Together
This topic explains how the Simulation Manager and Keyword View work together.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 67
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 6 – Keyword View

Selecting Objects in the Simulation Manager

The Simulation Manager provides a hierarchical organization of open simulations and the objects they contain.
Before selecting an item within a simulation, expand it by clicking the chevron (>) next to the simulation's name.
The variables and parameters of the selected model appear in the Keyword View.
Example: Two simulations (Sim 1 and CWSim) are open within AVEVA Process Simulation. The CWSim simulation
is expanded, and the Heat Exchanger object HX1 is selected.

With the Heat Exchanger object HX1 selected as per the example above, the Keyword View displays the following
information:

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 68
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 6 – Keyword View

You may then modify the variables and parameters of the selected model.
Note: When a variable's checkbox is selected, the value is specified by the user. When cleared, it is calculated by
AVEVA Process Simulation.

Expanding and Modifying Variable Arrays

You can expand a modify a variable array in the Keyword View.
1. Expand the Simulation Manager and click the model that contains the array variables.
2. Locate and review the variables in the Keyword View.
3. Select the variable array in the Keyword View and expand it by clicking the chevron (>) beside it.
The Keyword View will display the variable array elements. You can modify the value and units of the array in the
Keyword View and rename the array in the Model Editor.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 69
Chapter 7

Subflowsheets

About Subflowsheets
A subflowsheet is a collection of connected, logically related components within your simulation. Subflowsheets
divide a large simulation into smaller, more manageable pieces.
Currently, subflowsheets represent only a visual separation. In the Simulation Manager, the model instances,
Tables, Profiles, and Trends in a subflowsheet appear at the same level as all the other model instances and
other flowsheet objects. The solver solves all model instances in the simulation at once regardless of their
flowsheet locations. That is, you cannot solve subflowsheets individually.

Concepts
• Subflowsheets visually separate your simulation into smaller, more manageable pieces
• Model references allow you to visually represent model instances from one flowsheet on another flowsheet
within the same simulation
• All model instances solve at once regardless of their flowsheet locations

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 70
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 7 – Subflowsheets

• You can add any type of flowsheet object to a subflowsheet, including nested subflowsheets
Actions
• Create a subflowsheet
• Rename a subflowsheet
• Open a subflowsheet
• Close a subflowsheet
• Add model references to a subflowsheet
• Move flowsheet objects between subflowsheets
• Delete a subflowsheet

Managing Subflowsheets
The following table lists the activities that you can perform on subflowsheets.

Activity Directions

Creating a subflowsheet From the Tools library, drag a Flowsheet object onto the Canvas.

Opening a subflowsheet Double-click the subflowsheet on the Canvas.

Alternatively, right-click the subflowsheet on the Canvas, and then
click View.
If only the Main flowsheet was open, the tab navigation bar appears
on the left of the Canvas and the view changes to the subflowsheet.
Otherwise, a tab for the subflowsheet appears on the tab navigation
bar and then view changes to the subflowsheet.
Renaming a subflowsheet On the flowsheet that contains the subflowsheet, click the label for
the subflowsheet, type the new name for the subflowsheet, and
then press Enter.
Alternatively, if the subflowsheet is open, on the tab navigation bar,
right-click the tab for the subflowsheet, and then click Rename
Flowsheet. Type the new name for the subflowsheet, and then
press Enter.
You cannot rename the Main flowsheet.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 71
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 7 – Subflowsheets

Activity Directions

Moving flowsheet objects Select the group of flowsheet objects that you want to move, and
between subflowsheets then right-click the selection. On the Move to menu, click the
desired flowsheet.
The moved flowsheet objects appear at the same relative position
on the current flowsheet as they did on the previous flowsheet. If
you move a model instance, all its attached connectors move with
the model instance. If a connector moves to a different flowsheet
without also moving one of its connected model instances, the
software automatically creates a model reference for that model
instance on the current flowsheet.

Closing a subflowsheet On the tab navigation bar, hover over the tab for the subflowsheet,
and then click Close the flowsheet . The tab for the subflowsheet
disappears from the tab navigation bar.
Alternatively, right-click the tab for the subflowsheet, and then click
Close Flowsheet.
If there are no other subflowsheets open after you close the
subflowsheet, the tab navigation bar disappears and the view
changes to the Main flowsheet.
Deleting a subflowsheet On the flowsheet that contains the subflowsheet, select the
subflowsheet on the Canvas, and then press Delete.
Alternatively, right-click the subflowsheet on the Canvas, and then
click Delete. Or, if the subflowsheet is open, in the tab navigation
bar, right-click the tab for the subflowsheet, and then click Delete
Flowsheet.
If you want to use the right-click menu or Delete key to delete the
subflowsheet, you must select only the subflowsheet. The software
will not delete the subflowsheet when it is part of a larger selection
of flowsheet objects.

Managing Model References

A model reference is a visual copy of a model instance on a subflowsheet. The model instance appears on both
its original flowsheet and any subflowsheet that you add the model reference to. You can create multiple model
references per flowsheet for a given model instance.
Each model reference has its own graphic properties, so you can change the appearance of the model reference
on one flowsheet without changing the appearance on any other flowsheet. For example, you can flip the icon
for the model reference on one flowsheet and any other model references for that model instance do not
change.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 72
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 7 – Subflowsheets

Model references do not have independent variables or parameters. Any change that you make to the variables,
parameters, or specifications for a model reference will propagate to the corresponding model instance and all
of its other model references.
You currently cannot create model references for connectors. That is, connectors cannot appear on more than
one flowsheet.

Activity Directions

Creating a model reference Select a single model instance, and then press
Ctrl+C to copy it. Navigate to another flowsheet,
right-click the Canvas, and then click Paste
Reference.
Note: Pressing Ctrl+V will create a copy of the
model instance, not a model reference.
Alternatively, you can right-click the model
instance, and then click Copy to copy it.

Switching between model references in the Right-click the model reference. On the Navigate
simulation submenu, select the flowsheet that contains the
model reference that you want to view. The
corresponding flowsheet opens with the model
reference centered in the view.
Deleting a model reference Select the model reference, and then press Delete.
Alternatively, right-click the model reference, and
then click Delete.
Deleting a model reference does not delete the
model instance.
Deleting a model instance and all of its model In the Simulation Manager, right-click the model
references instance, and then click Delete.

Example of Modifying Simulations to Use Subflowsheets

In this example, we modify the GG3 - Chiller Plant example simulation so that the refrigeration portion of the
simulation appears in its own subflowsheet. We perform this conversion in Process mode only because the
example simulation contains a snapshot from Process mode (Pro 1) that we can revert back to.
Note: You can find the GG3 - Chiller Plant example simulation in the %userprofile%\My
Simulations\Examples\Undocumented Examples folder.
To modify GG3 - Chiller Plant example to use a subflowsheet:
1. Import the GG3 - Chiller Plant simulation.
2. (Optional) Rename the simulation.
In this example, we change the simulation name to Chiller Plant with SubFS.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 73
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 7 – Subflowsheets

3. In the Tools library, drag a Flowsheet onto the Canvas to create a subflowsheet.
4. (Optional) Rename the subflowsheet.
In this example, we change the subflowsheet name to Refrig.

5. Add Flag model instances on the streams that will cross the subflowsheet boundaries.
This helps you avoid having unwanted model references in your subflowsheet when you move model
instances to that subflowsheet, which we plan to do in step 8.
In this example, we do not want model references for the Separator, MX1, or XV2 model instances added to
the subflowsheet, so we want to add Flag model instances to the S8, S14, and S17 connectors.

6. Select the following flowsheet objects:

• S8.F variable reference
• Gas_to_Gas
• Chiller
• Liq_Refrigerant

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 74
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 7 – Subflowsheets

• Liq_Refrigerant.W variable reference

• Vap_Refrigerant
• Cold_Separator

7. Right-click the selection, and then on the Move to menu, click the name of the subflowsheet.
8. Double-click the subflowsheet.
A new tab navigation bar appears on the left of the Canvas and the view changes to the subflowsheet. The
moved flowsheet objects appear at the same relative position on the subflowsheet as they did on the Main
flowsheet. The software automatically creates model references for the Flag model instances.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 75
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 7 – Subflowsheets

9. (Optional) Change the FromLabel and ToLabel parameters for the Flags to more easily see the stream
connections across the subflowsheet boundary.
10. (Optional) On the Main flowsheet, make the following cosmetic changes:
Tip: You can quickly navigate between the Main flowsheet and the subflowsheet by right-clicking on Flag1,
Flag2, or Flag3 and then clicking on the flowsheet of interest on the Navigation submenu.
• Move the subflowsheet icon to a more noticeable or convenient location.
• Move the model instances around on the Canvas to decrease the blank space.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 76
Chapter 8

Properties Inspector

About the Properties Inspector

The Properties Inspector allows you quickly to view and edit models from the Canvas. You can also use the
Properties Inspector to sort or group variables and filter variables and parameters. You can access the Property
Inspector by right-clicking a model on the Canvas, or by right-clicking a Flowsheet or model on the Simulation
Manager and selecting Full Properties.

Concepts
• You can view models and change their parameter values, and variable specifications and values
• You can open the Properties Inspector multiple times and view the properties of more than one model at a
time
• Changes you make in the Properties Inspector are automatically reflected in the other application views (like
the Simulation Manager and Keyword View) and on the Canvas
Actions
• Open more than one Properties Inspector window at a time
• Sort variables and parameters by clicking their column heading
• Group variables and parameters by moving column headings to the Group box

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 77
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 8 – Properties Inspector

Opening the Properties Inspector

You can open the Properties Inspector to view and change model instance parameters and variables. You can
open Properties Inspector windows for different models at the same time.
To open the Properties Inspector:
• Right-click a model on the Canvas or Simulation Manager and select Full Properties. If you want to open an
additional Properties Inspector window, repeat this step on another model.

To edit model properties:

• If you want to change general model info, a parameter, or a variable, expand the General, Parameters, or
Variables sections, respectively.
Changes are automatically reflected on the Canvas, Simulation Manager, and Keyword View.

Filtering Variables and Parameters

You can filter specific parameters and variables in the Properties Inspector or Keyword View to include or exclude
information when you are building a simulation. When you set a filter, the filter is saved and automatically
loaded when you launch AVEVA Process Simulation.
The following filter operators are supported by AVEVA Process Simulation: Equals, Not Equals, Less than, Less
than or equal to, Greater than, Greater than or equal to, Contains, Does not contain, Like (wildcards), Not like
(wildcards), Match (regular expression), Does not match (regular expression), Starts with, Does not start with,
Ends with and Does not end with.
To set a filter:
1. Display the Properties Inspector or Keyword View, depending on where you want to filter a variable or
parameter. If you want to filter a variable or parameter in the Properties Inspector, expand the Parameters
or Variables section.

2. Click the On/Off Filter icon . A set of filters will display for each of the columns in the section or view that
contains the data set you are working with.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 78
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 8 – Properties Inspector

3. Click the filter icon directly underneath the column you want to filter and select a filter from the list that
displays. When you set a filter, the appropriate icon assigned to the filter will appear underneath the
column; for example, if you select Equals, will display. You can set individual filters on multiple columns.

4. Click the filter chevron and select a filter criterion option from the list that displays. If you select Custom,
you can create custom, more granular filters to help filter in or out the data you want to display, such as the
ability to add conditions, groups, etc. The options in the filter drop-down differ depending on the type of
filter you selected in step 3.

5. Click OK to set a custom filter.

The data in the columns will be filtered based on the defined criteria.

Sorting or Grouping Variables

You can sort the Properties Inspector's output by clicking a column heading; for example, you can sort by name,
value, or unit of measure.
The Properties Inspector also contains the following special columns, listed left-to-right as they appear in the UI,
on which you can click to sort variables:
• - Sort by required variables
• - Sort by invariant variables
• - Sort by variables that are outside their min and max bounds
• - Sort by variables at their default value
• - Sort by variables whose value has been set by the user
• - Sort by unsolved variables
• S - Sort or group by specified or calculated variables
In addition, you may group the output by the entries for a desired field (column header).

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 79
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 8 – Properties Inspector

To sort by Variable:
1. Open the Properties Inspector.
2. Expand the Variables section.

3. To sort by specified or calculated variables, click on the appropriate column header; for example, S (sort or
group by specified or calculated variables). When you hover over each column header, a tooltip will display
with information on what each column means.
To group or ungroup by variable:
1. Click the gray bar that appears immediately below a section heading, for example, Variables. This will open
the Group Box - a section to which column headings are dragged to group data. The Group Box reads "group
by area" and "Drag a field here to group by that field" when no grouping is in place. When a grouping is in
place, the Group Box contains the label of a field (column heading) by which the list is currently grouped. In
the following example, the Variables section is already grouped by Model.

2. Drag the desired column heading into the Group Box. In the following example, grouping by Units is added to
the existing grouping by Model.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 80
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 8 – Properties Inspector

3. The display changes to represent a primary grouping by model, and a secondary grouping by Units. You can
sort by either field by clicking its entry in the Group Box.

4. To un-group, drag the undesired item anywhere outside of the Group Box.

Using Fluid Types

Fluid Types identify the thermodynamic behavior used by models in a simulation. AVEVA Process Simulation
provides predefined Thermo Types to associate with the Fluid Type that you create:
• CarbonDioxide: Models steam by using Span and Wagner for supercritical CO2 systems
• Compositional: Models a multi-component system by using the SRK or PR thermodynamic methods
• IdealGas: Models gases by using ideal gas equations
• IncompressibleLiquid: Models simple liquids in the form of a simple thermodynamics fluid
• IsomericHydrogen: Models mixtures of ortho- and para-hydrogen

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 81
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 8 – Properties Inspector

• Steam: Models steam by using the IF97 steam tables

Method 1 – To assign fluids to models:
1. Open the Property Inspector for the desired model.
2. Expand the Parameters section and locate the FluidType parameter.
3. Click the Value drop-down to select the desired Fluid Type, as shown in the following figure. You can also
select the Fluid Type from the Simulation Manager or Keyword View.

The Fluid State is shown in the Properties Inspector. Additionally, the Fluid Type selected here will
automatically propagate to models connected downstream.
In addition to manually assigning a Fluid Type to a model, you can automatically assign a Fluid Type to the
source model.
Method 2 – To automatically assign a Fluid Type to the source model:
1. Browse to the Fluids Model Library that contains the Fluid Type that you want.
2. Drag the Fluid Type on top of the source model on the Canvas.

The Fluid Type will be assigned to the model and visible when you launch the Properties Inspector.

Expanding and Modifying Variable Arrays

You can expand a variable array in the Properties Inspector and view and modify its elements.
1. Open the Properties Inspector.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 82
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 8 – Properties Inspector

2. Expand the Variables section.

3. Expand the variable array by clicking the chevron (>) beside it. In the example below, the variable array is M.

The Properties Inspector will display the variable array elements. You can modify the value and units of the
array in the Keyword View and rename the array in the Model Editor.

Defining Favorite Variables and Parameters

While in the Model Writing role, you can identify certain parameters and variables to be available as "favorites"
to Simulation Builders. When you switch to the Simulation Building role, you see only the defined favorites when
you edit or view models in the Simulation Manager, Properties Inspector, Mini Inspector, Keyword View or
Canvas. In the Properties Inspector, you can also turn favorites off to see all variables and parameters. You can
then customize the list of favorites for that model.
To define a favorite:
1. Ensure that the Model Writing role is selected. See Roles.
2. Open the Model Editor for the desired Model Type.
3. Expand the Variables section.

4. Click the Favorite icon to flag the variable for Simulation Builders.

Defining Invariant Variables

While in the Model Writing role, you can identify variables as invariant variables. Invariant variables do not
change values or badging when you revert the simulation to a snapshot that you captured. This applies to both
Model Writers and Simulation Builders.
Typically, variables that do not change with operating conditions are good candidates for invariant variables. For
example, the length of a pipe does not change with operating conditions. You may want to define the length of a

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 83
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 8 – Properties Inspector

pipe as an invariant variable. Conversely, the flow through a pipe and the pressure in the pipe depend on
operating conditions and should not be invariant variables.
The Solver changes the values of calculated variables even if you identify them as invariant variables. If a Model
Type has connections that use an invariant variable, AVEVA Process Simulation treats all variables in the
connection as invariant variables.
To define a variable as an invariant variable:
1. Ensure that the Model Writing role is selected. See Roles.
2. Load the Model Editor for the desired Model Type.
3. Expand the Variables section.

4. Click the Invariant icon to flag the variable as an invariant variable.

Returning to Previously Specified Invariant Values

In some cases, you may want to return the invariant values in a simulation to those in a snapshot. For example,
you temporarily changed some invariant Pipe lengths to see the impact on the simulation and you now want to
change the Pipe lengths back to their previous values.
The Snapshot Manager provides a Special option to control whether AVEVA Process Simulation overrides the
values for invariant parameters and variables with the values in the snapshot.
To override the invariant values with the snapshot values:
1. Open the Snapshot Manager.
2. Select the snapshot to which you want to revert the simulation.
3. Click Special.
4. Select the Invariant Values check box.
5. Click Load.

Changing the Tracking for Global Parameters and Variables

A global parameter or variable is a parameter or variable that has the same value for all model instances on the
Canvas. For example, if you define the ambient temperature, Tamb, as a global parameter, you can update its
value for one model instance and AVEVA Process Simulation applies that change to all model instances on the
Canvas that contain the Tamb parameter.
Only Model Editors can define a parameter or variable as a global parameter or variable. However, Simulation
Builders can turn on or turn off the tracking for a global parameter or variable for any model instance on the
Canvas. For example, if you define the pipe size as a global variable, you can choose whether a Pipe on the
Canvas tracks and uses the value of this global pipe size or maintains its own value for the pipe size separate
from the global pipe size.

On the Mini Inspector and the Properties Inspector, the Global badge appears next to global parameters and
variables. The color of this badge indicates the tracking status of the global parameter or variable for the

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 84
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 8 – Properties Inspector

associated model instance. If the badge is colored, the model instance tracks and uses the global value. If the
badge is blank, the model instance maintains its own value separate from the global value.
You can turn on or turn off the tracking for a global parameter or variable only by using the Properties Inspector.
To change the tracking for a global parameter:
1. Open the Properties Inspector for the model instance that contains the global parameter.
2. Expand the Parameters section.

3. Press and hold Shift and then click the Global badge for the global parameter.
The Global badge changes to indicate the new tracking status for the global parameter.
To change the tracking for a global variable:
1. Open the Properties Inspector for the model instance that contains the global variable.
2. Expand the Variables section.

3. Press and hold Shift and then click the Global badge for the global variable.
The Global badge changes to indicate the new tracking status for the global variable.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 85
Chapter 9

Messages

About the Messages Pane

The Messages pane allows you to quickly view all the messages that appear on the Canvas. It displays both error
and warning messages. You can use the Messages pane to quickly address the warnings and errors in your
simulation.

Concepts
• Messages are grouped by the first line of their message text
• Both error and warning messages appear in the Messages pane
Actions
• On the Edit/View tab, in the Show group, select the Messages check box to display the Messages pane
• Float or dock the Messages pane
• Double-click a message to center the corresponding model instance on the Canvas
• On the Edit/View tab, in the Show group, clear the Messages check box to hide the Messages pane

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 86
Chapter 10

Log

About the Log Pane

The Log pane allows you to quickly view the Solver output log (the Server.log file) for a solver run, the Optimizer
output log (the Summary.txt file) for an optimization set run, or the messages related to the thermodynamic
diagrams (such as a Phase Envelope).
You can use the Solver output log messages to help troubleshoot simulations that have poor convergence or
robustness issues.
You can use the Optimizer output log messages to similarly troubleshoot optimization sets that have poor
convergence or robustness issues.
You can use the thermodynamic diagram messages to troubleshoot the configuration of your thermodynamic
diagrams.
Concepts
• The Log pane shows only the Solver output log, the Optimizer output log, or the thermodynamic diagram
messages at one time.
• The Log pane shows the following relevant information from the Solver output log:
• Block Decomposition Report – When you trigger an analyze run, the block decomposition of the latest
analyze run appears in the Log pane
• Homotopy Iteration Report – When you update a specified variable's value, the homotopy iteration path
appears in the Log pane.
• Solver Iteration Report for Failed Blocks – If your simulation struggles or fails to solve, you can use this
report to identify the struggling equations and block. This report appears in the Log pane for any blocks
that failed to solve.
• The Log pane shows the following relevant information from the Optimizer output log:
• Optimization Solver – The type of nonlinear optimizer that solved the optimization.
• Optimizer Options – The configuration for the optimizer that solved the optimization.
• Optimization Problem Summary – The description of the system that the optimizer is trying to optimize.
• OPERA Iteration Summary – The results from each solver iteration that the optimizer performed during
the optimization.
• Currently, the Log pane shows thermodynamic diagram messages for Phase Envelopes only.
• The Optimizer output log is available only after you run an optimization set.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 87
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 10 – Log

• You can find the Server.log and Summary.txt files in the %LocalAppData%\SimSci\SimCentral\Logs folder.
Actions
• On the Edit/View tab, in the Show group, select the Log check box to display the Log pane.
• Float or dock the Log pane.
• On the Edit/View tab, in the Show group, clear the Log check box to hide the Log pane.
• Use the Show output logs from list to switch between the Solver output log, the Optimizer output log, and
the Thermo Diagrams messages.

Block Decomposition Report

This report shows the size distribution of the solvable block. Each row in the Solvable Model table shows the size
and number of solved blocks. For example, the following figure shows a simulation that has 38 solved blocks that
contain 9 equations each.

Homotopy Iteration Report

If you update a variable value while the simulation is in Auto solve mode, the solver uses a homotopy iteration
path to selectively take steps towards the solution. The Log pane shows the homotopy iteration report. Each row
in the report represents a homotopy iteration. For example, in the following figure, iteration #2 successfully
moved DIST.State.z[Methanol] from 0.95 to 0.956. This report provides actionable information on the solver
homotopy iteration path and health.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 88
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 10 – Log

Solver Iteration Report for a Failed Block

This report provides a detailed summary of the inner solver iteration path for failed blocks. Each row
corresponds to a single inner solver iteration. Repeated rows represent a save or restore operation that the
solver selectively performs. The following figure shows an example of this type of report.

In this figure, block number 882, which contains 449 equations, has failed to converge within the required
tolerance. Under the Most changed variable column, the report shows the variables at their upper and lower
bounds during the solver iteration. These variables restrict the solver step and cause a cutback in the solver
iteration bound percentage. In this example, the cutback in the bound percentage for iteration 4 is 0.0567%. You
can use this information to identify variables at their bounds, which may cause convergence difficulty in the
solver.
Additionally, the Largest residual column in the report corresponds to the equation with the largest residual
error during a solver iteration. You can use this information to identify the equation that struggles the most
during the solver iterations.
The Notes column indicates additional information during the solver iteration. The following symbols may
appear in this column:
• B: Some variables were at their bounds.
• U: The solver took an uphill iteration (that is, the residual increased).
• S: The solver detected a singular Jacobian matrix.
• J: The solver did not calculate the Jacobian matrix during this iteration and instead reused the Jacobian
matrix from the previous iteration.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 89
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 10 – Log

Report Sections of the Optimizer Output Log

Optimization Solver
This section of the output log displays the nonlinear optimizer that AVEVA Process Simulation used to solve the
optimization set. The software supports two types of nonlinear optimizer:
• OPERA + Feasible Path (Default) - The OPERA optimization solver requests AVEVA Process Simulation to
search for a feasible solution during every optimization iteration. This provides a more robust solve, but can
result in slower runtime.
• OPERA – OPERA simultaneously closes constraints and optimizes. This is computationally cheaper, but less
robust.

You can use the OptimizationMethod option in the Optimization Settings model from the Settings Library to
select the nonlinear optimizer.
Note: The Settings Library is an example Model Library distributed with AVEVA Process Simulation. You can
import it from the %userprofile%\My Libraries\Examples folder.
Optimizer Options
This section displays the following information related to the nonlinear optimizer:
• Trace Level – The verbosity of the optimization trace report. AVEVA Process Simulation adds the optimization
trace report information to the %LocalAppData%\SimSci\SimCentral\Logs folder along with the other
AVEVA Process Simulation log files.
• Max Optimization Iterations – The maximum optimization iterations allowed before stopping the solver.
• Initial Hessian Diagonal Matrix – The initial value in the diagonal elements of the Hessian matrix.
• Objective Tolerance – The convergence tolerance for the objective function.
• Constraint Tolerance – The convergence tolerance for the constraint closure.

You can find and update these options by using the Optimization Settings model from the Settings Library.
OPERA Problem Summary
This section outlines the optimization problem that the Optimizer is trying to solve.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 90
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 10 – Log

OPERA Iteration Summary

This section displays high-level information for each OPERA iteration. It includes:
• Iteration Number – The current optimization iteration.
• Objective Value – The value of the objective function at the current iteration.
• Constraint Closure – The residual of the equality constraints at the current iteration.
• Step Fraction – The fraction of the overall step taken at the current iteration compared to the previous
iteration.
• Active Bounds – The number of process variables that are currently at their bounds.
• Iteration Time – The time taken to complete the current iteration.
The last column of this section is not labeled. It contains high-level information on the search direction, where o
represents the original OPERA search direction and c represents a correction in the search direction by AVEVA
Process Simulation. Additionally, a ->s indicates a reevaluation of the Hessian matrix due to difficulty in closing
the iteration.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 91
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 10 – Log

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 92
Chapter 11

Fluid Editor

About the Fluid Editor

The Fluid Editor is where you modify Fluid Types representing the fluids used in your environment. A Fluid Type
describes the thermodynamic behavior assigned to model instances in a simulation. You can copy and then
modify Fluid Types or create new custom Fluid Types. Each Fluid Type uses a specified fundamental Thermo
Type. The Thermo Type defines the equations or external DLLs that AVEVA Process Simulation uses to solve for
fluid properties. It also determines the parameters, starting values, methods, and components that are available
for the Fluid Type. After you select the Thermo Type for the Fluid Type, you can modify the parameters, starting
values, methods, and components for the Fluid Type. You can save a Fluid Type to a Model Library stored in the
Repository or to the simulation-specific Model Library.

Concepts
• There are multiple fluid categories for simple fluids, compositional fluids, and special fluids, such as
supercritical carbon dioxide and isomeric hydrogen.
• You can create a new Fluid Type, or modify an existing SimSci Fluid Type to make changes so it fits your
specific requirements
• Compositional fluids can include library components or petro components, which are characterized by
molecular weight, boiling point, and specific gravity
• Changes you make to a Fluid Type are automatically saved
• Fluid Types are stored in Model Libraries or with a simulation
• Fluid Types for a simulation must be placed in the simulation-specific Model Library

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 93
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Actions
• Specify the Thermo Type
• For ideal, compressible, and incompressible fluids, define the parameters and starting conditions for the
Fluid Type
• For compositional fluids, define the starting conditions, methods, phases, and components for the Fluid Type
• Import an icon file and associate it with a Fluid Type
• Report the thermodynamic calculation warnings
• Copy a Fluid Type to the simulation-specific Model Library.

Opening the Fluid Editor

To open a Fluid Type:
1. Browse to the Model Library.
2. Right-click a Fluid Type and select Edit.
The Fluid Editor appears.

Configuring a Fluid Type

You can set a Fluid Type's thermo type, parameters, starting values, methods, and components in the Fluid
Editor.
To configure a Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.
2. Expand the General section.

3. Enter or modify the Fluid Type name and Description, if desired. If you change the Fluid Type, you rename
the fluid.
4. Select the Thermo Type so the Fluid Type knows what fluid state equations or thermodynamic options to
use.
The following table defines the different Thermo Types.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 94
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Thermo Type Modeled with Purpose

CarbonDioxide External code Supercritical CO2 based on Span‑Wagner.

See Configuring Single-Component Fluid Types
for more information on configuring Fluid Types
of this Thermo Type.
Compositional External code General component mixtures.
See one of the following topics for more
information on configuring Fluid Types of this
Thermo Type:
• Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That
Uses the Ideal Method
• Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That
Uses an Equation of State
• Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That
Uses the PSRK Method
• Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That
Uses the NRTL, UNIQUAC, or Wilson Method
• Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That
Uses the Electrolyte NRTL Method
• Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That
Uses the Dortmund UNIFAC Method
• Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That
Uses the Grayson-Streed or Improved
Grayson-Streed Method
• Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That
Uses the Regular Solution Model
FlareGas Equations Flare gases.
See Configuring an Equation-based Fluid Type for
more information on configuring Fluid Types of
this Thermo Type.
IdealGas Equations Ideal gases.
See Configuring an Equation-based Fluid Type for
more information on configuring Fluid Types of
this Thermo Type.
IncompressibleLiquid Equations Simple liquids.
See Configuring an Equation-based Fluid Type for
more information on configuring Fluid Types of
this Thermo Type.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 95
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Thermo Type Modeled with Purpose

IsomericHydrogen External code Mixtures of ortho- and para-hydrogen.

See Configuring an Isomeric Hydrogen Fluid Type
for more information on configuring Fluid Types
of this Thermo Type.
Steam External code IF97 steam tables.
See Configuring Single-Component Fluid Types
for more information on configuring Fluid Types
of this Thermo Type.
5. Select the Hide in Model Library based on Role checkbox if you want to hide the Fluid Type from Simulation
Builders in the Model Library.
For information on referencing a Fluid Type in the Model Editor, see Adding Multiple Thermodynamics
Components to a Model in the AVEVA Process Simulation Model Writing Guide.

Configuring Single-Component Fluid Types

These Fluid Types use either CarbonDioxide or Steam as their Thermo Type.
To configure a single-component Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.
2. Expand the Starting Values section and enter the Initial value, Minimum value, and Maximum value for the
Pressure and Temperature.

Configuring an Equation-based Fluid Type

These Fluid Types use one of the following Thermo Types:
• FlareGas
• IdealGas

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 96
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

• IncompressibleLiquid
They use internal equations to calculate their thermodynamic properties and do not need any external code or
software to perform calculations.
To configure a Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.
Expand the Starting Values section and enter the Initial value, Minimum value, and Maximum value for the
Pressure and Temperature.

2. Expand the Parameters section and enter the values for your fluid.
The default value for FlareGas fluids is a CpCv value of 1.4.

The default values for IdealGas fluids are the properties for air.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 97
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

The default values for IncompressibleLiquid fluids are the properties for water.

Configuring an Isomeric Hydrogen Fluid Type

These Fluid Types use IsomericHydrogen as their ThermoType.
To configure an isomeric hydrogen Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 98
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

2. Expand the Starting Values section and enter the Initial value, Minimum value, and Maximum value for the
Pressure and Temperature.

3. Expand the Component List section, which allows you to define what your fluid is composed of.

4. In the Component List section, in the Add Component box, type the name of the components that you want
to add, and then press Enter.
You can add only components from the System:SIMSCI data bank, which is the standard data bank in the
default thermodynamic library that comes along with the AVEVA Process Simulation install.
For isomeric hydrogen Fluid Types, we recommend that you add only ortho-hydrogen (OH2) and para-
hydrogen (PH2) to the Fluid Type.
5. Set the Starting Composition of each component that you want to use when you first place a model that
uses the fluid in a simulation or when you first add the fluid to an existing model on the Canvas. Note that
there are no units of measure for these values. When you add the fluid to a model, AVEVA Process
Simulation uses the default units of measure for the model without converting these values.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 99
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

The Sum of Starting Compositions displays the sum of all the Starting Composition values. We recommend
that you set the starting compositions such that this value is 1.

Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the Ideal Method

These Fluid Types use Compositional as their Thermo Type.
AVEVA Process Simulation provides standard data in its default library for most calculations. In many places
throughout the configuration process, you can specify custom thermodynamic data that you want to use to
supplement the AVEVA Process Simulation data banks for the thermodynamic calculations. See Data Banks for a
Fluid for more information.
To configure a Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.
2. Expand the Starting Values section, and then enter the Initial value, Minimum value, and Maximum value
for the Pressure and Temperature.

3. Expand the Methods section.

4. In the System list, select the Ideal method, which AVEVA Process Simulation uses to model the system and
perform all thermodynamic calculations:

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 100
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

5. Select the Use Henry's Law checkbox to calculate the fugacity of supercritical gasses by using Henry's Law.
Otherwise, clear the checkbox.
The Henry column appears in the Component List section when you select the Use Henry's Law checkbox.
You must select the checkbox in this column for each component that you want to use as a solute
component. AVEVA Process Simulation automatically designates components with critical temperatures less
than 400 K as solute components. Please see the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference
Guide for more information on Henry's Law.
6. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation uses its own data bank of Henry's Law parameters and coefficients. If
you want to use different data banks, in the Henry's Law Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom
data banks that you want to use.
The Henry's Law Data Banks area is available only when the Use Henry's Law checkbox is selected.
7. In the Enthalpy/Entropy Route list, select System to use the system enthalpy basis and reference state for all
components in the Fluid Type or select Custom to specify your own enthalpy basis and reference state for
each component.
The Enthalpy Basis, Ref T, Ref H, and Phase Ch T columns appear in the Component List section when you
select Custom. You can use these columns to change the enthalpy calculation route and reference state for
each component. See Changes to the Enthalpy Basis and Reference State for Components and Enthalpy
Calculations for LACT Methods in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference Guide for more
information.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 101
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

8. (Optional) Select the Include Fugacity Coefficient Variables in Fluid State checkbox to add variables for the
fugacity coefficients to the Fluid State model. You can then view the calculated values for the fugacity
coefficients or use them in other areas of the Simulation.
9. In the Phases list, select the phases that you want the thermodynamic calculation system to model; for
example, if you are modeling a flare process and liquids will not be present, select Vapor Only.
10. If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), or Vapor/Liquid1/Liquid2
(VLLE), in the Vapor Equilibrium list, select the method that you want AVEVA Process Simulation to use when
it calculates the vapor phase equilibrium properties.

11. (Optional) If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), select the Include non-equilibrium solid
components to include any solid components in the composition calculations of the liquid phase. See
Specifying Components as Solids in a Compositional Fluid for more information.
12. If you set the Phases list to Liquid Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), or Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), in the Liquid
Density list, select the method that you want to use for the liquid density calculations.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density option to Rackett, the Rackett Data Banks area appears. If you want to use
custom data banks of Rackett data, in the Rackett Data Banks area, select Expand, and then add the
custom data banks that you want to use.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density option to COSTALD, the COSTALD Data Banks area appears. If you want to
use custom data banks of COSTALD data, in the COSTALD Data Banks area, select Expand, and then add
the custom data banks that you want to use.
13. If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), the Water Solubility Option list appears and
indicates the correlation that AVEVA Process Simulation uses to calculate the water solubility (that is, the
composition fraction of water) in the hydrocarbon liquid phase. Currently, you cannot change the
correlation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 102
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

14. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation uses its own data bank of pure components and pure component data.
If you want to override the properties in the default data bank with those in a custom data bank, in the Pure
Component Property Override Data Bank box, type the name of the custom data bank that contains the
property data that should be overwritten.
Note: This custom data bank should contain only the components of interest and only data for the property
values that you want to override.
15. If you want to see warnings related to the fluid configuration and thermodynamic calculations, select the
Report Fluid Configuration Warnings and Thermodynamic Calculation Warnings checkbox.
16. Add components to the Fluid Type and specify any required data. See Adding Components to a
Compositional Fluid Type for more information.

Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses an Equation of

State
These Fluid Types use Compositional as their Thermo Type.
AVEVA Process Simulation provides standard data in its default library for most calculations. In many places
throughout the configuration process, you can specify custom thermodynamic data that you want to use to
supplement the AVEVA Process Simulation data banks for the thermodynamic calculations. See Data Banks for a
Fluid for more information.
To configure a Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.
2. Expand the Starting Values section and enter the Initial value, Minimum value, and Maximum value for the
Pressure and Temperature.

3. Expand the Methods section.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 103
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

4. In the System list, select one of the following equations of state, which AVEVA Process Simulation uses to
model the system and perform all thermodynamic calculations:
▪ Soave-Redlich-Kwong (SRK)
▪ Peng-Robinson (PR)
▪ SRK-Modified Panag.-Reid (SRKM)
▪ PR-Modified Panag.-Reid (PRM)
▪ SRK-Huron-Vidal (SRKH)
See the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference Guide for more information on the differences
between the equations of state.

5. If you want to use custom data banks of binary interaction data, in the Binary Interaction Banks area, select
Expand and add the custom data banks that you want to use.
6. In the Alpha Selection list, select the type of alpha calculation that you want to use:
▪ Acentric Factor Formulation: AVEVA Process Simulation uses the alpha correlation from the SRK
equation of state.
▪ Alpha Databanks: AVEVA Process Simulation uses a different alpha correlation for each component that
depends on the alpha data in the data banks that you add to the Alpha Data Banks box.
7. If you select Alpha Databanks in the Alpha Selection list and you want to use custom data banks of alpha
correlation data, in the Alpha Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom data banks that you want
to use.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 104
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Warning: If you use a custom ALPHA data bank, you should also use a binary interaction data bank that
contains adjusted binary interaction parameters that correspond to the alpha data in your custom ALPHA
data bank.
8. (Optional) Select the Include Fugacity Coefficient Variables in Fluid State checkbox to add variables for the
fugacity coefficients to the Fluid State model. You can then view the calculated values for the fugacity
coefficients or use them in other areas of the Simulation.
9. In the Phases list, select the phases that you want the thermodynamic calculation system to model; for
example, if you are modeling a flare process and liquids will not be present, select Vapor Only.
10. If you set the Phases list to Vapor Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), or Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), in the Vapor
Enthalpy list, select the method that you want to use for the vapor enthalpy calculations.

11. (Optional) If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), select the Include non-equilibrium solid
components to include any solid components in the composition calculations of the liquid phase. See
Specifying Components as Solids in a Compositional Fluid for more information.
12. (Optional) If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), select the Apply high pressure VLE adjustments
option that best suits your system:
▪ Off: The software uses the standard VLE calculations and does not adjust the algorithm for determining
the k-values of the phase equilibria. This is the default option.
▪ Auto: The software adds another layer to the algorithm for determining the k-values of the phase
equilibria. When the process conditions are at high pressures near or in the supercritical region, the
software uses modified k-value calculations that produce more accurate results. This change significantly
improves the robustness for high-pressure systems. This is especially true for systems in the supercritical
phase region, where it is difficult to determine and characterize the true phase.
▪ Force (Experimental): The software forces all flashes to use the modified k-value calculations for high-
pressure or supercritical conditions regardless of the process conditions. This is an extreme alteration,
and you should use this option only in an experimental capacity. We recommend that you do not use this
option unless your simulation still does not solve when the Auto option is selected. You should externally
verify all results before you use them in any production applications.
13. If you set the Phases list to Liquid Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), or Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), in the Liquid
Enthalpy list, select the method that you want to use for the liquid enthalpy calculations.
14. If you set the Phases list to Liquid Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), or Vapor/Liquid1/
Liquid2 (VLLE), in the Liquid Density list, select the method that you want to use for the liquid density
calculations.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 105
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

▪ If you set the Liquid Density option to Rackett, the Rackett Data Banks area appears. If you want to use
custom data banks of Rackett data, in the Rackett Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom
data banks that you want to use.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density option to COSTALD, the COSTALD Data Banks area appears. If you want to
use custom data banks of COSTALD data, in the COSTALD Data Banks area, select Expand and add the
custom data banks that you want to use.
15. If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), the Water Solubility Option list appears and
indicates the correlation that AVEVA Process Simulation uses to calculate the water solubility (that is, the
composition fraction of water) in the hydrocarbon liquid phase. Currently, you cannot change the
correlation.

16. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation uses its own data bank of pure components and pure component data.
If you want to override the properties in the default data bank with those in a custom data bank, in the Pure
Component Property Override Data Bank box, type the name of the custom data bank that contains the
property data that should be overwritten.
Note: This custom data bank should contain only the components of interest and only data for the property
values that you want to override.
17. (Optional) Select the Report Fluid Configuration Warnings and Thermodynamic Calculation Warnings
checkbox to see warnings related to the fluid configuration and the thermodynamic calculations.
18. Add components to the Fluid Type and specify any required data. See Adding Components to a
Compositional Fluid Type for more information.
19. (Optional) Expand the Method Data section, and then update the thermodynamic data.
Any changes to the data in this section will override the thermodynamic data from the data banks in the
Binary Interaction Banks area. See Overrides for Thermodynamic Method Data for more information.

Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the PSRK Method

These Fluid Types use Compositional as their Thermo Type.
AVEVA Process Simulation provides standard data in its default libraries for most calculations. In many places
throughout the configuration process, you can specify custom thermodynamic data that you want to use to
supplement the AVEVA Process Simulation data banks for the thermodynamic calculations. See Data Banks for a
Fluid for more information.
To configure a Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.
2. Expand the Starting Values section, and then enter the Initial value, Minimum value, and Maximum value
for the Pressure and Temperature.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 106
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

3. Expand the Methods section.

4. In the System list, select PSRK (SRK-Holderbaum Gmehling), which AVEVA Process Simulation uses to model
the system and perform all thermodynamic calculations.
See PSRK – Predictive Soave-Redlich-Kwong in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference
Guide for more information on this thermodynamic method.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 107
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

5. In the Excess Gibbs Energy Method list, select one of the following methods to calculate the excess Gibbs
free energy from the activity coefficient:
▪ UNIFAC
▪ NRTL
6. (Optional) Add custom data banks of interaction data to your Fluid Type.
The controls to add custom data banks change based on the Excess Gibbs Energy Method selection.
▪ For UNIFAC, to use custom data banks of group contribution data, in the Group Information Banks area,
select Expand and add the custom data banks that you want to use.
Your custom data banks must be PSRK-type data banks to appear in the list of available data banks.
▪ For NRTL, to use custom data banks of binary interaction data, in the Binary Interaction Banks area,
select Expand and add the custom data banks that you want to use.
Your custom data banks must be NRTL-type data banks to appear in the list of available data banks.
7. In the Alpha Selection list, select the type of alpha calculation that you want to use:
▪ Acentric Factor Formulation: AVEVA Process Simulation uses the alpha correlation from the SRK
equation of state.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 108
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

▪ Alpha Databanks: AVEVA Process Simulation uses a different alpha correlation for each component that
depends on the alpha data in the data banks that you add to the Alpha Data Banks box.
The default selection is Alpha Databanks and the Fluid Type automatically uses the System:PSRKALPH data
bank. This data bank contains PSRK-specific data for the alpha correlations of 873 components. We have
tried to include all the components that you may need in your chemical processes. However, if your Fluid
Type contains components that are not available in the System:PSRKALPH data bank, you can add your own
custom ALPHA data banks to the Fluid Type to supplement the System:PSRKALPH data bank.
8. If you select Alpha Databanks in the Alpha Selection list and you want to use custom data banks of alpha
correlation data, in the Alpha Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom data banks that you want
to use.
Warning: If you use a custom ALPHA data bank, you should also use a group contribution data bank that
contains adjusted group interaction parameters that correspond to the alpha data in your custom ALPHA
data bank.
9. (Optional) In the PSRK Critical Property Override Data Bank box, type the name of the data bank that
contains the PSRK-specific critical property data that overrides all other critical property data in the Fluid
Type.
By default, the Fluid Type already uses the System:PSRKTCPC data bank to override the critical properties in
the default data bank with PSRK-specific data for the critical temperature and critical pressure of 877
components. We have tried to include all the components that you may need in your chemical processes.
However, if the critical property data for a component is missing from the System:PSRKTCPC data bank, the
Fluid Type uses the critical property data from the default data bank or the critical property data from the
data bank that you specify in the Pure Component Property Override Data Bank box.
Important: If you want to use a critical property data bank other than the System:PSRKTCPC data bank, we
recommend that you contact our customer support to request an extended copy of the PSRKTCPC data bank
that includes all your required components and data. You can then replace the PSRKTCPC data bank in your
Fluid with the extended data bank.
You should use the PSRKTCPC data bank only with the PSRK method.
10. If you select NRTL in the Excess Gibbs Energy Method list, specify the azeotrope options for the Fluid:
a. Select the Use Azeotrope Fill checkbox to estimate missing VLE and LLE interaction parameters by
regressing azeotropic data from a data bank to provide binary interaction data. Otherwise, clear the
checkbox.
The software provides estimates for the interaction parameters only when azeotropic data is available
for both components in the binary pair. If the data banks that your Fluid Type uses do not include
azeotropic data for the components in question, selecting the Use Azeotrope Fill checkbox has no effect
on the Fluid Type.
b. If you want to use custom data banks of azeotropic data, in the Azeotrope Data Banks area, select
Expand and add the custom data banks that you want to use.
The Azeotrope Data Banks area is available only when the Use Azeotrope Fill checkbox is selected.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 109
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

11. In the Enthalpy/Entropy Route list, select System to use the system enthalpy basis and reference state for all
components in the Fluid Type or select Custom to specify your own enthalpy basis and reference state for
each component.
The Enthalpy Basis, Ref T, Ref H, and Phase Ch T columns appear in the Component List section when you
select Custom. You can use these columns to change the enthalpy calculation route and reference state for
each component. See Changes to the Enthalpy Basis and Reference State for Components and Enthalpy
Calculations for Liquid Activity Methods in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference Guide
for more information.

12. (Optional) Select the Include Fugacity Coefficient Variables in Fluid State checkbox to add variables for the
fugacity coefficients to the Fluid State model. You can then view the calculated values for the fugacity
coefficients or use them in other areas of the Simulation.
13. In the Phases list, select the phases that you want the thermodynamic calculation system to model; for
example, if you are modeling a flare process and liquids will not be present, select Vapor Only.
14. If you set the Phases list to Vapor Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), or Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), in the Vapor
Enthalpy list, select the method that you want to use for the vapor enthalpy calculations.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 110
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

15. (Optional) If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), select the Include non-equilibrium solid
components to include any solid components in the composition calculations of the liquid phase. See
Specifying Components as Solids in a Compositional Fluid for more information.
16. (Optional) If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), select the Apply high pressure VLE adjustments
option that best suits your system:
▪ Off: The software uses the standard VLE calculations and does not adjust the algorithm for determining
the k-values of the phase equilibria. This is the default option.
▪ Auto: The software adds another layer to the algorithm for determining the k-values of the phase
equilibria. When the process conditions are at high pressures near or in the supercritical region, the
software uses modified k-value calculations that produce more accurate results. This change significantly
improves the robustness for high-pressure systems. This is especially true for systems in the supercritical
phase region, where it is difficult to determine and characterize the true phase.
▪ Force (Experimental): The software forces all flashes to use the modified k-value calculations for high-
pressure or supercritical conditions regardless of the process conditions. This is an extreme alteration,
and you should use this option only in an experimental capacity. We recommend that you do not use this
option unless your simulation still does not solve when the Auto option is selected. You should externally
verify all results before you use them in any production applications.
17. If you set the Phases list to Liquid Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), or Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), in the Liquid
Enthalpy list, select the method that you want to use for the liquid enthalpy calculations.
18. If you set the Phases list to Liquid Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), or Vapor/Liquid1/
Liquid2 (VLLE), in the Liquid Density list, select the method that you want to use for the liquid density
calculations.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density option to Rackett, the Rackett Data Banks area appears. If you want to use
custom data banks of Rackett data, in the Rackett Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom
data banks that you want to use.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density option to COSTALD, the COSTALD Data Banks area appears. If you want to
use custom data banks of COSTALD data, in the COSTALD Data Banks area, select Expand and add the
custom data banks that you want to use.
19. If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), the Water Solubility Option list appears and
indicates the correlation that AVEVA Process Simulation uses to calculate the water solubility (that is, the
composition fraction of water) in the hydrocarbon liquid phase. Currently, you cannot change the
correlation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 111
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

20. (Optional) If you want to override the properties in the default data bank with those in a custom data bank,
in the Pure Component Property Override Data Bank box, type the name of the custom data bank that
contains the property data that should be overwritten.
21. (Optional) Select the Report Fluid Configuration Warnings and Thermodynamic Calculation Warnings
checkbox to see warnings related to the fluid configuration and the thermodynamic calculations.
22. Add components to the Fluid Type and specify any required data. See Adding Components to a
Compositional Fluid Type for more information.
23. (Optional) If you select NRTL in the Excess Gibbs Energy Method list, expand the Method Data section, and
then update the thermodynamic data.
Any changes to the data in this section override the thermodynamic data from the data banks in the Binary
Interaction Banks area. See Overrides for Thermodynamic Method Data for more information.

Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the NRTL,

UNIQUAC, or Wilson Method
These Fluid Types use Compositional as their Thermo Type.
AVEVA Process Simulation provides standard data in its default library for most calculations. In many places
throughout the configuration process, you can specify custom thermodynamic data that you want to use to
supplement the AVEVA Process Simulation data banks for the thermodynamic calculations. See Data Banks for a
Fluid for more information.
To configure a Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.
2. Expand the Starting Values section and enter the Initial value, Minimum value, and Maximum value for the
Pressure and Temperature.

3. Expand the Methods section.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 112
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

4. In the System list, select one of the following methods, which AVEVA Process Simulation uses to model the
system and perform all thermodynamic calculations:
▪ Non-Random Two-Liquid (NRTL)
▪ Universal Quasi-Chemical (UNIQUAC)
▪ Wilson

5. If you want to use custom data banks of binary interaction data, in the Binary Interaction Banks area, select
Expand and add the custom data banks that you want to use.
6. Select the Use Azeotrope Fill checkbox to estimate missing VLE and LLE interaction parameters by regressing
azeotropic data from a data bank to provide binary interaction data. Otherwise, clear the checkbox.
The software provides estimates for the interaction parameters only when azeotropic data is available for
both components in the binary pair. If the data banks that your Fluid Type uses do not include azeotropic
data for the components in question, selecting the Use Azeotrope Fill checkbox has no effect on the Fluid
Type.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 113
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

7. If you want to use custom data banks of azeotropic data, in the Azeotrope Data Banks area, select Expand
and add the custom data banks that you want to use.
The Azeotrope Data Banks area is available only when the Use Azeotrope Fill checkbox is selected.
8. Select the Use Dortmund UNIFAC Fill checkbox to calculate missing binary interaction parameters by using
group interaction data from a Dortmund UNIFAC data bank. Otherwise, clear the checkbox.
The Use Dortmund UNIFAC Fill checkbox is currently available only when you select Non-Random Two-
Liquid (NRTL) or Wilson in the System list.
The software provides estimates for the binary interaction parameters only when group interaction data is
available for both components in the binary pair. If the data banks that your Fluid Type uses do not include
group interaction data for the components in question, selecting the Use Dortmund UNIFAC Fill checkbox
has no effect on the Fluid Type.
If you select both the Use Azeotrope Fill and Use Dortmund UNIFAC Fill checkboxes, the software fills the
missing interaction parameters first from the azeotropic data and then from the Dortmund UNIFAC group
interaction data if there is no azeotropic data available.
See UNIFAC - Universal Functional Activity Coefficient Method in the AVEVA Process Simulation
Thermodynamics Reference Guide for more information on how the binary interaction parameters are
calculated.
9. If you want to use custom data banks of group interaction data, in the Fill Method Group Information Banks
area, select Expand and add the custom data banks that you want to use.
The Fill Method Group Information Banks area is available only when the Use Dortmund UNIFAC Fill
checkbox is selected.
10. Select the Use Henry's Law checkbox to calculate the fugacity of supercritical gasses by using Henry's Law.
Otherwise, clear the checkbox.
The Henry column appears in the Component List section when you select the Use Henry's Law checkbox.
You must select the checkbox in this column for each component that you want to use as a solute
component. AVEVA Process Simulation automatically designates components with critical temperatures less
than 400 K as solute components. Please see the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference
Guide for more information on Henry's Law.
11. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation uses its own data bank of Henry's Law parameters and coefficients. If
you want to use different data banks, in the Henry's Law Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom
data banks that you want to use.
The Henry's Law Data Banks area is available only when the Use Henry's Law checkbox is selected.
12. In the Enthalpy/Entropy Route list, select System to use the system enthalpy basis and reference state for all
components in the Fluid Type or select Custom to specify your own enthalpy basis and reference state for
each component.
The Enthalpy Basis, Ref T, Ref H, and Phase Ch T columns appear in the Component List section when you
select Custom. You can use these columns to change the enthalpy calculation route and reference state for
each component. See Changes to the Enthalpy Basis and Reference State for Components and Enthalpy
Calculations for Liquid Activity Methods in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference Guide
for more information.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 114
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

13. (Optional) Select the Include Heat of Mixing (Excess Enthalpy) in Liquid Enthalpy Calculations checkbox to
calculate the heat of mixing when AVEVA Process Simulation performs the liquid enthalpy calculations.
14. (Optional) Select the Use Poynting Correction checkbox to include the Poynting correction factor in the
equilibrium calculations.
15. (Optional) Select the Include Fugacity Coefficient Variables in Fluid State checkbox to add variables for the
fugacity coefficients to the Fluid State model. You can then view the calculated values for the fugacity
coefficients or use them in other areas of the Simulation.
16. (Optional) Select the Include Activity Coefficient Variables in Fluid State checkbox to add variables for the
activity coefficients to the Fluid State model. You can then view the calculated values for the activity
coefficients or use them in other areas of the Simulation.
This checkbox is not available when you set the Phases list to Vapor Only.
17. In the Phases list, select the phases that you want the thermodynamic calculation system to model; for
example, if you are modeling a flare process and liquids will not be present, select Vapor Only.
18. If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), or Vapor/Liquid1/Liquid2
(VLLE), in the Vapor Equilibrium list, select the method that you want AVEVA Process Simulation to use when
it calculates the vapor phase equilibrium properties.

19. (Optional) If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), select the Include non-equilibrium solid
components to include any solid components in the composition calculations of the liquid phase. See
Specifying Components as Solids in a Compositional Fluid for more information.
20. If you set the Phases list to Liquid Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), or Vapor/Liquid1/
Liquid2 (VLLE), in the Liquid Density list, select the method that you want to use for the liquid density
calculations.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 115
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

▪ If you set the Liquid Density option to Rackett, the Rackett Data Banks area appears. If you want to use
custom data banks of Rackett data, in the Rackett Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom
data banks that you want to use.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density option to COSTALD, the COSTALD Data Banks area appears. If you want to
use custom data banks of COSTALD data, in the COSTALD Data Banks area, select Expand and add the
custom data banks that you want to use.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density option to Library Correlations, the Liquid Volume Quadratic Mixing Rule
Bank area appears. If you want to use the quadratic mixing rule to calculate the liquid molar volume
(and by extension, the liquid density), select Expand and add the custom VLQMR data banks that you
want to use.
If you do not add any VLQMR data banks to your Fluid Type, the software uses the ideal mixing rule to
calculate the liquid molar volume instead of the quadratic mixing rule. By default, Fluid Types don't
include a liquid molar volume (VLQMR) data bank.
See Quadratic Mixing Rule for Liquid Molar Volume (VLQMR) for more information.
21. If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), the Water Solubility Option list appears and
indicates the correlation that AVEVA Process Simulation uses to calculate the water solubility (that is, the
composition fraction of water) in the hydrocarbon liquid phase. Currently, you cannot change the
correlation.

22. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation uses its own data bank of pure components and pure component data.
If you want to override the properties in the default data bank with those in a custom data bank, in the Pure
Component Property Override Data Bank box, type the name of the custom data bank that contains the
property data that should be overwritten.
Note: This custom data bank should contain only the components of interest and only data for the property
values that you want to override.
23. If you want to see warnings related to the fluid configuration and the thermodynamic calculations, select the
Report Fluid Configuration Warnings and Thermodynamic Calculation Warnings checkbox.
24. Add components to the Fluid Type and specify any required data. See Adding Components to a
Compositional Fluid Type for more information.
25. (Optional) Expand the Method Data section, and then update the thermodynamic data.
Any changes to the data in this section will override the thermodynamic data from the data banks in the
Binary Interaction Banks area. See Overrides for Thermodynamic Method Data for more information.

Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the Electrolyte

NRTL Method
These Fluid Types use Compositional as their Thermo Type.
AVEVA Process Simulation provides standard data in its default library for most calculations. In many places
throughout the configuration process, you can specify custom thermodynamic data that you want to use to

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 116
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

supplement the AVEVA Process Simulation data banks for the thermodynamic calculations. See Data Banks for a
Fluid for more information.
To configure a Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.
2. Expand the Starting Values section and enter the Initial value, Minimum value, and Maximum value for the
Pressure and Temperature.

3. Expand the Methods section.

4. In the System list, select Electrolyte NRTL, which AVEVA Process Simulation uses to model the system and
perform all thermodynamic calculations.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 117
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Currently, Electrolyte NRTL fluids use the ELECTRL system data bank by default. Because AVEVA
Thermodynamic Data Manager currently doesn't support electrolyte data banks, we recommend that you do
not change this selection in the Unary, Binary, Ternary, and Quaternary Interaction Banks area. If you want
to use custom data banks of electrolyte interaction data, please contact AVEVA Process Simulation customer
support for more information on how to do this.
5. Select the Use Azeotrope Fill checkbox to estimate missing VLE interaction parameters by regressing
azeotropic data from a data bank to provide binary interaction data. Otherwise, clear the checkbox.
The software provides estimates for the interaction parameters only when azeotropic data is available for
both components in the binary pair. If the data banks that your Fluid Type uses do not include azeotropic
data for the components in question, selecting the Use Azeotrope Fill checkbox has no effect on the Fluid
Type.
6. If you want to use custom data banks of azeotropic data, in the Azeotrope Data Banks area, select Expand
and add the custom data banks that you want to use.
The Azeotrope Data Banks area is available only when the Use Azeotrope Fill checkbox is selected.
7. Select the Use Henry's Law checkbox to calculate the fugacity of supercritical gasses by using Henry's Law.
Otherwise, clear the checkbox.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 118
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

The Henry column appears in the Component List section when you select the Use Henry's Law checkbox.
You must select the checkbox in this column for each component that you want to use as a solute
component. AVEVA Process Simulation automatically designates components with critical temperatures less
than 400 K as solute components. Please see the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference
Guide for more information on Henry's Law.
8. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation uses its own data bank of Henry's Law parameters and coefficients. If
you want to use different data banks, in the Henry's Law Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom
data banks that you want to use.
The Henry's Law Data Banks area is available only when the Use Henry's Law checkbox is selected.
9. In the Enthalpy/Entropy Route list, select System to use the system enthalpy basis and reference state for all
components in the Fluid Type or select Custom to specify your own enthalpy basis and reference state for
each component.
The Enthalpy Basis, Ref T, Ref H, and Phase Ch T columns appear in the Component List section when you
select Custom. You can use these columns to change the enthalpy calculation route and reference state for
each nonionic component. See Changes to the Enthalpy Basis and Reference State for Components and
Enthalpy Calculations for LACT Methods in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference Guide
for more information.
Ionic components are excluded from the custom enthalpy options. That is, the Enthalpy Basis, Ref T, Ref H,
and Phase Ch T columns are disabled for these components. Instead, the software directly uses the Liquid
Heat Capacity correlation defined in the ELECTRL system data bank to calculate the enthalpy. For these
calculations, the reference enthalpy is the heat of formation at infinite aqueous dilution, and the reference
temperate is 298.15 K.

10. (Optional) Select the Include Heat of Mixing (Excess Enthalpy) in Liquid Enthalpy Calculations checkbox to
calculate the heat of mixing when AVEVA Process Simulation performs the liquid enthalpy calculations.
11. (Optional) Select the Use Poynting Correction checkbox to include the Poynting correction factor in the
equilibrium calculations.
12. (Optional) Select the Include Fugacity Coefficient Variables in Fluid State checkbox to add variables for the
fugacity coefficients to the Fluid State model. You can then view the calculated values for the fugacity
coefficients or use them in other areas of the Simulation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 119
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

13. (Optional) Select the Include Activity Coefficient Variables in Fluid State checkbox to add variables for the
activity coefficients to the Fluid State model. You can then view the calculated values for the activity
coefficients or use them in other areas of the Simulation.
This checkbox is not available when you set the Phases list to Vapor Only.
14. In the Phases list, select the phases that you want the thermodynamic calculation system to model; for
example, if you are modeling a flare process and liquids will not be present, select Vapor Only.
15. If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), in the Vapor Equilibrium list, select the method that you
want AVEVA Process Simulation to use when it calculates the vapor phase equilibrium properties.

16. (Optional) If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), select the Include non-equilibrium solid
components to include any solid components in the composition calculations of the liquid phase. See
Specifying Components as Solids in a Compositional Fluid for more information.
17. If you set the Phases list to Liquid Only or Vapor/Liquid (VLE), in the Liquid Density list, select the method
that you want to use for the liquid density calculations.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density option to Rackett, the Rackett Data Banks area appears. If you want to use
custom data banks of Rackett data, in the Rackett Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom
data banks that you want to use.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density option to COSTALD, the COSTALD Data Banks area appears. If you want to
use custom data banks of COSTALD data, in the COSTALD Data Banks area, select Expand and add the
custom data banks that you want to use.
18. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation uses its own data bank of pure components and pure component data.
If you want to override the properties in the default data bank with those in a custom data bank, in the Pure
Component Property Override Data Bank box, type the name of the custom data bank that contains the
property data that should be overwritten.
Note: This custom data bank should contain only the components of interest and only data for the property
values that you want to override.
19. If you want to see warnings related to the fluid configuration and the thermodynamic calculations, select the
Report Fluid Configuration Warnings and Thermodynamic Calculation Warnings checkbox.
20. Add components to the Fluid Type and specify any required data. See Adding Components to a
Compositional Fluid Type for more information.
21. (Optional) Expand the Method Data section, and then update the binary, ternary, and quaternary interaction
parameters for the Electrolyte NRTL (eNRTL) method as desired.
Any changes to the data in this section override the thermodynamic data from the data banks in the Unary,
Binary, Ternary, and Quaternary Interaction Banks area. See Overriding the Interaction Parameters for the
eNRTL Method for more information.
22. Expand the Models section.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 120
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

23. In the Reaction box, type the name of the eNRTL reaction submodel that you want to use for your
electrolyte dissociations.
You can use one of the following default eNRTL reaction submodels from the Fluids library or use a custom
eNRTL reaction submodel. When you create a custom eNRTL reaction submodel, we recommend that you
copy one of the default eNRTL reaction submodels and modify it with your custom dissociation reaction
data.
▪ Fluids.RXHCl_eNRTL: Provides reaction data for the dissociation of HCl in water.
▪ Fluids.RXHNO3_eNRTL: Provides reaction data for the dissociation of HNO3 in water.

Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the Dortmund

UNIFAC Method
These Fluid Types use Compositional as their Thermo Type.
AVEVA Process Simulation provides standard data in its default library for most calculations. In many places
throughout the configuration process, you can specify custom thermodynamic data that you want to use to
supplement the AVEVA Process Simulation data banks for the thermodynamic calculations. See Data Banks for a
Fluid for more information.
To configure a Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.
2. Expand the Starting Values section and enter the Initial value, Minimum value, and Maximum value for the
Pressure and Temperature.

3. Expand the Methods section.

4. In the System list, select Dortmund UNIFAC.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 121
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

5. If you want to use custom data banks of binary interaction data, in the Group Information Banks area, select
Expand and add the custom data banks that you want to use.
If you are a UNIFAC Consortium member, you can request a UNIFAC Consortium library from the consortium
that you can then import and use in AVEVA Process Simulation. If you add a UNIFAC Consortium data bank to
the Selected Dortmund Banks list, you should also remove the System:PUBLIC databank from the Selected
Dortmund Banks list to prevent any data conflicts between the two libraries.
6. Select the Use Henry's Law checkbox to calculate the fugacity of supercritical gasses by using Henry's Law.
Otherwise, clear the checkbox.
The Henry column appears in the Component List section when you select the Use Henry's Law checkbox.
You must select the checkbox in this column for each component that you want to use as a solute
component. AVEVA Process Simulation automatically designates components with critical temperatures less
than 400 K as solute components. Please see the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference
Guide for more information on Henry's Law.
7. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation uses its own data bank of Henry's Law parameters and coefficients. If
you want to use different data banks, in the Henry's Law Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom
data banks that you want to use.
The Henry's Law Data Banks area is available only when the Use Henry's Law checkbox is selected.
8. In the Enthalpy/Entropy Route list, select System to use the system enthalpy basis and reference state for all
components in the Fluid Type or select Custom to specify your own enthalpy basis and reference state for
each component.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 122
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

The Enthalpy Basis, Ref T, Ref H, and Phase Ch T columns appear in the Component List section when you
select Custom. You can use these columns to change the enthalpy calculation route and reference state for
each component. See Changes to the Enthalpy Basis and Reference State for Components and Enthalpy
Calculations for LACT Methods in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamic Reference Guide for more
information.

9. (Optional) Select the Include Heat of Mixing (Excess Enthalpy) in Liquid Enthalpy Calculations checkbox to
calculate the heat of mixing when AVEVA Process Simulation performs the liquid enthalpy calculations.
10. (Optional) Select the Use Poynting Correction checkbox to include the Poynting correction factor in the
equilibrium calculations.
11. (Optional) Select the Include Fugacity Coefficient Variables in Fluid State checkbox to add variables for the
fugacity coefficients to the Fluid State model. You can then view the calculated values for the fugacity
coefficients or use them in other areas of the Simulation.
12. (Optional) Select the Include Activity Coefficient Variables in Fluid State checkbox to add variables for the
activity coefficients to the Fluid State model. You can then view the calculated values for the activity
coefficients or use them in other areas of the Simulation.
This checkbox is available only when you set the Phases list to Liquid Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), Vapor/
Liquid/Water (VLWE), or Vapor/Liquid1/Liquid2 (VLLE).
13. In the Phases list, select the phases that you want the thermodynamic calculation system to model; for
example, if you are modeling a flare process and liquids will not be present, select Vapor Only.
14. If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), or Vapor/Liquid1/Liquid2
(VLLE), in the Vapor Equilibrium list, select the method that you want AVEVA Process Simulation to use when
it calculates the vapor phase equilibrium properties.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 123
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

15. (Optional) If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), select the Include non-equilibrium solid
components to include any solid components in the composition calculations of the liquid phase. See
Specifying Components as Solids in a Compositional Fluid for more information.
16. If you set the Phases list to Liquid Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), or Vapor/Liquid1/
Liquid2 (VLLE), in the Liquid Density list, select the method that you want to use for the liquid density
calculations.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density list to Rackett, the Rackett Data Banks area appears. If you want to use
custom data banks of Rackett data, in the Rackett Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom
data banks that you want to use.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density list to COSTALD, the COSTALD Data Banks area appears. If you want to use
custom data banks of COSTALD data, in the COSTALD Data Banks area, select Expand and add the
custom data banks that you want to use.
17. If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), the Water Solubility Option list appears and
indicates the correlation that AVEVA Process Simulation uses to calculate the water solubility (that is, the
composition fraction of water) in the hydrocarbon liquid phase. Currently, you cannot change the
correlation.

18. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation uses its own data bank of pure components and pure component data.
If you want to override the properties in the default data bank with those in a custom data bank, in the Pure
Component Property Override Data Bank box, type the name of the custom data bank that contains the
property data that should be overwritten.
Note: This custom data bank should contain only the components of interest and only data for the property
values that you want to override.
19. If you want to see warnings related to the fluid configuration and the thermodynamic calculations, select the
Report Fluid Configuration Warnings and Thermodynamic Calculation Warnings checkbox.
20. Add components to the Fluid Type and specify any required data. See Adding Components to a
Compositional Fluid Type for more information.

Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the Grayson-

Streed or Improved Grayson-Streed Method
These Fluid Types use Compositional as their Thermo Type.
AVEVA Process Simulation provides standard data in its default library for most calculations. In many places
throughout the configuration process, you can specify custom thermodynamic data that you want to use to
supplement the AVEVA Process Simulation data banks for the thermodynamic calculations. See Data Banks for a
Fluid for more information.
To configure a Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 124
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

2. Expand the Starting Values section and enter the Initial value, Minimum value, and Maximum value for the
Pressure and Temperature.

3. Expand the Methods section.

4. In the System list, select either Grayson-Streed or Improved Grayson-Streed.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 125
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

5. (Optional) Select the Include Fugacity Coefficient Variables in Fluid State checkbox to add variables for the
fugacity coefficients to the Fluid State model. You can then view the calculated values for the fugacity
coefficients or use them in other areas of the Simulation.
6. In the Phases list, select the phases that you want the thermodynamic calculation system to model; for
example, if you are modeling a flare process and liquids will not be present, select Vapor Only.
7. (Optional) If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), select the Include non-equilibrium solid
components to include any solid components in the composition calculations of the liquid phase. See
Specifying Components as Solids in a Compositional Fluid for more information.
8. If you set the Phases list to Liquid Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), or Vapor/Liquid1/
Liquid2 (VLLE), in the Liquid Density list, select the method that you want to use for the liquid density
calculations.

▪ If you set the Liquid Density list to Rackett, the Rackett Data Banks area appears. If you want to use
custom data banks of Rackett data, in the Rackett Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom
data banks that you want to use.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density list to COSTALD, the COSTALD Data Banks area appears. If you want to use
custom data banks of COSTALD data, in the COSTALD Data Banks area, select Expand and add the
custom data banks that you want to use.
9. If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), the Water Solubility Option list appears and
indicates the correlation that AVEVA Process Simulation uses to calculate the water solubility (that is, the
composition fraction of water) in the hydrocarbon liquid phase. Currently, you cannot change the
correlation.

10. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation uses its own data bank of pure components and pure component data.
If you want to override the properties in the default data bank with those in a custom data bank, in the Pure
Component Property Override Data Bank box, type the name of the custom data bank that contains the
property data that should be overwritten.
Note: This custom data bank should contain only the components of interest and only data for the property
values that you want to override.
11. If you want to see warnings related to the fluid configuration and the thermodynamic calculations, select the
Report Fluid Configuration Warnings and Thermodynamic Calculation Warnings checkbox.
12. Add components to the Fluid Type and specify any required data. See Adding Components to a
Compositional Fluid Type for more information.
13. (Optional) Expand the Method Data section, and then update the thermodynamic data on the SRK tab.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 126
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Any changes to the data in this section will override the thermodynamic data from the default binary
interaction data banks for the Soave-Redlich-Kwong (SRK) equation of state. See Overrides for
Thermodynamic Method Data for more information.
The Grayson-Streed and Improved Grayson-Streed methods use the SRK equation of state to calculate the
vapor density for the fluid.

Configuring a Compositional Fluid Type That Uses the Regular

Solution Model
These Fluid Types use Compositional as their Thermo Type.
AVEVA Process Simulation provides standard data in its default library for most calculations. In many places
throughout the configuration process, you can specify custom thermodynamic data that you want to use to
supplement the AVEVA Process Simulation data banks for the thermodynamic calculations. See Data Banks for a
Fluid for more information.
To configure a Fluid Type:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type.
2. Expand the Starting Values section and enter the Initial value, Minimum value, and Maximum value for the
Pressure and Temperature.

3. Expand the Methods section.

4. In the System list, select Regular Solution Model.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 127
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

5. In the Enthalpy/Entropy Route list, select System to use the system enthalpy basis and reference state for all
components in the Fluid Type or select Custom to specify your own enthalpy basis and reference state for
each component.
The Enthalpy Basis, Ref T, Ref H, and Phase Ch T columns appear in the Component List section when you
select Custom. You can use these columns to change the enthalpy calculation route and reference state for
each component. See Changes to the Enthalpy Basis and Reference State for Components and Enthalpy
Calculations for LACT Methods in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference Guide for more
information.

6. (Optional) Select the Include Heat of Mixing (Excess Enthalpy) in Liquid Enthalpy Calculations checkbox to
calculate the heat of mixing when AVEVA Process Simulation performs the liquid enthalpy calculations.
7. (Optional) Select the Use Poynting Correction checkbox to include the Poynting correction factor in the
equilibrium calculations.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 128
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

8. (Optional) Select the Include Fugacity Coefficient Variables in Fluid State checkbox to add variables for the
fugacity coefficients to the Fluid State model. You can then view the calculated values for the fugacity
coefficients or use them in other areas of the Simulation.
9. In the Phases list, select the phases that you want the thermodynamic calculation system to model; for
example, if you are modeling a flare process and liquids will not be present, select Vapor Only.
10. (Optional) If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid (VLE), select the Include non-equilibrium solid
components to include any solid components in the composition calculations of the liquid phase. See
Specifying Components as Solids in a Compositional Fluid for more information.
11. If you set the Phases list to Liquid Only, Vapor/Liquid (VLE), Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), or Vapor/Liquid1/
Liquid2 (VLLE), in the Liquid Density list, select the method that you want to use for the liquid density
calculations.

▪ If you set the Liquid Density list to Rackett, the Rackett Data Banks area appears. If you want to use
custom data banks of Rackett data, in the Rackett Data Banks area, select Expand and add the custom
data banks that you want to use.
▪ If you set the Liquid Density list to COSTALD, the COSTALD Data Banks area appears. If you want to use
custom data banks of COSTALD data, in the COSTALD Data Banks area, select Expand and add the
custom data banks that you want to use.
12. If you set the Phases list to Vapor/Liquid/Water (VLWE), the Water Solubility Option list appears and
indicates the correlation that AVEVA Process Simulation uses to calculate the water solubility (that is, the
composition fraction of water) in the hydrocarbon liquid phase. Currently, you cannot change the
correlation.

13. By default, AVEVA Process Simulation uses its own data bank of pure components and pure component data.
If you want to override the properties in the default data bank with those in a custom data bank, in the Pure
Component Property Override Data Bank box, type the name of the custom data bank that contains the
property data that should be overwritten.
Note: This custom data bank should contain only the components of interest and only data for the property
values that you want to override.
14. If you want to see warnings related to the fluid configuration and the thermodynamic calculations, select the
Report Fluid Configuration Warnings and Thermodynamic Calculation Warnings checkbox.
15. Add components to the Fluid Type and specify any required data. See Adding Components to a
Compositional Fluid Type for more information.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 129
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Changing the Mixing Rules for Transport Property Calculations

For Compositional Fluids, you can select the mixing rule that you want to use to calculate the following transport
properties:
• Vapor thermal conductivity
• Liquid thermal conductivity
• Liquid surface tension
• Vapor viscosity
• Liquid viscosity
You can change the mixing rules for the vapor thermal conductivity and vapor viscosity only when the Fluid
contains a vapor phase. You can change the mixing rules for the liquid thermal conductivity, liquid surface
tension, and liquid viscosity only when the Fluid contains a liquid phase.
To change the mixing rules for the transport property calculations:
1. In the Fluid Editor, expand the Transport Mixing Rules section.
2. If the Fluid contains a vapor phase (that is, if you set the Phases list for the Fluid to any selection other than
Liquid Only), do the following:
a. In the Vapor Conductivity list, select the desired mixing rule. See Available Mixing Rules for Vapor
Conductivity for descriptions of the available mixing rules.
b. In the Vapor Viscosity list, select the desired mixing rule. See Available Mixing Rules for Vapor Viscosity
for descriptions of the available mixing rules.
3. If the Fluid contains a liquid phase (that is, if you set the Phases list for the Fluid to any selection other than
Vapor Only), do the following:
a. In the Liquid Conductivity list, select the desired mixing rule. See Available Mixing Rules for Liquid
Conductivity for descriptions of the available mixing rules.
b. In the Liquid Surface Tension list, select the desired mixing rule. See Available Mixing Rules for Liquid
Surface Tension for descriptions of the available mixing rules.
c. In the Liquid Viscosity list, select the desired mixing rule. See Available Mixing Rules for Liquid Viscosity
for descriptions of the available mixing rules.

Available Mixing Rules for Vapor Conductivity

You can use one of the following mixing rules to calculate the bulk vapor thermal conductivity of a Fluid.
SimSci Mixing Rule

where
lm is the vapor thermal conductivity of the mixture

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 130
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

li is the vapor thermal conductivity of pure component i

yi is the molar composition fraction of component i in the vapor phase
Mi is the molar mass of pure component i
This is the default mixing rule.
Molar Average

Logarithmic Molar Average

Power Molar Average

where
r is an exponent that you specify in the Fluid Editor
Lambda Mixing Rule

Wassiljewa-Mason-Saxena Mixing Rule

TRAPP (Transport Property Prediction) Mixing Rule[2,3]

We evaluate the vapor thermal conductivity based on the deviations in a reference fluid, which we assume to be
the pure vapor of a reference component, R. We use the following equations to calculate the vapor thermal
conductivity of the mixture (lm):

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 131
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 132
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

where
lm0 is the vapor thermal conductivity of the mixture at low pressure and temperature, which we calculate by
using the vapor thermal conductivities from the Lee-Kesler equation of state (EOS) and the SimSci mixing rule
Ci are a set of constant coefficients taken from literature[4]
rc,R is the density of reference component R at its critical temperature and pressure
rc,i is the density of component i at its critical temperature and pressure
MR is the molar mass of reference component R

Pisat is the vapor pressure of component i at the system temperature (T)

PRsat(T0) is the vapor pressure of reference component R at temperature T0

risat is the saturated liquid density of component i at the system temperature (T)
rRsat(T0) is the saturated liquid density of reference component R at T0
wi is the acentric factor of component i
wR is the acentric factor of reference component R
Zc,i is the critical compressibility factor of component i
Zc,R is the critical compressibility factor of reference component R

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 133
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Because we evaluate the vapor pressure and saturated liquid density of the reference fluid at T0, we must
iteratively solve for fi.
Typically, you use this mixing rule for systems of non-polar components at high pressures.
References
1. Mason, E. A.; Saxena, S. C. Approximate Formula for the Thermal Conductivity of Gas Mixtures. Phys. Fluids
1958, 1 (5), 361–369.
2. Leland, T. W., Robinson, J. S., and Suther G.A., 1968, Statistical Thermodynamics of Mixtures of Molecules of
Different Sizes, Trans. Farad. Soc., 64, 1447-1460.
3. Ely, J. F.; Hanley, H. J. M. Prediction of Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity in Hydrocarbon Mixtures-
Computer Program TRAPP. Proceedings of the 60th Annual Convention of the Gas Processors Association, San
Antonio, TX, USA, Mar 23, 1981.
4. Reid, R. C.; Prausnitz, J. M.; Poling, B. E. The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 5th ed.; McGraw-Hill: New York,
1977; pp. 572-577.

Available Mixing Rules for Liquid Conductivity

You can use one of the following mixing rules to calculate the bulk liquid thermal conductivity of a Fluid.
SimSci Mixing Rule

where
lm is the liquid thermal conductivity of the mixture
li is the liquid thermal conductivity of pure component i
wi is the weight composition fraction of component i in the liquid phase
This is the default mixing rule. It is the same as the DIPPR 9H mixing rule.
Molar Average

where
xi is the molar composition fraction of component i in the liquid phase
Logarithmic Molar Average

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 134
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

DIPPR Mixing Rule

where
fi is the volume fraction of pure component i
Vi is the liquid molar volume of pure component i
This mixing rule is the same as the DIPPR 9I mixing rule and the DIKL equation from the IK-CAPE thermodynamics
package.
Li Mixing Rule

where
Fi is the superficial volume fraction of component i

TRAPP (Transport Property Prediction) Mixing Rule[3,4]

We evaluate the liquid thermal conductivity based on the deviations in a reference fluid, which we assume to be
the pure liquid of a reference component, R. We use the following equations to calculate the liquid thermal
conductivity of the mixture (lm):

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 135
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 136
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

where
lm0 is the liquid thermal conductivity of the mixture at low pressure and temperature, which we calculate by
using the liquid thermal conductivities from the Lee-Kesler equation of state (EOS) and the SimSci mixing rule
Ci are a set of constant coefficients taken from literature[5]
rc,R is the density of reference component R at its critical temperature and pressure
rc,i is the density of component i at its critical temperature and pressure
MR is the molar mass of reference component R

Pisat is the vapor pressure of component i at the system temperature (T)

PRsat(T0) is the vapor pressure of reference component R at temperature T0

risat is the saturated liquid density of component i at the system temperature (T)
rRsat(T0) is the saturated liquid density of reference component R at T0
wi is the acentric factor of component i
wR is the acentric factor of reference component R
Zc,i is the critical compressibility factor of component i
Zc,R is the critical compressibility factor of reference component R
Because we evaluate the vapor pressure and saturated liquid density of the reference fluid at T0, we must
iteratively solve for fi.
Typically, you use this mixing rule for systems of non-polar components when Tr > 0.7.
Power Molar Average (Vredeveld) Mixing Rule

where
r is an exponent that you specify in the Fluid Editor
References
1. Li, C. C. Thermal Conductivity of Liquid Mixtures. AIChE J. 1976, 22 (5), 927–930.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 137
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

2. Poling, B. E.; Prausnitz, J. M.; O'Connell, J. P. The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 5th ed.; McGraw-Hill: New
York, 2001; p. 624.
3. Leland, T. W.; Robinson, J. S.; Suther, G.A. Statistical Thermodynamics of Mixtures of Molecules of Different
Sizes. Trans. Farad. Soc. 1968, 64, 1447-1460.
4. Ely, J. F.; Hanley, H. J. M. Prediction of Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity in Hydrocarbon Mixtures-
Computer Program TRAPP. Proceedings of the 60th Annual Convention of the Gas Processors Association, San
Antonio, TX, USA, Mar 23, 1981.
5. Reid, R. C.; Prausnitz, J. M.; Poling, B. E. The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 5th ed.; McGraw-Hill: New York,
1977; pp. 572-577.

Available Mixing Rules for Liquid Surface Tension

You can use one of the following mixing rules to calculate the bulk liquid surface tension of a Fluid.
Molar Average

where
sm is the surface tension of the mixture
si is the surface tension of pure component i
xi is the molar composition fraction of component i in the liquid phase
This is the default mixing rule.
Logarithmic Molar Average

Power Molar Average

where
r is an exponent that you specify in the Fluid Editor
DIPPR Mixing Rule

where
Vi is the liquid molar volume of pure component i

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 138
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

This mixing rule is the same as the DIST equation from the IK-CAPE thermodynamics package.
MacLeod-Sugden Modified Mixing Rule

References
1. Reid, R. C.; Prausnitz, J. M.; Poling, B. E. The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th ed.; McGraw-Hill: New York,
1977; pp. 530–535.

Available Mixing Rules for Vapor Viscosity

You can use one of the following mixing rules to calculate the bulk vapor viscosity of a Fluid.
SimSci Mixing Rule

where
hm is the vapor viscosity of the mixture
hi is the vapor viscosity of pure component i
yi is the molar composition fraction of component i in the vapor phase
Mi is the molar mass of pure component i
This is the default mixing rule.
Molar Average

Logarithmic Molar Average

Logarithmic Mass Average

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 139
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Power Molar Average

where
r is an exponent that you specify in the Fluid Editor
Wilke Mixing Rule

Wilke-Brokaw Mixing Rule

where

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 140
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

si is the viscosity collision diameter of component i

sij is the viscosity collision diameter of dissimilar components i and j

TRAPP (Transport Property Prediction) Mixing Rule[3,4]

We evaluate the vapor viscosity based on the deviations in a reference fluid, which we assume to be the pure
vapor of a reference component, R. We use the following equations to calculate the vapor viscosity of the
mixture (hm):

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 141
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

where
hm0 is the vapor viscosity of the mixture at low pressure, which we calculate by using the vapor viscosities from
the Lee-Kesler equation of state (EOS) and the Wilke mixing rule
DhENSKOG is a calculated[5] correction factor based on the hard sphere assumption to account for size
differences between component molecules
Ei are a set of constant coefficients taken from literature[6]
rc,R is the density of reference component R at its critical temperature and pressure
rc,i is the density of component i at its critical temperature and pressure
MR is the molar mass of reference component R

Pisat is the vapor pressure of component i at the system temperature (T)

PRsat(T0) is the vapor pressure of reference component R at temperature T0

risat is the saturated liquid density of component i at the system temperature (T)
rRsat(T0) is the saturated liquid density of reference component R at T0
wi is the acentric factor of component i
wR is the acentric factor of reference component R
Zc,i is the critical compressibility factor of component i

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 142
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Zc,R is the critical compressibility factor of reference component R

Because we evaluate the vapor pressure and saturated liquid density of the reference fluid at T0, we must
iteratively solve for fi.
Typically, you use this mixing rule for systems of non-polar components at high pressures.
References
1. Wilke, C.R. A Viscosity Equation for Gas Mixtures. J.Chem. Phys. 1950, 18 (4), 517-519
2. Brokaw, R.S. Viscosity of Gas Mixtures; NASA TN D-4496; National Aeronautics and Space Administration,
U.S. Government Printing Office: Washington, DC, 1968.
3. Leland, T. W.; Robinson, J. S.; Suther, G.A. Statistical Thermodynamics of Mixtures of Molecules of Different
Sizes. Trans. Farad. Soc. 1968, 64, 1447-1460.
4. Ely, J. F.; Hanley, H. J. M. Prediction of Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity in Hydrocarbon Mixtures-
Computer Program TRAPP. Proceedings of the 60th Annual Convention of the Gas Processors Association, San
Antonio, TX, USA, Mar 23, 1981.
5. Reid, R. C.; Prausnitz, J. M.; Poling, B. E. The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 5th ed.; McGraw-Hill: New York,
1977; pp. 498-502.
6. Reid, R. C.; Prausnitz, J. M.; Poling, B. E. The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 5th ed.; McGraw-Hill: New York,
1977; pp. 493-497.

Available Mixing Rules for Liquid Viscosity

You can use one of the following mixing rules to calculate the bulk liquid viscosity of a Fluid.
SimSci Mixing Rule

hm is the liquid viscosity of the mixture

hi is the liquid viscosity of pure component i
xi is the molar composition fraction of component i in the liquid phase
This is the default mixing rule.
Molar Average

Logarithmic Molar Average

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 143
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Logarithmic Mass Average

Power Molar Average

where
r is an exponent that you specify in the Fluid Editor
ASTM Mixing Rule

where
wi is the weight composition fraction of component i in the liquid phase
f is a specified parameter

TRAPP (Transport Property Prediction) Mixing Rule[2,3]

We evaluate the liquid viscosity based on the deviations in a reference fluid, which we assume to be the pure
liquid of a reference component, R. We use the following equations to calculate the liquid viscosity of the
mixture (hm):

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 144
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

where
hm0 is the liquid viscosity of the mixture at low pressure, which we calculate by using the liquid viscosities from
the Lee-Kesler equation of state (EOS) and the SimSci mixing rule

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 145
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

DhENSKOG is a calculated[4] correction factor based on the hard sphere assumption to account for size
differences between component molecules
Ei are a set of constant coefficients taken from literature[5]
rc,R is the density of reference component R at its critical temperature and pressure
rc,i is the density of component i at its critical temperature and pressure
MR is the molar mass of reference component R

Pisat is the vapor pressure of component i at the system temperature (T)

PRsat(T0) is the vapor pressure of reference component R at temperature T0

risat is the saturated liquid density of component i at the system temperature (T)
rRsat(T0) is the saturated liquid density of reference component R at T0
wi is the acentric factor of component i
wR is the acentric factor of reference component R
Zc,i is the critical compressibility factor of component i
Zc,R is the critical compressibility factor of reference component R
Because we evaluate the vapor pressure and saturated liquid density of the reference fluid at T0, we must
iteratively solve for fi.
Typically, you use this mixing rule for systems of non-polar components when Tr > 0.7.
References
1. Wauquier, J. Petroleum Refining V. 1: Crude Oil, Petroleum Products, Process Flowsheets; Institut Francais du
Petrole Publications; Editions Technips: Paris, 1995; p. 130.
2. Leland, T. W.; Robinson, J. S.; Suther, G.A. Statistical Thermodynamics of Mixtures of Molecules of Different
Sizes. Trans. Farad. Soc. 1968, 64, 1447-1460.
3. Ely, J. F.; Hanley, H. J. M. Prediction of Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity in Hydrocarbon Mixtures-
Computer Program TRAPP. Proceedings of the 60th Annual Convention of the Gas Processors Association, San
Antonio, TX, USA, Mar 23, 1981.
4. Reid, R. C.; Prausnitz, J. M.; Poling, B. E. The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 5th ed.; McGraw-Hill: New York,
1977; pp. 498-502.
5. Reid, R. C.; Prausnitz, J. M.; Poling, B. E. The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 5th ed.; McGraw-Hill: New York,
1977; pp. 493-497.

Adding Components to a Compositional Fluid Type

To add components to a Compositional Fluid Type:
1. Expand the Component List and Component Browser sections, which allow you to define what your fluid is
composed of.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 146
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

2. If you know the library name of a pure component that you want to add to the Fluid Type, in the Component
List section, do the following:
a. In the Add Component list, select the thermodynamic data bank that contains the pure components that
you want to add.
The default data bank is System:SIMSCI, which is the standard data bank in the default thermodynamic
library that comes along with the AVEVA Process Simulation install.
b. In the Add Component box, type the name and then press Enter.
3. If you do not know the library name of a pure component that you want to add to the Fluid Type, in the
Component Browser section, locate the pure component in the list and click to add a component to the
Fluid Type.
Note: You can filter the components in the Component Browser section by data bank, name, formula, or
property. See Filtering Components in the Component Browser for more information.

4. For petro components, in the Component List section, click Add Petro Component . Enter values for at
least two of the properties that characterize the component: NBP, Gravity, and MW. AVEVA Process
Simulation changes the name of the component based on the NBP value.
5. If desired, rename the components. If you rename a component, you may want to update the name if you
later decide to change the component properties.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 147
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

6. If you are using Henry's Law for calculations (that is, you select the Use Henry's Law checkbox in the
Methods section), in the Henry column, select the checkbox for each component that you want to use as a
solute component. AVEVA Process Simulation automatically selects the checkboxes for components with
critical temperatures less than 400 K.
The Use Henry's Law checkbox is available only for Fluid Types that use the NRTL, UNIQUAC, Dortmund
UNIFAC, or Wilson methods.
7. If you are using VLLE calculations (that is, you select Vapor/Liquid1/Liquid2 (VLLE) in the Phases list in the
Methods section), in the LLE Key column, select the desired key components for the L1 and L2 liquid phases.
You can specify a key component for one or both of the liquid phases. See Key Components for the Liquid
Phases in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference Guide for more information.
8. If you are using a custom enthalpy route (that is, you select Custom in the Enthalpy Route list in the
Methods section), do the following for each component:
a. In the Enthalpy Basis column, select the enthalpy basis that you want to use.
b. In the Ref T column, enter the reference temperature that you want to use.
c. In the Ref H column, enter the change in enthalpy from the system reference state to the reference state
that you specify in the Ref T and Enthalpy Basis columns.
d. In the Phase Ch T column, enter the temperature at which the component changes phases to the
supercritical region, Tc.
The Enthalpy Route list is not available for Fluid Types that use the Grayson-Streed or Improved Grayson-
Streed methods.
See Changes to the Enthalpy Basis and Reference State for Components for more information.
9. Set the Starting Composition of each component that you want to use when you first place a model that
uses the fluid in a simulation or when you first add the fluid to an existing model on the Canvas. There are no
units of measure for these values. When you add the fluid to a model, AVEVA Process Simulation uses the
default units of measure for the model without converting these values.
The Sum of Starting Compositions displays the sum of all the Starting Composition values. We recommend
that you set the starting compositions such that this value is 1.
10. (Optional) Expand the Component Data section, and then update the constant or temperature-dependent
property data.
Any changes to the data in this section override the thermodynamic data from the default or custom pure
component (PURECOMP) data banks that the Fluid Type uses. See Overrides for Component Property Data
for more information.

Disabling Components in a Compositional Fluid

If you want to remove a component from a Compositional Fluid without losing any custom data for that
component (such as custom enthalpy route data), you can disable the component in the Fluid. Disabled
components do not participate in any thermodynamic calculations and do not appear in any model instances
that use the Fluid.
To disable a component in the Fluid:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 148
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

2. In the Component List section, clear the check box next to the name of the component.
To disable all components in the Fluid:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid.
2. In the Component List section, clear the check box in the header row, next to the Name column.

Specifying Components as Solids in a Compositional Fluid

You can specify a component in a Compositional Fluid as a solid. Currently, AVEVA Process Simulation supports
only non-equilibrium solids. Therefore, the solid components do not participate in the phase equilibrium
calculations. However, the calculated liquid fractions do include the solid components as part of the liquid. The
bulk property calculations for the liquid phase also include the contributions from the solid components.
The software does not support flash calculations with pure solid components. A thermodynamic flash may not
solve if it includes solid components.
To specify components as solids:
1. In the Fluid Editor, in the Methods section, select the Include non-equilibrium solid components check box.

The Solid column now appears in the Component List section.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 149
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

2. In the Component List section, in the Solid column, select the check box for each component that you want
to treat as a solid.

Adding a Salt Precipitation Reaction Submodel to a Fluid

Typically, you add salt precipitates to your Fluid as non-equilibrium solids. If these salts are soluble in the liquid
phase of your Fluid, you can also add a salt precipitation reaction submodel to your Fluid. This reaction
submodel defines the solubility equilibrium between the aqueous ions and the salt precipitate.
See Specifying Components as Solids in a Compositional Fluid for more information on non-equilibrium solids.
See Creating Reaction Submodels for Salt Precipitation in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics
Reference Guide for more information on how to create and define your salt precipitation reaction submodel.
To add a salt precipitation reaction submodel:
1. Open the Fluid in the Fluid Editor.
2. In the Models section, in the Reaction box, type the name of the reaction submodel.

Overrides for Thermodynamic Method Data

When you change the thermodynamic data that you use in a Fluid Type, you typically make changes to a custom
data bank in the AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager and then add that custom data bank to the Fluid Type. If
you want to make small changes, this can be cumbersome and time consuming.
Instead, you can use the Method Data section in the Fluid Editor to locally override the thermodynamic data
from the default and custom data banks. These changes apply only to the Fluid Type and do not propagate back
to any of your custom data banks. If you want to apply these changes to multiple Fluid Types, we recommend
that you update your custom data banks instead of locally overriding the thermodynamic data.
The tabs in the Method Data section are available only after you add components to your Fluid Type. Currently,
you can override only the following method data:
• Binary interaction data for the following methods
• Non-Random Two-Liquid (NRTL)
• Peng-Robinson (PR)
• Peng-Robinson Modified Panagiotopoulos-Reid (PRM)
• Soave-Redlich-Kwong (SRK)
• Soave-Redlich-Kwong Modified Panagiotopoulos-Reid (SRKM)
• Universal Quasi-Chemical (UNIQUAC)
• Wilson
• Henry's coefficient data

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 150
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Overriding the Binary Interaction Data for an NRTL-Based Fluid Type

The NRTL tab in the Method Data section contains a component grid for every possible binary pair in the Fluid
Type. Each binary pair has a cell that indicates the status of the binary interaction data:
• If the cell is blank, there is currently no data for the binary pair.
• If the cell has a green badge, the binary interaction data is available and comes from the default or custom
data banks.
• If the cell has a function icon , the binary interaction data comes from the default or custom data banks,
but the value is calculated from a correlation.
• If the cell has a blue badge, the binary interaction data is available and comes from the user-specified (that
is, locally overridden) data values on the NRTL tab.
To override the thermodynamic data for an NRTL-based Fluid Type:
1. In the Fluid Editor, expand the Method Data section, and then click the NRTL tab.
2. In the component grid, select the cells for the binary pairs whose binary interaction data you want to
change.
The binary interaction data for those binary pairs appears in the table on the NRTL tab.
3. In the table, change the binary interaction parameters as desired.
Refer to the equations preceding the table if you have questions on how the software uses each binary
interaction parameter in the method calculations.
A blue badge appears in the component grid for each binary pair whose data you modify.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 151
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Overriding the Binary Interaction Data for a Wilson-Based Fluid Type

The Wilson tab in the Method Data section contains a component grid for every possible binary pair in the Fluid
Type. Each binary pair has a cell that indicates the status of the binary interaction data:
• If the cell is blank, there is currently no data for the binary pair.
• If the cell has a green badge, the binary interaction data is available and comes from the default or custom
data banks.
• If the cell has a function icon , the binary interaction data comes from the default or custom data banks,
but the value is calculated from a correlation.
• If the cell has a blue badge, the binary interaction data is available and comes from the user-specified (that
is, locally overridden) data values on the Wilson tab.
To override the thermodynamic data for a Wilson-based Fluid Type:
1. In the Fluid Editor, expand the Method Data section, and then select the Wilson tab.
2. In the component grid, select the cells for the binary pairs whose binary interaction data you want to
change.
The binary interaction data for those binary pairs appears in the table on the Wilson tab.
3. In the table, change the binary interaction parameters as desired.
Refer to the equations preceding the table if you have questions on how the software uses each binary
interaction parameter in the method calculations.
A blue badge appears in the component grid for each binary pair whose data you modify.
Important: The software always uses the 12-parameter Wilson equations for the Wilson method
calculations. If the binary pair uses data from a WILSON data bank configured with the two-parameter
Wilson format in TDM, you must change the sign of the aij and aji parameters. See Wilson Equation in the
AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference Guide and the AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager
User Guide for more information on the differences between the 12-parameter Wilson equations and the
two-parameter Wilson equations.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 152
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Overriding the Binary Interaction Data for a UNIQUAC-Based Fluid Type

The UNIQUAC tab in the Method Data section contains a component grid for every possible binary pair in the
Fluid Type. Each binary pair has a cell that indicates the status of the binary interaction data:
• If the cell is blank, there is currently no data for the binary pair.
• If the cell has a green badge, the binary interaction data is available and comes from the default or custom
data banks.
• If the cell has a function icon , the binary interaction data comes from the default or custom data banks,
but the value is calculated from a correlation.
• If the cell has a blue badge, the binary interaction data is available and comes from the user-specified (that
is, locally overridden) data values on the UNIQUAC tab.
To override the thermodynamic data for a UNIQUAC-based Fluid Type:
1. In the Fluid Editor, expand the Method Data section, and then click the UNIQUAC tab.
2. In the component grid, select the cells for the binary pairs whose binary interaction data you want to
change.
The binary interaction data for those binary pairs appears in the table on the UNIQUAC tab.
3. In the table, change the binary interaction parameters as desired.
Refer to the equations preceding the table if you have questions on how the software uses each binary
interaction parameter in the method calculations.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 153
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

A blue badge appears in the component grid for each binary pair whose data you modify.

Overriding the Binary Interaction Parameters for a Fluid Type that Uses
the SRK or PR Equation of State
The Soave-Redlich-Kwong (SRK) and Peng-Robinson (PR) equations of state (EOSs) use the same formulation for
the binary interaction parameters. Therefore, the procedures for overriding the binary interaction parameters for
these EOSs are the same.
A Fluid Type can use these EOSs as:
• The main thermodynamic system method
• The vapor equilibrium method in combination with a liquid activity coefficient (LACT) system method
You can override the binary interaction parameters regardless of how the Fluid Type uses the EOS.
The SRK and PR tabs in the Method Data section contain a component grid for every possible binary pair in the
Fluid Type. Each binary pair has a cell that indicates the status of the binary interaction data:
• If the cell is blank, there is currently no data for the binary pair.
• If the cell has a green badge, the binary interaction data is available and comes from the default or custom
data banks.
• If the cell has a function icon , the binary interaction data comes from the default or custom data banks,
but the value is calculated from a correlation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 154
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

• If the cell has a blue badge, the binary interaction data is available and comes from the user-specified (that
is, locally overridden) data values on the SRK or PR tab.
To override the thermodynamic data for a Fluid Type that uses the SRK or PR EOS:
1. In the Fluid Editor, expand the Method Data section, and then select the SRK or PR tab depending on which
EOS the Fluid Type uses.
2. In the component grid, select the cells for the binary pairs whose binary interaction data you want to
change.
The binary interaction data for those binary pairs appears in the table on the SRK or PR tab.
3. In the table, change the binary interaction parameters as desired.
Refer to the equations preceding the table if you have questions on how the software uses each binary
interaction parameter in the method calculations.
A blue badge appears in the component grid for each binary pair whose data you modify.

Overriding the Binary Interaction Parameters for a Fluid Type that Uses
the SRKM or PRM Equation of State
The Soave-Redlich-Kwong Modified Panagiotopoulos-Reid (SRKM) and Peng-Robinson Modified
Panagiotopoulos-Reid (PRM) equations of state (EOSs) use the same formulation for the binary interaction
parameters. Therefore, the procedures for overriding the binary interaction parameters for these EOSs are the
same.
A Fluid Type can use these EOSs as:
• The main thermodynamic system method
• The vapor equilibrium method in combination with a liquid activity coefficient (LACT) system method
You can override the binary interaction parameters regardless of how the Fluid Type uses the EOS.
The SRKM and PRM tabs in the Method Data section contain a component grid for every possible binary pair in
the Fluid Type. Each binary pair has a cell that indicates the status of the binary interaction data:

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 155
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

• If the cell is blank, there is currently no data for the binary pair.
• If the cell has a green badge, the binary interaction data is available and comes from the default or custom
data banks.
• If the cell has a function icon , the binary interaction data comes from the default or custom data banks,
but the value is calculated from a correlation.
• If the cell has a blue badge, the binary interaction data is available and comes from the user-specified (that
is, locally overridden) data values on the SRKM or PRM tab.
To override the thermodynamic data for a Fluid Type that uses the SRKM or PRM EOS:
1. In the Fluid Editor, expand the Method Data section, and then select the SRKM or PRM tab depending on
which EOS the Fluid Type uses.
2. In the component grid, select the cells for the binary pairs whose binary interaction data you want to
change.
The binary interaction data for those binary pairs appears in the table on the SRKM or PRM tab.
3. In the table, change the binary interaction parameters as desired.
Refer to the equations preceding the table if you have questions on how the software uses each binary
interaction parameter in the method calculations.
A blue badge appears in the component grid for each binary pair whose data you modify.

Overriding Henry's Coefficient Data

The Henry tab in the Method Data section contains a component grid for every possible solute-solvent pair in
the Fluid Type. Each solute-solvent pair has a cell that indicates the status of the Henry's coefficient data:
• If the cell is blank, there is currently no data for the solute-solvent pair.
• If the cell has a green badge, the Henry's coefficient data is available and comes from the default or custom
data banks.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 156
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

• If the cell has a function icon , the Henry's coefficient data comes from the default or custom data banks,
but the value is calculated from a correlation.
• If the cell has a blue badge, the Henry's coefficient data is available and comes from the user-specified (that
is, locally overridden) data values on the Henry tab.
You can access the Henry tab only if the Fluid Type uses Henry's Law in its calculations (that is, in the Methods
section, the Use Henry's Law check box is selected).
To override the Henry's coefficient data:
1. In the Fluid Editor, expand the Method Data section, and then click the Henry tab.
2. In the component grid, select the cells for the solute-solvent pairs whose Henry's coefficient data you want
to change.
The Henry's coefficient data for those solute-solvent pairs appears in the table on the Henry tab.
3. In the table, change the Henry's coefficient parameters as desired.
Refer to the equations preceding the table if you have questions on how the software uses each parameter
in the calculations.
A blue badge appears in the component grid for each solute-solvent pair whose data you modify.

Overriding the Interaction Parameters for the eNRTL Method

The eNRTL tab in the Method Data section contains a list of types of interaction parameters that you can view
and override. Once you select an interaction parameter type, you can view and override the interaction

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 157
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

parameters of that type in a data table. The data table contains a row for each component combination and a
cell for each corresponding interaction parameter.
When you locally override the values for an interaction parameter, a blue badge appears at the start of the row
for that component combination and next to the corresponding interaction parameter type in the list. This allows
you to quickly locate the overridden interaction parameters on the eNRTL tab.
To help you more quickly define your interaction parameters, the software automatically updates some
interaction parameters when a component meets certain conditions:
• When data for the dielectric constant is present for a component, the software defines that component as a
solvent and sets the aij parameter for the ternary interaction data to 0.2 for any ternary groups that include
the component.
• The software internally marks any solid components as salts even if no unary data is available.
Currently, you cannot modify the unary interaction parameters.
To override the thermodynamic data for a Fluid Type that uses the eNRTL Method:
1. In the Fluid Editor, expand the Method Data section, and then select the eNRTL tab.
2. In the type list, select the type of interaction parameter that you want to view.
The interaction data of that type appears in the table on the eNRTL tab.
3. In the table, change the interaction parameters as desired.
A blue badge appears at the start of any row whose data you modify and next to the corresponding
interaction parameter type in the list.

Tip: To return an interaction parameter to the value from the thermodynamic library, delete the value in the
corresponding cell, and then press Enter.

Overrides for Component Property Data

When you change the pure component data that you use in a Fluid Type, you typically make changes to a custom
data bank in AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager and then add that custom data bank to the Fluid Type. If you
want to make small changes, this can be cumbersome and time consuming.
Instead, you can use the Component Data section in the Fluid Editor to locally override the pure component
thermodynamic data from the default and custom data banks. These changes apply only to the Fluid Type and do
not propagate back to any of the data banks stored in AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager. If you want to
apply these changes to multiple Fluid Types, we recommend that you update your custom data banks instead of
locally overriding the pure component thermodynamic data.
Tabs in the Component Data section are available only after you add components to your Fluid Type. Use the
Constants tab and the Temperature Dependent tab to change the data for constant properties and temperature-
dependent properties, respectively.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 158
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

While the tabs in the Component Data section also display data for petro components, you can override data for
pure components only.

Overriding Temperature-Dependent Property Data

The Temperature Dependent tab contains a list of the temperature-dependent properties that you can change
the data for. When you select a property, the property data for each component in the Fluid Type appears in a
table next to the list. If you change the property data for any component, a blue badge appears next to the
property name and the component name to indicate that you have locally overridden the property data.
Currently, you can override only the following temperature-dependent property data:
• Vapor Pressure
• Latent Heat
• Ideal Gas Heat Capacity
• Liquid Heat Capacity
• Solid Heat Capacity
• Liquid Density
• Solid Density
• Vapor Viscosity
• Liquid Viscosity
• Vapor Thermal Conductivity
• Liquid Thermal Conductivity
• Surface Tension
• Dielectric Constant
The Correlation column shows the temperature-dependent correlation that the software uses to calculate the
property value. Currently, you cannot change this value. See Equation Forms for Temperature-dependent
Properties in SimCentral TDM in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference Guide for more details
on the correlations.
To provide more intuitive thermodynamic specifications, AVEVA Process Simulation shows correlations and
coefficients for specific heat capacity instead of enthalpy. However, AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager (TDM)
shows only the correlations and coefficients for enthalpy, and the specific heat capacity does not appear on the
TempDep tab. If you want to view or change the correlation coefficients for the specific heat capacity, you must
use the Temperature Dependent tab in the Component Data section of the Fluid Editor. You should use the
derivative forms of the correlations to specify the coefficients for specific heat capacity. See Relationship
Between Specific Heat Capacity and Enthalpy for more information.
To override the temperature-dependent property data for pure components:
1. In the Fluid Editor, expand the Component Data section, and then select the Temperature Dependent tab.
2. In the temperature-dependent property list, select the property whose data you want to change.
The property data for each component appears in the table on the Temperature Dependent tab.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 159
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

3. In the table, change the parameters as desired. Refer to Equation Forms for Temperature-dependent
Properties in SimCentral TDM in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference Guide if you have
questions on how the software uses each parameter in the property calculations.
A blue badge appears in the property list and in the data table for each property and component whose data
you modify.
Tip: You can return to the data bank value for any parameter by deleting the cell contents and then pressing
Enter.

4. (Optional) Select the Plot checkbox for the modified components to view the thermophysical plot for those
components and verify that your changes produce the correct temperature-dependent behavior. See
Viewing Thermophysical Plots for the Temperature-Dependent Properties of Pure Components for more
information.

Relationship Between Specific Heat Capacity and Enthalpy

By definition, the specific heat capacity is the derivative of the enthalpy with respect to temperature at constant
pressure. Therefore, we can use any correlation that we use to calculate enthalpy to calculate the specific heat
capacity. That is, we take the derivative of the enthalpy correlation to give us the correlation for specific heat
capacity.
To provide more intuitive thermodynamic specifications, AVEVA Process Simulation shows correlations and
coefficients for specific heat capacity instead of enthalpy. Internally, AVEVA Process Simulation still uses the
integrated (enthalpy) form of the equation and sets the constant of integration to zero, while AVEVA
Thermodynamic Data Manager (TDM) always uses the integrated form for calculations. Therefore, in TDM, you
see the coefficients for the integrated form (Ci). However, in AVEVA Process Simulation, you see and specify the
coefficients for the derivative form (Di).
Setting the constant of integration for the enthalpy form (typically C1) to zero allows us to cancel out that term
when calculating enthalpy, so that we can accurately map the integrated and derivative coefficients to get
matching calculation results in both AVEVA Process Simulation and TDM.
Depending on the correlation, there may not be a one-to-one mapping between the integrated and derivative
coefficients (Di = Ci+1 or Di = Ci). If you often view and update thermodynamic data in TDM or are trying to
transform existing enthalpy data into specific heat capacity data, you should review the coefficient mapping for
the correlation to determine how your changes to an enthalpy correlation coefficient affect the corresponding
coefficient for the specific heat capacity in AVEVA Process Simulation. See Equation Forms for Temperature-
dependent Properties in SimCentral TDM in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics Reference Guide for
more details on the correlations.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 160
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Overriding Constant Property Data

The Constants tab contains a list of property categories, which you can use to quickly locate the constant
properties that you want to change the data for. When you select a property category, the property data for each
component in the Fluid Type appears in a table next to the list. If you change the property data for any
component, a blue badge appears next to the property category and the component name to indicate that you
have locally overridden the property data.
To override the constant property data for pure components:
1. In the Fluid Editor, expand the Component Data section, and then select the Constants tab.
2. In the property category list, select the category that contains the property data that you want to change.
The property data for each component appears in the table on the Constants tab.
See Available Constant Properties for a full list of the properties that are available in each category.
3. In the table, change the property data as desired.
A blue badge appears in the property category list and in the data table for each property category and
component whose data you modify.
Tip: You can return to the data bank value for any property by deleting the cell contents and then pressing
Enter.

Available Constant Properties

Currently, you can view and override the following constant property data for pure components:

Property Description

Summary Properties (Read only)

Full Name Full name of the pure component
Bank Thermodynamic data bank
CAS No Chemical Abstracts Service (CAS) registry number
SimSci ID Unique internal ID assigned by AVEVA

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 161
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Property Description

Formula Chemical formula

Basic Properties
MW Molecular weight
NBP Normal boiling point
NMP Normal melting point
SG60F Specific gravity at 60°F

MVOL25C Liquid molecular volume at 25°C

Critical Properties
TC Critical temperature
PC Critical pressure
VC Critical volume
ZC Critical compressibility factor
ACENTRIC Acentric factor
TTP Triple-point temperature
PTP Triple-point pressure
Heat Properties
GFORMATION Ideal gas Gibbs free energy of formation
HFORMATION Ideal gas heat of formation
HCOMBUST Heat of combustion
HFUSIONNMP Heat of fusion at the normal melting point
HVAPNBP Heat of vaporization at the normal boiling point
Molecular Properties
RADIUS Radius of gyration
Q The surface area parameter for the UNIQUAC and UNIFAC methods
R The volume parameter for the UNIQUAC and UNIFAC methods
Other Properties
RACKETT Rackett parameter
SOLUPARA Solubility parameter

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 162
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Property Description

DIPOLE Dipole moment

FLASHPOINT Flash point
LOFLAMM Lower flammability limit
HIFLAMM Upper flammability limit
AUTOIGNITION Autoignition temperature
GHV Gross heating value
LHV Lower heating value
CNUM Carbon number
ZNUM Hydrogen deficiency number
PARACHOR Parachor
CHARGE Charge

Viewing Thermophysical Plots for the Temperature-Dependent

Properties of Pure Components
Thermophysical plots allow you to visualize the thermodynamic behavior of your pure component properties
based on the current configuration of the property correlations in the Fluid Editor.
Any changes that you make to the component's correlation data are immediately visible in the thermophysical
plot. This allows you to fine-tune your correlation data to match the behavior that you expect.
The thermophysical plot displays temperature-dependent property data both on a linear scale and a logarithmic
scale.
To view the thermophysical plot for a temperature-dependent property of pure components:
1. Open the Fluid Editor for the Fluid Type that contains the pure components of interest.
2. Expand the Component Data section.
3. On the Temperature Dependent tab, in the list of properties, select the property of interest.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 163
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

4. In the Plot column, select the checkbox for any components that you want to view the thermophysical plot
for.
Tip: Select the checkbox at the top of the Plot column to display the thermophysical plot for all the
components in the Fluid Type.
A new window appears with the thermophysical plot for all the selected components.
By default, the window opens to the Normal Scale tab, which displays temperature-dependent property
data on a linear scale.

5. (Optional) Select the Log Scale tab to view temperature-dependent property data on a logarithmic scale.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 164
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

6. (Optional) Select or clear the Plot checkboxes for the different components while the window is open to add
or remove components from the thermophysical plot.

Changes to the Enthalpy Basis and Reference State for Components

For Compositional Fluids that use one of the LACT methods, in the Methods area, in the Enthalpy Route list, you
can select Custom to enable the following controls in the Component List section:
• In the Enthalpy Basis list, you can change the enthalpy calculation route for the component. You can choose
from one of the following options:
• System: AVEVA Process Simulation uses the system reference state and the system calculation route for
the enthalpy calculations.
• Ideal Gas: AVEVA Process Simulation uses a user-specified reference state and the ideal gas calculation
route for the enthalpy calculations.
• Sat. Liquid: AVEVA Process Simulation uses a user-specified reference state and the saturated liquid
calculation route for the enthalpy calculations.
See Enthalpy Calculations for Liquid Activity Methods in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamics
Reference Guide for more information on the differences in the enthalpy calculation routes.
• In the Ref T box, you can enter the reference temperature that you want to use for the enthalpy calculations.
• In the Ref H box, you can enter the reference enthalpy that you want to use for the component. This value
should be the change between the system reference enthalpy and the enthalpy at the specified enthalpy
basis and reference temperature. The system reference enthalpy is the ideal gas formation at 25°C.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 165
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

Therefore, if you select Sat. Liquid for the Enthalpy Basis or set the Ref T value to any value other than
298.15 K (25°C), you must update the Ref H value to account for the change in the reference enthalpy.
You can use the following equation to calculate the Ref H value when you select Sat. Liquid for the Enthalpy
Basis:

where
Tref is the Ref T value.
For example, if you select Sat. Liquid for the Enthalpy Basis and set the Ref T value to 298.15 K (25°C), you
should set the Ref H value to the difference between the ideal gas heat of formation at 25°C and the latent
heat of vaporization at 25°C.

If you select Sat. Liquid for the Enthalpy Basis and set the Ref T value to 273.15 K (0°C), you should set the
Ref H value to the difference between the ideal gas heat of formation at 25°C and the latent heat of
vaporization at 25°C minus the enthalpy change between the enthalpy of the liquid at 0°C and the enthalpy
of the liquid at 25°C.

You can use the following equation to calculate the Ref H value when you select Ideal Gas for the Enthalpy
Basis:

where
DdepHV is the departure function that computes the difference between the enthalpy of the real gas and the
enthalpy in the ideal gas state. See Departure Function in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamic
Reference Guide for more information
For example, if you select Ideal Gas for the Enthalpy Basis and set the Ref T value to 273.15 K (0°C), you
should set the Ref H value to difference between the the ideal gas heat of formation at 25°C and the
enthalpy change between the vapor at 0°C and the vapor at 25°C.

If you select Ideal Gas for the Enthalpy Basis and set the Ref T value to 298.15 K (25°C), there is no change
from the system reference enthalpy and you should set the Ref H value to the ideal gas heat of formation at
25°C.

• In the Phase Ch T box, you can enter the temperature at which the phases transition during the enthalpy
calculations. In this case, AVEVA Process Simulation modifies its enthalpy calculations so that it uses only the
latent heat of vaporization at the phase-change temperature when it needs to calculate the enthalpy of a

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 166
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

phase transition. Typically, you specify a phase-change temperature if you have low confidence in your
correlation for the latent heat of vaporization, but a high confidence in the value of that correlation at the
phase-change temperature.
If you leave this value blank or set it to zero, the software uses the system temperature as the phase-change
temperature.
See Enthalpy Calculations for LACT Methods in the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamic Reference
Guide for more information on how the calculations change when you specify a phase-change temperature.
You can obtain the values for the heat of formation, latent heat of vaporization, and departure function from
AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager if you do not have data readily available for these values.

Data Banks for a Fluid

In many places throughout the Fluid Editor for Compositional Fluids, you can specify custom thermodynamic
data that you want to use to supplement the AVEVA Process Simulation data banks for the thermodynamic
calculations. This custom thermodynamic data exists in data banks in custom libraries that you have created from
AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager.
Except for the pure component data bank selection, you will see an Expand button to the right of a list of the
data banks that the Fluid currently uses for the related thermodynamic data. The order of the data banks in this
list is also the order in which AVEVA Process Simulation searches the data banks for data. When AVEVA Process
Simulation finds the requested data in a data bank, it stops searching and does not consider any data in
subsequent data banks. We recommend that you add data banks with the latest or most relevant data to the top
of the list.

When you click the Expand button, the Expand button changes to the Collapse button and a set of commands
and a list of available data banks appears. You can use the two lists and commands to add data banks to the
Fluid, remove data banks from the Fluid, and change the search order of the data banks.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 167
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

For the pure component data banks, AVEVA Process Simulation loads data for each pure component from the
data bank that you specified when you added the component to the Fluid. The Bank column in the Component
List section of the Fluid Editor shows the data bank that AVEVA Process Simulation uses for each component. You
can also supply a custom data bank that contains data that will override those values. To do this, first create a
custom data bank that contains the components of interest and enter data for only the property values that you
want to override for these components. Then, in the Methods area, in the Pure Component Property Override
Data Bank box, enter the name of that data bank in a <library>:<bank> format, where <library> is the name
of the library file and <bank> is the name of the data bank within that library file. The library file must be located
in the %userprofile%\My Thermo Data folder.
Please see the AVEVA Process Simulation Thermodynamic Reference Guide for more information regarding the
creation and management of these custom libraries and data banks.

Component Picker
The Component Picker is a set of expandable configuration sections within the Fluid Editor that you can use to
browse the components in the standard AVEVA Process Simulation component library. You can also access
components in data banks in custom thermodynamic libraries that you have created and registered in AVEVA
Thermodynamic Data Manager. You can then add those components to your fluid. You can use the Component
Picker only when the Thermo Type for your fluid is Compositional or IsomericHydrogen.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 168
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

When you are in the Simulation Building role, you cannot add components to fluids in the repository model
libraries; you can still add components to fluids in the simulation-specific model library.
Concepts
• The Component Picker is comprised of the Component List and Component Browser sections in the Fluid
Editor
• The Component Picker is available only for Compositional and IsomericHydrogen fluids
Actions
• View all the components that are available in the AVEVA Process Simulation component library
• Filter components by data bank, name, chemical formula, or property
• Add components from the component list
• Add components by using their library name
• Add components from either the standard component library or the data banks in custom thermodynamic
libraries

Filtering Components in the Component Browser

You can access the Component Browser section only for Compostional and IsomericHydrogen fluids. This
section lists all the components in the AVEVA Process Simulation component library. The list is long and
comprehensive. You can sort the list by any of the column headers in this section, but you may still find it
cumbersome to search for specific components. You may find it easier to filter the components based on the
criteria that you are interested in. You can filter the components based on their:
• Data bank
• Full component name
• Library name (an eight-character alias for the component name)
• Chemical formula
• CAS number
• Normal boiling point (in Kelvin)
• Molecular weight (in g/mol)
You can filter components on more than one of the preceding criteria.
To filter components:
1. If you want to filter components by their data bank, in the Bank list, select the data bank that you want to
view.
2. The default data bank is System:SIMSCI, which is the standard pure component data bank in the default
thermodynamic library that comes along with the AVEVA Process Simulation install. You can select All to
view both the standard data bank and all your custom data banks.
3. If you want to filter components by their full component name, in the Full Component Name column, in the
text box, type a text string. AVEVA Process Simulation shows only the components that contain this text

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 169
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

string. If desired, select the Leading checkbox and AVEVA Process Simulation shows only the components
with names that start with the text string.
4. If you want to filter components by their library name, in the Library Name column, in the text box, type a
text string. AVEVA Process Simulation shows only the components that contain this text string. If desired,
select the Leading checkbox and AVEVA Process Simulation shows only the components with names that
start with the text string.
Note: A single component may have multiple library names. However, if you search for this component
under any criteria other than the library name, you will see only one of the library names. For example,
difluoromethane has three library names, R32, HFC32, and FREON32. If you search for difluoromethane by
using the text box under the Full Component Name column, you will see only the component listing with a
library name of R32. The actual library component is the same for all the library names. The library name
affects only the text that appears under the Name column when you add the component to the Component
List section and you can change that text at any time.
5. If you want to filter components by their chemical formula, in the Formula column, in the text box, type a
text string. AVEVA Process Simulation shows only the components that contain this text string. If desired,
select the Leading checkbox and AVEVA Process Simulation shows only the components with formulas that
start with the text string.
6. If you want to filter components by their CAS number, in the CAS Number column, in the text box, type a
text string. AVEVA Process Simulation shows only the components with CAS numbers that contain this text
string. If desired, select the Leading checkbox and AVEVA Process Simulation shows only the components
with CAS numbers that start with the text string.
Note: CAS Registry Numbers® are the intellectual property of the American Chemical Society, and are used
by AVEVA Process Simulation with the express permission of CAS.
7. If you want to filter components by their normal boiling point, in the NBP - K column, in the first text box,
type the starting point of the normal boiling point range that you want to search under. In the second text
box, type the end point of the normal boiling point range.
Note that you can include only the starting point or only the end point to filter out all components with a
normal boiling point that is greater or lesser than the temperature in the text box, respectively.
8. If you want to filter components by their molecular weight, in the MW column, in the first text box, type the
starting point of the molecular weight range that you want to search under. In the second text box, type the
end point of the molecular weight range.
Note that you can include only the starting point or only the end point to filter out all components with a
molecular weight that is greater or lesser than the value in the text box, respectively.

Copying a Fluid Type to the Simulation-Specific Model Library

The Fluids Library contains a number of default Fluid Types that you can use in your simulations. If you want to
customize one of these Fluid Types for a specific simulation, we recommend that you copy the Fluid Type to the
simulation-specific Model Library and then customize it. The Fluid Type is then included with the simulation
when you export the simulation. If you then share the simulation with other users, the simulation that they
import includes the customized Fluid Type and avoids possible fluid errors and data discrepancies.
Simulation Builders cannot change Fluid Types in any of the default Model Libraries, so they must copy Fluid
Types to the simulation-specific Model Library to customize them.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 170
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 11 – Fluid Editor

To copy a Fluid Type to the simulation-specific Model Library:

1. Browse to the Model Library that contains the Fluid Type you want to copy.
2. Right-click the Fluid Type and then select Copy.
3. Browse to the simulation-specific Model Library.
4. Right-click a blank space on the simulation-specific Model Library, and then select Paste.
The Fluid Type appears in the simulation-specific Model Library.

Associating a New Icon with a Fluid Type

You can associate an icon with a Model Type, Fluid Type or Port Type. The icon is used only in the Model Library.
The icon that you want to associate must be in the form of an Extensible Application Markup (XAML) file. Many
software applications on the market let you create XAML icon files or convert traditional icons to XAML.
To associate an icon:
1. From the editor you are in, expand the Icon section.

2. Click Select Icon.

3. Select an XAML file.
The icon will be visible in the Icon section.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 171
Chapter 12

Curve Editor

About the Curve Editor

The Curve Editor allows you to create performance curves that you can then use in your model instances. A
Curve is tabular data with defined interpolations between the data points. You add independent and dependent
variables to a Curve to provide the x-axis and y-axis information required for the performance curve. The
independent variable appears on the x-axis, for example, flow. The dependent variables appear on the y-axis, for
example, head or efficiency. Typically, you use Curves to define performance curves for pumps and compressors.

You may have multiple performance curves for a single dependent variable where each performance curve
applies only to certain conditions, such as a defined compressor speed. In this case, you can use the Curve Editor
to add Curve Sets to your Curve instead of creating multiple Curves for each condition. Curve Sets use specified
parametric variables to define the conditions for their associated performance curves. Currently, due to
limitations on the interpolation between the Curve Sets, we recommend that you use Curve Sets only to define
performance curves for Compressors.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 172
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 12 – Curve Editor

Concepts
• The independent variable appears on the x-axis
• Dependent variables appear on the y-axis
• Curve Sets allow you to define multiple performance curves for each dependent variable
• Parametric variables define the conditions for each Curve Set
Actions
• Add independent variables to a Curve
• Add dependent variables to a Curve
• Add parametric variables to a Curve
• Add Curve Sets to a Curve
• Add a background image to help accurately replicate a performance curve

Opening the Curve Editor

To open the Curve Editor:
1. Browse to the Model Library.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Double-click a Curve.
▪ Right-click a Curve, and then select Edit.
The Curve Editor appears.

Defining Variables and Plotting Curve Points

You can define variables in the Curve Editor to provide x-axis and y-axis information required for a performance
curve. A Curve is tabular data with interpolations between the x and y points that you define.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 173
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 12 – Curve Editor

To define variables:
1. Open an existing Curve or create a new one.
2. Expand the Variables section.
3. Change the name of the default independent variable (Var1), and select its Type. By default, AVEVA Process
Simulation automatically adds the independent variable when you create a new Curve.
The Units column displays the internal UOM for the Type that you define. AVEVA Process Simulation
converts all values of the specified Type to this UOM when it performs calculations. You cannot change this
UOM.
4. Enter a Description for the independent variable.
5. Change the name of the default dependent variable (Var2), and select its Type. By default, AVEVA Process
Simulation automatically adds this dependent variable when you create a new Curve.

6. To add another dependent variable, click Add Dependent Variable . Change the name of the new
dependent variable, and select its Type.
The Units column displays the internal UOM for the Type that you define. AVEVA Process Simulation
converts all values of the specified Type to this UOM when it performs calculations. You cannot change this
UOM.
7. Select the Interpolation type for each dependent variable.
8. Enter a Description for each dependent variable.
To plot curve points:
1. Open an existing Curve or create a new one.
2. Expand the Curves section.
3. In the Curve list, select the dependent variable for which you want to enter curve data.
4. In the data table, in the UOM list for each variable, select the UOM for the data point that you want to enter.
The UOM list contains UOMs that are specific to the Type that you defined for the variable. A UOM list does
not appear for dimensionless variables.

5. To add more data points to the curve, click Add Curve Point .
6. Enter curve data for the independent and dependent variables.
The curve data appears on the curve chart.

Scaling Curve Data

As most compressors have similar characteristics, you can enter a "generic" curve in the Curve Editor so that you
can scale it to actual process conditions in a specific simulation.
To scale curve data:
1. Open the Curve Editor for the Curve.
2. Enter or import a non-scaled curve.
3. Expand the General section, and select the Scaled Curve data check box.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 174
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 12 – Curve Editor

The tabular curve data in the Curves section is defined as scaled curve data.
4. Expand the Variables section and change the Type of your variables to one of the dimensionless UOM types.
5. Expand the Curves section and update the point data for your curves as necessary to reflect dimensionless
data.
To perform scaling in the model in which you want to use a scaled curve, you can specify a condition with
expression CurveType.IsScale or CurveType.Scaled = true. You can use these conditions to turn on
additional variables and equations to perform the scaling, such as CurveState.x = Flow/FlowRef. The Pump
model in the CWLib library contains conditions and equations that demonstrate how to use a scaled curve in a
model.

Managing Points on the Curve Chart

You can move existing points already plotted on the curve chart, add new points directly to the curve chart, and
remove points directly from the curve chart if you have already defined dependent and independent variables in
the Curve Editor.
To manage a curve point already plotted on the curve chart:
1. Open the Curve Editor for the Curve.
2. Click an existing point and drag it to the location that you desire on the curve chart.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 175
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 12 – Curve Editor

3. Browse to the Curves section, and notice that the curve variable data was automatically updated based on
the new location of the point.

To add a curve point directly from the curve chart:

1. Open the Curve Editor for the Curve Type.
2. Expand the Curves section.
3. Locate where you want to add a new curve point, press Ctrl, and then click the curve chart.
4. In the data table, notice that AVEVA Process Simulation automatically adds the curve variable data for the
new point.
To remove a curve point directly from the curve chart:
1. Open the Curve Editor for the Curve Type.
2. Expand the Curves section.
3. On the curve chart, locate the curve point that you want to remove, press Ctrl, and then click it.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 176
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 12 – Curve Editor

4. In the data table, notice that AVEVA Process Simulation removed the curve variable data for that point.

Adding a Background Image to Help Accurately Replicate a Curve

You can add a curve chart background image to help you accurately replicate a predefined curve; for example,
you could use the image included in the procedure below to replicate the points required for a typical cooling
water pump.
To add a background image to the curve chart:
1. Open the Curve Editor for the Curve Type.
2. Expand the Curves section.
3. Select Define Image in the curve chart pane.

4. Click Import image to fill the chart background .

5. Select an image and click OK. The image appears in the curve chart.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 177
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 12 – Curve Editor

6. Expand and move the blue box to encompass the area of the image that you want to appear as the
background for the curve chart.
We recommend that you move the edges of the box so that they fall on grid lines in the image. This allows
you to quickly define the minimum and maximum values for the axes.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 178
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 12 – Curve Editor

7. In the boxes to the right of the curve chart and below the curve chart, type the minimum and maximum
values of the y-axis and x-axis, respectively. Unless you plan to enter scaled data for the curve, these values
should be the same as the values from the background image.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 179
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 12 – Curve Editor

8. Select Define Curve.

The selected image now appears as the curve chart background. You can add curve data points on top of the
background.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 180
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 12 – Curve Editor

Defining the Maximum and Minimum Curve Chart Axis Values

When you use add a background image to your curve chart, you can define the maximum and minimum curve
chart x-axis and y-axis values.
To define the x-axis and y-axis values:
1. Open the Curve Editor for the Curve Type.
2. Select Define Image in the curve chart pane.
3. The left and bottom sides of the curve chart will have a maximum or minimum value field for the axes.
Define the maximum and minimum values for each axis. After you define the values, press Enter to apply
your changes directly to the chart.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 181
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 12 – Curve Editor

When you select Define Curve, the new maximum and minimum values that you set will appear on the
chart.

Adding Parametric Variables to a Curve

Parametric variables allow you to define the conditions for each Curve Set in the Curve. You can add as many
parametric variables as you need.
Currently, only Compressors support multiple performance curves for a single dependent variable. We
recommend that you add parametric variables only to Curves that you plan to use in a Compressor.
To add a parametric variable to a Curve:
1. Open the Curve Editor for the Curve.
2. Expand the Curve Sets section.

3. In the Parametric Variables area, click Add Parametric Variable .

A new parametric variable appears in the table.
4. Change the name of the new parametric variable, and select its Type.
Currently, we support only the Speed and IGV parametric variables. If you want to add IGV, you must first
add Speed.
The Units column displays the internal unit of measure (UOM) for the specified Type. AVEVA Process
Simulation converts all values of the specified Type to this UOM when it performs calculations. You cannot
change this UOM.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 182
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 12 – Curve Editor

Defining Curve Sets for a Curve

Curve Sets allow you to define multiple performance curves for each dependent variable in a Curve. You must
add at least one parametric variable to your Curve before you can add a Curve Set. See Adding Parametric
Variables to a Curve for more information.
Currently, only Compressors support multiple performance curves for the dependent variables. We recommend
that you add Curve Sets only to Curves that you plan to use in a Compressor.
To define the Curve Sets for a Curve:
1. Open the Curve Editor for the Curve.
2. Expand the Curve Sets section.

3. In the CurveSet Table area, click Add CurveSet .

A new Curve Set appears in the table. AVEVA Process Simulation automatically adds any existing curve data
to the first Curve Set that you add to the Curve.
4. In the table, enter the parametric variable values that apply to the performance curves for this Curve Set.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.
6. In the Curves section, in the CurveSet list, select the Curve Set that you want to define curve data for.
7. In the Curves list, select the dependent variable that you want to enter data for.
8. Add the data points for the performance curve. See Defining Variables and Plotting Curve Points and
Managing Points on the Curve Chart for more information.
If you want to use a background image when you add your data points for the various performance curves,
you currently must import the image for each Curve Set and dependent variable pair. See Adding a
Background Image to Help Accurately Replicate a Curve for more information.
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 until you have added all the desired performance curves for your various Curve
Sets.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 183
Chapter 13

Mini Inspector

About the Mini Inspector

When you hover over a model on the Canvas, the Mini Inspector displays parameters and variables that you have
marked as "favorites" in the Model Editor. You can also open the Mini Inspector by double-clicking a model on
the Canvas or by right-clicking the model and then selecting Mini Properties. From the Mini Inspector, you can
change the values of the model's parameters and the specification status, value, and unit of measure (UOM) of
the model's variables. The changes take effect immediately.

Concepts
• You can display the Mini Inspector by hovering over a model on the Canvas, double-clicking the model, or
right-clicking the model and then selecting Mini Properties
• You can choose to hide or display the Mini Inspector
• Changes that you make are automatically saved
Actions
• Hover over a model on the Canvas to display the Mini Inspector

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 184
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 13 – Mini Inspector

• Double-click a model on the Canvas to display the Mini Inspector

• Right-click a model on the Canvas and then select Mini Properties to display the Mini Inspector
• Change the specification status, value, and UOM of variables
• Change the value of parameters

Working with the Mini Inspector

You can display the Mini Inspector by hovering over a model on the Canvas.

The Mini Inspector displays the favorite parameters and variables for a model. From the Mini Inspector, you can
change the value of the model parameters and the specification status, value, and unit of measure (UOM) of the
model variables. You can also drag a variable or parameter onto the Canvas to add a variable reference or
parameter reference for that variable or parameter, respectively. You can drag a variable onto a Trend on the
Canvas to add it to that Trend.
You can hide the Mini Inspector from the Edit/View tab. This prevents the Mini Inspector from appearing when
you hover over a model on the Canvas. However, you can still double-click a model to open its Mini Inspector in a
window that does not disappear when you navigate away from the model on the Canvas.

Copying and Pasting between Excel and the Mini Inspector

You can copy an array of cell values from Microsoft Excel and paste them into the Mini Inspector. The cell values
must be aligned vertically in Excel to copy all the values into the Mini Inspector. You can copy only numerical
values from Excel into the values of variables or Real parameters in the Mini Inspector.
You can copy values from the Mini Inspector by using commands on the right-click menu and paste them into
Excel. You can copy and paste the follow types of information for your selected variables and parameters:
• Only the values of the variables and parameters
• All the information that you see on the Mini Inspector, including the specification status, name, value, and
UOM of the variables and parameters
To copy and paste values from Excel into the Mini Inspector:
1. In Excel, select a set of vertically aligned cells of numerical values.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 185
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 13 – Mini Inspector

These values should appear in the same column in Excel. Your selection does not need to be sequential.
AVEVA Process Simulation will include the same number of rows between the values as there are in Excel
when it pastes the values into the Mini Inspector. A collapsed array of variables in the Mini Inspector counts
as a single row. If you want to paste a value into one of the variables in the array, you must expand it in the
Mini Inspector.
2. Copy the selection by doing one of the following:
▪ Press Ctrl+C.
▪ Right-click the selection, and then click Copy.
3. In AVEVA Process Simulation, open the Mini Inspector that contains the values that you want to change.
4. Select the variable or Real parameter that corresponds to the first cell in the selection that you copied from
Excel.
5. Paste the values from Excel into the Mini Inspector by doing one of the following:
▪ Press Ctrl+V.
▪ Right-click the selected variable or Real parameter, and then click Paste Values.
AVEVA Process Simulation overwrites the values for the variables and Real parameters with the values that
you copied from Excel.
To copy and paste values from the Mini Inspector into Excel:
1. On the Mini Inspector, select the rows that you want to copy.
To select consecutive rows, do one of the following:

▪ Drag the selection box for the first row in your desired selection onto the last row in your desired
selection.

▪ Press and hold Shift, click the selection box for the first row in your desired selection, and then click
the selection box for the last row in your desired selection.

To select nonconsecutive rows, press and hold Ctrl, and then click the selection box for all the rows in your
desired selection.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Right-click the selection, and then click Copy Values.
▪ Press Ctrl+C.
3. In Excel, select the first cell that you want to paste the values into.
4. Do one of the following:

▪ Right-click the selected cell, and then click Keep Text Only under Paste Options.
▪ Press Ctrl+V.
The copied values appear in a vertical array starting at the selected cell.
To copy and paste all information from the Mini Inspector into Excel:
1. On the Mini Inspector, select the rows that you want to copy.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 186
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 13 – Mini Inspector

To select consecutive rows, do one of the following:

▪ Drag the selection box for the first row in your desired selection onto the last row in your desired
selection.

▪ Press and hold Shift, click the selection box for the first row in your desired selection, and then click
the selection box for the last row in your desired selection.

To select nonconsecutive rows, press and hold Ctrl, and then click the selection box for all the rows in your
desired selection.
2. Right-click the selection, and then click Copy All.
3. In Excel, select the first cell that you want to paste the information into.
4. Do one of the following:

▪ Right-click the selected cell, and then click Keep Text Only under Paste Options.
▪ Press Ctrl+V.
A table of the copied rows appears, which includes the specification status, name, value, and UOM for all the
selected variables and parameters. The first cell in the table displays the name of the model instance that
you copied the information from.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 187
Chapter 14

Trends

About Trends
Trends display the time history of a variable in Dynamics Mode. You can modify the look-and-feel of a Trend and
your changes are automatically saved and visible on the Trend.
Concepts
• Similar to models, when you create a new Trend, it appears both on the Canvas and in the Simulation
Manager
• A Trend can contain any variables used in the simulation
• The Trend automatically updates when you make any changes to its variables or configuration
• You can delete a Trend from the Canvas without deleting it from the Simulation Manager
• You can use the Simulation Manger to create multiple instances of the same Trend on the Canvas
Actions
• Create a new Trend by dragging one from the Tools Model Library onto the Canvas
• Add another instance of an existing Trend to the Canvas by using the Simulation Manager
• Add variables to the Trend
• Configure the Trend variables, colors, and y-axes
• Configure a Trend's appearance, such as the time span, the grid, and the x-axis format

Managing Trends
This section describes creating, renaming, copying, and deleting Trends.

Activity Directions

Creating a Trend On the Model Library, on the Tools tab, drag a

Trend onto the Canvas to automatically create a
new Trend.
After you create the Trend, it appears in the
Simulation Manager as Trend1 if it is the first Trend
to be added to the simulation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 188
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 14 – Trends

Activity Directions

Opening a Trend On the Canvas, double-click the Trend to view it.

Alternatively, in the Simulation Manager, right-click
the Trend, and then click View.
Opening the configuration area for a Trend On the Canvas or the Simulation Manager, right-
click the Trend, and then click Full Properties. The
Trend appears with an expanded configuration
area.
Alternatively, open the Trend and click the
expansion button at the lower right corner of
the Trend to expand the configuration area.
Copying and pasting a Trend In the Simulation Manager, right-click the Trend
and then click Copy. Right-click the Main flowsheet
for your simulation and then click Paste.
Alternatively, on the Canvas, right-click the Trend
and then click Copy. Right-click the Canvas and
then click Paste.This creates a new Trend on the
Canvas and in the Simulation Manager, not another
instance of the copied Trend on the Canvas.
Renaming a Trend In the Simulation Manager, click the Trend's name,
enter a new name, and press Enter.
Alternatively, on the Canvas, double-click the name
of the Trend, type a new name, and then press
Enter.
Creating another instance of an existing Trend on Drag the Trend from the Simulation Manager onto
the Canvas the Canvas.

Deleting a Trend In the Simulation Manager, right-click the Trend,

and then click Delete.
Alternatively, on the Canvas, right-click the Trend,
and then click Delete. Click Delete All to delete the
corresponding Trend and all of its instances on the
Canvas.
Deleting an instance of a Trend from the Canvas On the Canvas, right-click the Trend, and then click
Delete. Click Just This to delete only this instance
of the Trend on the Canvas. The Trend still exists in
the Simulation Manager and all the other instances
of the Trend on the Canvas remain unchanged.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 189
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 14 – Trends

Configuring Trends
You can configure a Trend so that it contains the variables that you want and displays them in a manner that fits
your requirements.
To configure a Trend:
1. After you create a Trend, right-click the Trend on the Canvas or Simulation Manager and select Full
Properties.
The Trend appears with an expanded configuration area.

2. To add a variable, click or drag a variable from the Simulation Manager, Keyword View, Mini Inspector, or
Properties Inspector onto the list of variables.

3. If you clicked , an empty variable placeholder (Select) appears under the Name column in the Variables
section. Click the variable placeholder under the Name column and type the name of the variable that you
want to add. A drop-down list appears as you type to help you quickly find and select the variable.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 190
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 14 – Trends

4. Click the Units list if you want to change the UOM in which the variable appears. The UOM selection applies
to only this Trend and does not affect other places where the variable appears.
5. Select the Axis of the variable, either left (L) or right (R).
6. Choose the Color.
7. After you add a variable, expand the Axes section to configure the left and right y-axis of the chart.

8. If you want to automatically allocate the minimum and maximum values for the left or right y-axis, select the
Auto check box for that axis.
9. If you did not select the Auto check box, enter the Min and Max values for the variables on that axis.
To configure a Trend's appearance:
1. On the Trend's configuration area, expand the Configure section.

2. Enter the Title of the Trend.

3. Enter the Time Span of the Trend, which is the interval of time for which the Trend displays data.
4. Select the Time Span unit of measure.
5. Enter the Time Grid of the Trend, which is the spacing of the grid lines. The Time Span and the Time Grid
have the same unit of measure.
6. In the X-Axis Format list, select the time format in which data appears on the chart.
7. Select the location of the Trend Legend.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 191
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 14 – Trends

8. If you prefer a background color other than the default, in the Background list, select the desired color.
9. If you want to change the color of the vertical grid lines on the Trend, in the Grid Line Color list, select the
desired color.
10. If you want to change the style of the vertical grid lines on the Trend, in the Grid Line Style list, select the
desired line style.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 192
Chapter 15

Profiles

About Profiles
A Profile displays vector data, such as a temperature profile in a distillation column as a function of stage
number. You can display multiple profile curves on the same Profile. You can modify the look and feel of a Profile
and your changes will be automatically saved and visible on the Profile.
Concepts
• Similar to models, when you create a new Profile, it appears both on the Canvas and in the Simulation
Manager
• A Profile contains and displays profile curves
• A profile curve is a combination of scalar and array variables used in the simulation
• The Profile automatically updates when you make any changes to the profile curves or the configuration
• You can delete a Profile from the Canvas without deleting it from the Simulation Manager
• You can use the Simulation Manger to create multiple instances of the same Profile on the Canvas
Actions
• Create a new Profile by dragging one from the Tools Model Library onto the Canvas
• Add another instance of an existing Profile to the Canvas by using the Simulation Manager
• Add profile curves to the Profile
• Add variables to a profile curve
• Configure the profile curves, colors, and y-axes
• Configure a Profile's appearance, such as the grid and the location of the legend

Managing Profiles
This section describes creating, renaming, copying, and deleting Profiles.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 193
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 15 – Profiles

Activity Directions

Creating a Profile On the Model Library, on the Tools tab, drag a

Profile onto the Canvas to automatically create a
new Profile.
After you create the Profile, it appears in the
Simulation Manager as Profile1 if it is the first
Profile to be added to the simulation.
Opening a Profile On the Canvas, double-click the Profile to view it.
Alternatively, in the Simulation Manager, right-click
the Profile, and then click View.
Opening the configuration area for a Profile On the Canvas or the Simulation Manager, right-
click the Profile, and then click Full Properties. The
Profile appears with an expanded configuration
area.
Alternatively, open the Profile and then click the
expansion button at the lower right corner of
the Profile to expand the configuration area.
Copying and pasting a Profile In the Simulation Manager, right-click the Profile
and then click Copy. Right-click the Main flowsheet
for your simulation and then click Paste.
Alternatively, on the Canvas, right-click the Profile
and then click Copy. Right-click the Canvas and
then click Paste.This creates a new Profile on the
Canvas and in the Simulation Manager, not another
instance of the copied Profile on the Canvas.
Renaming a Profile In the Simulation Manager, click the Profile's name,
enter a new name, and press Enter.
Alternatively, on the , double-click the name of the
Profile, type a new name, and then press Enter.

Creating another instance of an existing Profile on Drag the Profile from the Simulation Manager onto
the Canvas the Canvas.

Deleting a Profile In the Simulation Manager, right-click the Profile,

and then click Delete.
Alternatively, on the Canvas, right-click the Profile,
and then click Delete. Click Delete All to delete the
corresponding Profile and all of its instances on the
Canvas.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 194
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 15 – Profiles

Activity Directions

Deleting an instance of a Profile from the Canvas On the Canvas, right-click the Profile, and then click
Delete. Click Just This to delete only this instance
of the Profile on the Canvas. The Profile still exists
in the Simulation Manager and all the other
instances of the Profile on the Canvas remain
unchanged.

Configuring Profiles
You can configure a Profile so that it contains the variables that you want and displays them in a manner that fits
your requirements.
To configure a Profile:
1. After you create a Profile, right-click the Profile on the Canvas or Simulation Manager and select Full
Properties.
The Profile appears with an expanded configuration area.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 195
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 15 – Profiles

2. A newly created Profile always contains a profile curve named Profile 1. A name placeholder (Change me)
appears under the Label column for this profile curve. Click the name placeholder and type the name that
you want to use for this profile curve.
A profile curve consists of one or more simulation variables. The simulation variables can be scalar or array
variables. The software appends the simulation variables to the profile curve as you add them to the list of
simulation variables.

3. To add a profile curve, click on the Profiles bar.

4. If you clicked on the Profiles bar, an empty profile curve appears in the Profiles section. Click the name
placeholder and type the name that you want to use for the profile curve.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 196
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 15 – Profiles

5. To add a simulation variable to a profile curve, click on the bar for that profile curve or drag a variable
from the Simulation Manager, Keyword View, Mini Inspector, or Properties Inspector onto the list of
simulation variables.
Alternatively, you can drag a variable onto the Profile's icon on the Canvas to add it to the first profile curve
in the Profile.

6. If you clicked , an empty variable placeholder (Select) appears under the Name column in the Profiles
section. Click the variable placeholder under the Name column and type the name of the variable that you
want to add. A drop-down list appears as you type to help you quickly find and select the variable.

If you add a variable from a submodel that is part of an array of submodels, AVEVA Process Simulation
automatically adds the corresponding variable from each submodel instance to the profile curve. For
example, if you add the T variable from the Stage submodel in a Column (<column>.Stage.T, where <column>
is the name of the Column on the Canvas), AVEVA Process Simulation adds all stage temperatures to the
profile curve.
7. Click the Units list if you want to change the UOM in which the profile curve appears. The UOM selection
applies to only this profile curve and does not affect other places where its corresponding simulation
variables appear.
8. Select the Axis of the profile curve, either left (L) or right (R).
9. Choose the Color.
10. After you add a profile curve, expand the Axes section to configure the left and right y-axis of the Profile.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 197
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 15 – Profiles

11. If you want to automatically allocate the minimum and maximum values for the left or right y-axis, select the
Auto check box for that axis.
12. If you did not select the Auto check box, enter the Min and Max values for the profile curves on that axis.
13. If you want to flip the x-axis and the y-axis values for the profile curves on the left y-axis or the right y-axis,
select the Flip checkbox for that axis.
To configure a Profile's appearance:
1. On the Profile's configuration area, expand the Configure section.

2. Enter the Title of the Profile.

3. In the Grid Size box, type the number of array indexes between each grid line on the axis that displays the
array index counter. By default, the array indexes appear on the x-axis.
You may want to increase the Grid Size value when you add large vector variables to your profile curves. For
example, if you set the Grid Size to 1 and you add a vector variable from a 50-tray column to any profile
curve in the Profile, all 50 trays appear as grid lines, which may be visually unmanageable. In this case, you
can set the Grid Size to 10 so that only every tenth tray appears for a total of 5 grid lines on the Profile.
4. If you want to change the color of the vertical grid lines on the Profile, in the Grid Line Color list, select the
desired color.
5. If you want to change the style of the vertical grid lines on the Profile, in the Grid Line Style list, select the
desired line style.
6. If you prefer a background color other than the default, in the Background list, select the desired color.
7. Select the location of the Profile's Legend.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 198
Chapter 16

Tables

About Tables
Tables display model variables and parameters for streams and equipment models. They allow you to
consolidate information from across the Canvas into a single, easily managed view.
Concepts
• A Table can include data for any model instance on the Canvas.
• A single Table can include model instances of different Model Types.
• A Table can include parameter values, specified variable values, and calculated variable values.
• The model instances appear as the column headers and the variable and parameter names appear as the
row headers.
• Changes that you make to the specified variables and parameters in the Table are automatically reflected in
the simulation.
• You cannot change the values of calculated variables by using the Table.
• When you change the value of an Enumeration parameter by using the Table, you must use one of the
parameter's listed values.
• When you change the value of a Model Type, Curve Type, or Fluid Type parameter by using the Table, you
must type in the full library name of an existing Model Type, Curve Type, or Fluid Type from the Model
Library.
• Each Model Type has a preconfigured list of variables and parameters that automatically appear in the Table
when you add a model instance of that Model Type to that Table.
• You can manually configure the Table to display only the variables and parameters that you are interested in.
Actions
• Create a blank Table from the Model Library.
• Create a Table for a model instance or for all model instances of Model Type.
• Add a model instance to a Table.
• Add all model instances of a Model Type to a Table.
• Remove a model instance from a Table.
• Add a variable or parameter to a Table.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 199
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 16 – Tables

• Remove a variable or parameter from a Table.

• Reorder the columns or rows of a Table.
• Change specified variable values from the Table.
• Add a title to a Table.
• Generate a Microsoft Excel Report from the Table data.
• Copy and paste multiple table cells at once.

Managing Tables
This section describes how to create a Table, add data to an existing Table, and configure a Table.

Activity Directions

Creating a blank Table On the Model Library, on the Tools tab, drag a Table onto the Canvas.

Creating a Table for a Single Model On the Canvas, right-click the model instance that you want to use to
Instance create the Table. On the Table submenu, on the Add <ModelName>
submenu, select <Create New Table>.
Creating a Table for All Model On the Canvas, right-click one of the model instances of the model type
Instances of a Model Type that you want to use to create the Table. On the Table submenu, on the
Add all <ModelType> submenu, select <Create New Table>.
Adding a Model Instance to a Table On the Canvas, right-click the model instance that you want to add to
the Table. On the Table submenu, on the Add <ModelName>
submenu, select the desired Table.
Or
On the Table, right-click a column heading, and then select Add. A new
column appears to the right of the selected column. In the column
header of the new column, type the name of the model instance that
you want to add to the table.
Or

On the Table, select the expansion button at the lower-right corner

of the Table to expand the Configure area. Select a column header. On
the toolbar at the upper-right corner of the Table, select the addition
button to add a new column to the right of the selected column. In
the column header of the new column, type the name of the model
instance that you want to add to the table.
Adding All Model Instances of a On the Canvas, right-click one of the model instances that you want to
Model Type to a Table add to the Table. On the Table submenu, on the Add all <ModelType>
submenu, select the desired Table.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 200
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 16 – Tables

Activity Directions

Adding a Variable or Parameter to a Right-click a row heading, and then select Add. A new row appears
Table after the selected row. In the row header of the new row, type the
name of the variable or parameter that you want to add to the table.
Or

On the Table, select the expansion button at the lower-right corner

of the Table to expand the Configure area. Select a row header. On the
toolbar at the upper-right corner of the Table, select the addition
button to add a row below the selected row. In the row header for
the new row, type the name of the variable or parameter that you want
to add to the Table.
Moving Columns in the Table
On the Table, select the expansion button at the lower-right corner
of the Table to expand the Configure area. Select the column header of
the column that you want to move. On the toolbar at the upper-right
corner of the Table, select one of the following commands to move the
column:

• Move First

• Move Left

• Move Right

• Move Last
Moving Rows in the Table
On the Table, select the expansion button at the lower-right corner
of the Table to expand the Configure area. Select the row header of the
row that you want to move. On the toolbar at the upper-right corner of
the Table, select one of the following commands to move the row:

• Move First

• Move Up

• Move Down

• Move Last
Changing Specified Variables in the On the Table, double-click the cell value that you want to change. Type
Table the new value and then press Enter. The variable value in the
simulation automatically updates when you change the value in the
table.
You cannot change the values for calculated variables. You can change
the values for parameters only if they are Integer or Real parameters.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 201
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 16 – Tables

Activity Directions

Adding a Title to the Table

On the Table, select the expansion button at the lower-right corner
of the Table to expand the Configure area. In the Title box, type the
title of the Table and press Enter. The title appears above the column
headers.
The title is not the same as the Table name. If you want to change the
name of the Table, follow the standard renaming procedure on the
Canvas.

Adding Back Deleted Rows to the Table

Each Model Type has a default set of variables and parameters that appear when you add model instances of
that Model Type to a Table. However, you may not want all the variables and parameters in the default set to
appear in the Table, so you then delete the unwanted ones. The Table remembers these deletions. When you
add another model instance of that Model Type to the Table, the software uses the modified set of variables and
parameters instead of the default set.
If you want to once again see the variables or parameters that you deleted, then you must manually add them
back to the Table. See Managing Tables for more information.
To add a variable or parameter back to a Table by using the context menu:
1. Open the Table.
2. Right-click a row heading, and then select Add.
A new row appears after the selected row.
3. In the row header of the new row, type the name of the variable or parameter that you want to add to the
table.
To add a variable or parameter back to a Table by using the Table controls:
1. Open the Table.

2. Select the expansion button at the lower-right corner of the Table to expand the Configure area.
3. Select a row header.

4. On the toolbar at the upper-right corner of the Table, select the addition button to add a row below the
selected row.
5. In the row header for the new row, type the name of the variable or parameter that you want to add to the
Table.

Generating an Excel Report from Table Data

You can export the data from a Table to Microsoft Excel. When you export the data, AVEVA Process Simulation
generates an .xlsx file, which you can then open in Excel. The .xlsx file has a single worksheet named Table Data

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 202
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 16 – Tables

that includes all information from the Table in AVEVA Process Simulation. Currently, the data values are static. If
you make changes to the simulation, you must regenerate the .xlsx file to view the latest data.
To generate an Excel Report for a Table:
1. Do one of the following:

▪ Open the Table, and then click the expansion button to expand the configuration section.
▪ Right-click the Table on the Canvas, and then click Full Properties.
2. Optional: In the Report section, in the Excluded Rows box, type the Name of any rows that you want to
exclude from the Excel report. If you plan to exclude more than one row, separate the names with commas,
for example, Hv, Hl, rhov, rhol.
3. In the Report section, click Generate Excel Report.
The Save As dialog box appears.
4. Browse to the location where you want to save the .xlsx file.
By default, the .xlsx file has the same name as the Table on the Canvas.
5. Optional: In the File name box, change the name for the file.
6. Click Save.
AVEVA Process Simulation generates the .xlsx file and automatically opens it in Excel.

Copying and Pasting Values in a Table

You can copy values from a Table and paste them into tables in other software products, such as Microsoft Excel.
You can also copy tables from other software products and paste them into a Table.
When you paste values into a Table, the software does not overwrite:
• Calculated variables
• An Enumeration parameter if the pasted value is not part of the parameter's listed values
• A Fluid Type, Curve Type, or Model Type parameter if the pasted Fluid Type, Curve Type, or Model Type
does not exist in the Model Library.
The software always pastes values into consecutive rows and columns starting at the last selected table cell. That
is, selecting multiple, nonconsecutive table cells has no affect on where the software inserts the pasted values in
the Table.
To copy values from a Table:
1. Select the table cells that you want to copy.
You can press and hold Shift or Ctrl to select multiple table cells at once. You can also select a row header or
column header to select all the table cells in that row or column, respectively.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Press Ctrl+C.
▪ Right-click the selection, and then select Copy.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 203
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 16 – Tables

To paste values into a Table:

1. Select the table cell at the start of the cell range that you want to paste values into.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Press Ctrl+V.
▪ Right-click the selection, and then select Paste.
The software pastes values into consecutive rows and columns starting at the table cell that you selected in
step 1.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 204
Chapter 17

Heat Curves

About Heat Curves

Heat Curves are thermodynamic diagrams that display temperature vs. enthalpy and pressure vs. enthalpy data.
They help you visualize the thermodynamic data for a fluid or across streams.
Concepts
• Unlike Trends and Profiles, Heat Curves appear only on the Canvas, not in the Simulation Manager
• The Heat Curve can reference a specified fluid, a specified stream, or conditions across two specified streams
• The Heat Curve displays data for only one fluid at a time
• The Heat Curve automatically updates when you switch between fluids or streams, change the fluid in the
Fluid Editor, change the thermodynamic data for the fluid in AVEVA Thermodynamic Data Manager, or
change the configuration of the Heat Curve
• The Heat Curve can display a single curve or multiple isobaric curves
• For single curves, the Heat Curve has two tabs, one for the temperature vs. enthalpy curve and one for the
pressure vs. enthalpy curve
• For multiple isobaric curves, the Heat Curve has a specified number of tabs, one for each isobaric
temperature vs. enthalpy curve across the specified pressure range
• Heat Curves display data in the UOMs that are specified in the UOM Slate for the Simulation
Actions
• Create a Heat Curve on the Canvas
• Select a Fluid Type or Stream basis for the Heat Curve
• Select a Fluid Type or Stream reference for the Heat Curve
• Switch between the tabs for the different curves
• Change the temperature range
• Change the pressure range
• Add a margin to the start and end values of the curve
• Select whether the Heat Curve displays a single curve or multiple isobaric curves
• Change the number of intervals on the curve
• Change the interval spacing for the curve

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 205
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 17 – Heat Curves

• Generate a Microsoft Excel report for the Heat Curve data

• Generate an HTRI data (.dat) file for the Heat Curve data

Managing Heat Curves

This section describes creating, opening, renaming, and deleting Heat Curves.

Activity Directions

Creating a Heat Curve On the Model Library, on the Tools tab, drag a Heat
Curve onto the Canvas to automatically create a
new Heat Curve.
Opening a Heat Curve (expanded configuration On the Canvas, double-click the Heat Curve to view
area) it. By default, the Specifications section is
expanded.
Alternatively, on the Canvas, right-click the Heat
Curve, and then click Full Properties.
Opening a Heat Curve (collapsed configuration On the Canvas, right-click the Heat Curve, and then
area) click View. The Heat Curve appears with a
collapsed configuration area.
To view the configuration area after you open the
Heat Curve in this manner, click the expansion
button at the lower-right corner of the Heat
Curve to expand the configuration area.
Renaming a Heat Curve On the Canvas, double-click the name of the Heat
Curve, type a new name, and then press Enter.
Deleting a Heat Curve On the Canvas, right-click the Heat Curve, and then
click Delete.

Configuring a Heat Curve

You can configure a Heat Curve so that it uses the Fluid, composition, temperature range, and pressure range of
interest. You can also change the appearance of the Heat Curve on the graph.
To configure a Heat Curve based on a Fluid Type:
1. On the Canvas, double-click the Heat Curve to open it.
The Heat Curve appears with an expanded configuration area.
2. Expand the General section.
3. In the Title box, type the title of the graph.
4. Select Mass Basis or Mole Basis to display mass-based or molar enthalpies and compositions, respectively.
5. In the Legend list, select where you want the graph's legend to appear.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 206
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 17 – Heat Curves

6. In the Configuration section, select one of the following:

▪ Fluid Type – Define the curve data based on a specified Fluid.
▪ Stream – Define the curve data based on reference streams.
7. If you selected Fluid Type, specify the Fluid Type that you want to view data for by doing one of the
following:
▪ In the Fluid Type list, select the Fluid Type.
▪ From the Model Library, drag a Fluid Type onto the Heat Curve.
AVEVA Process Simulation uses property data from the selected Fluid Type to initialize the Heat Curve
configuration.
8. If you selected Stream, do the following in the Stream row:
a. In the Start box, enter the name of the stream that you want to reference.
AVEVA Process Simulation uses the property and composition data from the Start stream to initialize the
Heat Curve configuration, including the selected Fluid.
b. (Optional) In the End box, enter the name of the stream that you want to reference.
AVEVA Process Simulation updates the End temperature and pressure to match those of the End stream.
The software calculates the enthalpy difference between the Start stream and End stream conditions (the
heat duty). It then maintains that enthalpy difference when it calculates the isobaric heat curve. This allows
you to design heat exchangers between the streams.
9. Expand the Components List section.
If the selected Fluid is not Compositional, no components appear in the table. Otherwise, the table shows all
of the components in the Fluid as well as the initial composition from the Fluid or Start stream in the
Composition column.
10. In the Composition column, change the initial compositions as desired.
11. In the Configuration section, in the table, in the Start and End columns, change the values for both
temperature and pressure as desired.
The Temperature row represents the temperature range for the Heat Curve, which affects the appearance of
the curve on the T-H (temperature vs. enthalpy) tab.
The Pressure row represents the pressure range for the Heat Curve, which affects the appearance of the
curve on the P-H (pressure vs. enthalpy) tab.
12. In the Start/End Margin box, type the margin that you want to apply to the Start and End values for the
temperature and pressure range.
The applied margin is based on the Start value for the temperature and pressure, respectively. For the curve
calculations, AVEVA Process Simulation decreases the Start value by the specified percentage of the Start
value and increases the End value by that same value.
13. In the Heat Curve Type list, select one of the following values:
▪ Single – Display a single temperature vs. enthalpy curve and a single pressure vs. enthalpy curve.
▪ MultipleIsobaric – Display multiple isobaric temperature vs. enthalpy curves across the entire pressure
range.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 207
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 17 – Heat Curves

14. If you selected MultipleIsobaric, in the Number of Isobaric Curves box, enter the number of isobaric curves
that you want to display for the specified pressure range.
AVEVA Process Simulation uses the same pressure interval between each isobaric curve. Therefore, the
Number of Isobaric Curves value determines the pressure for each isobaric curve between the Start and End
pressures.
15. In the Evaluation Intervals box, enter the number of data points that you want to include in the heat curve
calculations.
Nonlinear portions of the Heat Curve may look linear and piecewise on the graph if you do not use a
sufficient number of data points.
This value also determines the number of data points that appear in any Microsoft Excel reports or HTRI data
(.dat) files that you generate for the Heat Curve. However, an HTRI data file includes only the first 30 data
points in the Heat Curve. See Exporting Heat Curve Data to an Excel Report and Exporting Heat Curve Data to
an HTRI Data File for more information.
16. In the Evaluation Spacing Options list, select one of the following options:
▪ Equal Temperature – The data points increment by the same step change in temperature for the entire
data set.
▪ Equal Enthalpies – The data points increment by the same step change in enthalpy for the entire data
set.
This value also determines how the data points increment in any Microsoft Excel reports or HRTI data files
that you generate for the Heat Curve. See Exporting Heat Curve Data to an Excel Report and Exporting Heat
Curve Data to an HTRI Data File for more information.

Exporting Heat Curve Data to an Excel Report

You can export the data from your Heat Curve to a Microsoft Excel report.
By default, AVEVA Process Simulation exports data for temperature, pressure, phase fractions, and molar and
mass-based enthalpy. You can also include phase-specific property data and transport properties in the Excel
report.
If the fluid includes two liquid phases, the Excel report includes data for the bulk liquid phase as well as each
individual liquid phase.
The configuration of the Heat Curve determines the following for the Excel report:
• Which worksheets appear.
• The temperature range.
• The pressure range.
• The number of data points.
• The step change between data points.
• Whether additional thermophysical property data and transport property data appear in the report.
The Excel report includes the following worksheets:
• Heat Curve_MassBasis and HeatCurve_MoleBasis

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 208
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 17 – Heat Curves

These two worksheets display the thermodynamic data for each data point on the Heat Curve on a mass
basis and molar basis, respectively.
If the Heat Curve displays multiple isobaric curves (that is, you set the Heat Curve Type to MultipleIsobaric),
the Excel report doesn't include the Heat Curve_MassBasis and HeatCurve_MoleBasis worksheets. Instead, it
includes two similar worksheets for each isobaric curve, one on a mass basis (HeatCurve@<Pressure>) and
one on a molar basis (HeatCurve@<Pressure> (2)).
• Fluid Data or Summary
Only one of these worksheets appear in the Excel report. When you select Fluid Type in the Configuration
section of the Heat Curve, only the Fluid Data worksheet appears. When you select Stream in the
Configuration section of the Heat Curve, only the Summary worksheet appears.
Both worksheets display the details for the fluid, including the thermodynamic method that AVEVA Process
Simulation uses for the calculations, the components in the fluid, and the compositions for each of those
components. However, the Summary worksheet also includes the temperature conditions for the Start (inlet)
and End (outlet) streams, overall heat transfer duty between the streams, and the total mass flow rate in the
streams.
The Excel report displays data in the UOMs that are specified in the UOM Slate for the simulation.
To export Heat Curve data to Excel:
1. On the Canvas, double-click the Heat Curve to open the Heat Curve with the configuration area expanded.
2. In the Configuration section, review and update the Heat Curve configuration as needed.
See Configuring a Heat Curve for more information.
3. Expand the Report section.
4. If you want to include the thermophysical property data (such as the enthalpy and density) for each phase in
the Excel report, select the Thermophysical properties for each phase checkbox.
5. If you want to include the transport property data in the Excel report, select the Phase flow rates checkbox.
6. Select Generate Excel Report.
The Save As dialog box appears.
7. Browse to the location in which you want to save the Excel report.
8. In the File name box, enter the name of the Excel report, and then select Save.
AVEVA Process Simulation creates the .xlsx file and automatically opens it in Excel.

Exporting Heat Curve Data to an HTRI Data File

You can export your Heat Curve data to an HTRI data (.dat) file, which you can then import into HTRI products to
design your heat exchangers.
Note: HTRI is a third-party software company that distributes products, such as Xchanger Suite, that allow you to
rigorously design and simulate heat transfer equipment.
Please see the HTRI product documentation for more information on how to import and use this .dat file in HTRI
products.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 209
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 17 – Heat Curves

To export Heat Curve data to an HTRI data (.dat) file:

1. On the Canvas, double-click the Heat Curve to open the Heat Curve with the configuration area expanded.
2. In the Configuration section, in the Evaluation Intervals box, type the number of data points that you want
to include in the HTRI data file.
The HTRI data file includes only the first 30 data points, so we recommend that you set the Evaluations
Intervals to a value less than or equal to 29.
3. In the Evaluation Spacing Options list, select one of the following options:
▪ Equal Temperature: The data points in the HTRI data file increment by the same temperature change for
the entire data set.
▪ Equal Enthalpies: The data points in the HTRI data file increment by the same enthalpy change for the
entire data set.
4. Expand the Report section.
5. Select one of the following options:
▪ Cold Fluid – The data is for the cold-side fluid of the heat exchanger that you want to design in your HTRI
product.
▪ Hot Fluid – The data is for the hot-side fluid of the heat exchanger that you want to design in your HTRI
product.
6. Click Export to HTRI data file.
The Save As dialog box appears.
7. Browse to the location in which you want to save the HTRI data file.
8. In the File name box, type the name of the HTRI data file, and then click Save.
AVEVA Process Simulation creates the .dat file, which you can then import into your HTRI product. You may
need to merge a hot-side fluid .dat file with a cold-side fluid .dat file to import both sides into an HTRI heat
exchanger.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 210
Chapter 18

Phase Envelopes

About Phase Envelopes

Phase Envelopes generate vapor-liquid equilibrium (VLE) data for specified compositions of a Fluid Type. They
help you visualize, analyze, and validate the vapor-liquid equilibrium (VLE) behavior of your fluids.
Concepts
• Unlike Trends and Profiles, Phase Envelopes appear only on the Canvas, not in the Simulation Manager.
• Currently, Phase Envelopes support only Compositional Fluid Types that use an equation of state (EOS) as
their System method and Vapor/Liquid (VLE) as their Phases selection.
• Phase Envelopes can reference a specified fluid (Fluid Type configuration) or a specified stream (Stream
configuration).
• For Fluid Type configuration, when you add a Fluid Type to a Phase Envelope, the software sets the
composition values for the Phase Envelope to those of the Fluid Type.
• For Stream configuration, when you specify the stream to use, the software loads the composition values
and Fluid Type from the stream data and you cannot change these values in the Phase Envelope.
• If you switch the Phase Envelope from Stream configuration to Fluid Type configuration, the Phase Envelope
retains the Fluid Type selection, composition, temperature, and pressure from the stream.
• Phase Envelopes display bubble point and dew point curves at temperature and pressure for a vapor-liquid
equilibrium (VLE) mixture. They also include the following critical data:
• Critical point
• Cricondenbar point
• Cricondentherm point
• For Stream configuration, the Phase Envelope also displays the operating point (temperature and pressure)
of the stream.
• The software normalizes the compositions for the Phase Envelope when it calculates the phase data.
• Phase Envelopes work best on a dry basis.
• Phase Envelopes work best with nonpolar components; if you include polar components (such as H2O,
MeOH, or TEG) in the fluid composition, a warning message appears in the Log pane to indicate the poor
behavior.
• Phase Envelope messages appear in the Thermo Diagrams report in the Log pane.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 211
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 18 – Phase Envelopes

• If the graph does not display any data after adding a Fluid Type or process stream to the Phase Envelope, you
can refer to the messages in the Thermo Diagrams report in the Log pane to troubleshoot the issue.
Actions
• Create a Phase Envelope on the Canvas.
• Select a Fluid Type for the Phase Envelope; alternatively, drag a Fluid Type onto the Phase Envelope on the
Canvas.
• Select whether the Phase Envelope displays data in terms of molar compositions (molar basis) or mass
compositions (mass basis).
• Change the position of the legend on the graph.
• Set the composition for each component in the Fluid Type.
• Generate a Microsoft Excel report for the phase data.

Managing Phase Envelopes

This section describes creating, opening, renaming, and deleting Phase Envelopes.

Activity Directions

Creating a Phase Envelope On the Model Library, on the Tools tab, drag a
Phase Envelope onto the Canvas to automatically
create a new Phase Envelope.
Opening a Phase Envelope (expanded On the Canvas, double-click the Phase Envelope to
configuration area) view it. By default, the Configure section is
expanded.
Alternatively, on the Canvas, right-click the Phase
Envelope, and then select Full Properties.
Opening a Phase Envelope (collapsed On the Canvas, right-click the Phase Envelope, and
configuration area) then select View. The Phase Envelope appears with
a collapsed configuration area.
To view the configuration area after you open the
Phase Envelope in this manner, select the
expansion button at the lower-right corner of
the Phase Envelope.
Renaming a Phase Envelope On the Canvas, double-click the name of the Phase
Envelope, type a new name, and then press Enter.
Deleting a Phase Envelope On the Canvas, right-click the Phase Envelope, and
then select Delete.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 212
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 18 – Phase Envelopes

Configuring a Phase Envelope

You can configure a Phase Envelope so that it uses either a Fluid Type and specified composition of interest or a
process stream from the simulation.
To configure a Phase Envelope that uses a Fluid Type:
1. On the Canvas, double-click the Phase Envelope.
The Phase Envelope appears with an expanded configuration area.
2. Expand the General section.
3. In the Title box, type the title of the graph.
4. Select either Mole Basis or Mass Basis to view the phase data in terms of molar compositions or mass
compositions, respectively.
5. In the Legend list, select the position for the graph's legend.
6. Expand the Configuration section if it is not already visible.
7. Select Fluid Type.
8. Specify the fluid that you want to view data for by doing one of the following:
▪ In the Fluid Type list, select the Fluid Type.
▪ From the Model Library, drag a Fluid Type onto the Phase Envelope on the Canvas.
After you select the Fluid Type, AVEVA Process Simulation uses property data from the Fluid Type to initialize
the Phase Envelope configuration.
Important: Phase Envelopes currently support only Compositional Fluid Types that use an equation of state
(EOS) as the System method and Vapor/Liquid (VLE) as the Phases selection.
9. Expand the Components List section.
10. Update the compositions in the table as desired.
If the sum of the compositions does not equal one, the software normalizes the compositions when it
calculates the phase data.
To configure a Phase Envelope that uses a process stream:
1. On the Canvas, double-click the Phase Envelope.
The Phase Envelope appears with an expanded configuration area.
2. Expand the General section.
3. In the Title box, type the title of the graph.
4. Select either Mole Basis or Mass Basis to view the phase data in terms of molar compositions or mass
compositions, respectively.
5. In the Legend list, select the position for the graph's legend.
6. Expand the Configuration section if it is not already visible.
7. Select Stream.
8. In the Stream box, type the name of the process stream that you want to view data for.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 213
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 18 – Phase Envelopes

Important: Phase Envelopes currently support only Compositional Fluid Types that use an equation of state
(EOS) as the System method and Vapor/Liquid (VLE) as the Phases selection.
9. Expand the Components List section to view the compositions from the process stream.
You cannot update the compositions from the process stream in the Phase Envelope.
If the sum of the compositions does not equal one, the software normalizes the compositions when it
calculates the phase data.

Exporting Phase Envelope Data

You can export the data from your Phase Envelope to a Microsoft Excel report.
The Excel report includes the following worksheets.
• Phase Envelope: This worksheet displays the temperature and pressure for each data point on the dew point
and bubble point curves. The critical point, cricondentherm point, and cricondenbar point are highlighted if
available.
• Fluid Data: This worksheet displays the component compositions and the thermodynamic method that
AVEVA Process Simulation uses for the calculations.
The Excel report displays data in the units of measure (UOMs) that are specified in the UOM Slate for the
Simulation.
To export Phase Envelope data to Excel:
1. On the Canvas, double-click the Phase Envelope to open it with the configuration area expanded.
2. In the General section, select Mole Basis or Mass Basis to export the phase data in terms of mole fractions
or mass fractions, respectively.
3. Expand the Report section.
4. Click Generate Excel Report.
The Save As dialog box appears.
5. Browse to the location in which you want to save the Excel report.
6. In the File name box, type the name of the Excel report, and then select Save.
AVEVA Process Simulation creates the .xlsx file, which you can then open in Excel.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 214
Chapter 19

Binary Phase Diagrams

About Binary Phase Diagrams

Binary Phase Diagrams generate vapor-liquid equilibrium (VLE) data or vapor-liquid-liquid equilibrium (VLLE) data
for a given pair of components. They help you visualize, analyze, and validate the binary vapor-liquid equilibrium
(BVLE) or the binary vapor-liquid-liquid equilibrium (BVLLE).
Currently, Binary Phase Diagrams do not support Fluids that use the Electrolyte NRTL (eNRTL) method as the
System method.
Concepts
• Unlike Trends and Profiles, Binary Phase Diagrams appear only on the Canvas, not in the Simulation Manager.
• A Binary Phase Diagram displays data for only one Fluid Type at a time.
• The Fluid Type that you use in the Binary Phase Diagram must contain at least two components and use
either the Vapor/Liquid (VLE) or Vapor/Liquid1/Liquid2 (VLLE) selection in the Phases list.
• The Binary Phase Diagram automatically updates when you make any changes to the fluid that it uses or to
the configuration of the Binary Phase Diagram.
• You can display the binary phase data in terms of either molar compositions (molar basis) or mass
compositions (mass basis).
• You can specify the first component and second component in the binary system; the first component and
second component should not be the same.
• The diagrams display plotted data based on the first component that you select for the Binary Phase Diagram
configuration.
• You can generate the binary phase data at either a specified constant temperature or a specified constant
pressure.
• Each Binary Phase Diagram has the following three tabs:
• P-X-Y or T-X-Y
This tab displays the dew curve and bubble curve. If you generate the BVLE or BVLLE data at a constant
pressure, the curves include temperature vs. composition data and the tab is named T-X-Y. If you
generate the BVLE or BVLLE data at a constant temperature, the curves include pressure vs. composition
data and the tab is named P-X-Y.
• X-Y

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 215
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 19 – Binary Phase Diagrams

This tab displays the equilibrium curve for the first component that you select for the Binary Phase
Diagram configuration.
• gamma-x
This tab displays the activity coefficient values (gamma) with respect to liquid composition (x). You can
view gamma-x data only when the Binary Phase Diagram is configured at a constant temperature and
uses a vapor-liquid equilibrium (VLE) or vapor-liquid-liquid equilibrium (VLLE) Fluid.
• Binary Phase Diagrams that display BVLLE data have the following additional three tabs:
• P-x1-x2 or T-x1-x2
This tab displays the detailed liquid-liquid equilibrium data. If you generate the BVLLE data at a constant
pressure, the curves include temperature vs. composition data and the tab is named T-x1-x2. If you
generate the BVLLE data at a constant temperature, the curves include pressure vs. composition data
and the tab is named P-x1-x2.
• gamma-x1
This tab shows the activity coefficient values with respect to the liquid composition in the Liquid 1 phase
(x1). You can view gamma-x1 data only when you configure the Binary Phase Diagram at a constant
temperature and use a vapor-liquid-liquid equilibrium (VLLE) Fluid.
• gamma-x2
This tab shows the activity coefficient values with respect to the liquid composition in the Liquid 2 phase
(x2). You can view gamma-x2 data only when you configure the Binary Phase Diagram at a constant
temperature and use a vapor-liquid-liquid equilibrium (VLLE) Fluid.
• Binary Phase Diagrams display data in the units of measure (UOMs) that are specified in the UOM Slate for
the Simulation
Actions
• Create a Binary Phase Diagram on the Canvas.
• Select a Fluid Type for the Binary Phase Diagram; alternatively, drag a Fluid Type onto the Binary Phase
Diagram.
• Select whether the Binary Phase Diagram displays data in terms of molar compositions (molar basis) or mass
compositions (mass basis).
• Select the first and second component for the Binary Phase Diagram.
• Select whether AVEVA Process Simulation calculates the BVLE or BVLLE data at a constant pressure or at a
constant temperature, and specify that constant value.
• For BVLE or BVLLE data, switch between the P-X-Y or T-X-Y tab, the X-Y tab, and the gamma-x tab to view the
dew and bubble curves, the equilibrium curve, and the activity coefficient values, respectively.
• For BVLLE data, switch to the P-x1-x2 or T-x1-x2 tab to view the detailed equilibrium data between the two
liquid phases.
• For BVLLE data that you configured at a constant temperature, switch to the gamma-x1 tab or the gamma-x2
tab to view the activity coefficient values with respect to the liquid composition in the Liquid 1 phase or the
Liquid 2 phase, respectively.
• Change the number of intervals on the Binary Phase Diagram.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 216
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 19 – Binary Phase Diagrams

• Generate a Microsoft Excel report for the BVLE or BVLLE data.

Managing Binary Phase Diagrams

This section describes creating, opening, renaming, and deleting Binary Phase Diagrams.

Activity Directions

Creating a Binary Phase Diagram On the Model Library, on the Tools tab, drag a
Binary Phase Diagram onto the Canvas to
automatically create a new Binary Phase Diagram.
Opening a Binary Phase Diagram (expanded On the Canvas, double-click the Binary Phase
configuration area) Diagram to view it. By default, the Configure
section is expanded.
Alternatively, on the Canvas, right-click the Binary
Phase Diagram, and then click Full Properties.
Opening a Binary Phase Diagram (collapsed On the Canvas, right-click the Binary Phase
configuration area) Diagram, and then click View. The Binary Phase
Diagram appears with a collapsed configuration
area.
To view the configuration area after you open the
Binary Phase Diagram in this manner, Click the
expansion button at the lower-right corner of
the Binary Phase Diagram to expand the
configuration area.
Renaming a Binary Phase Diagram On the Canvas, double-click the name of the Binary
Phase Diagram, type a new name, and then press
Enter.
Deleting a Binary Phase Diagram On the Canvas, right-click the Binary Phase
Diagram, and then click Delete.

Configuring a Binary Phase Diagram

You can configure a Binary Phase Diagram so that it uses the Fluid Type, composition, temperature range, and
pressure range of interest. You can also change the appearance of the Binary Phase Diagram on the graph.
To configure a Binary Phase Diagram:
1. On the Canvas, double-click the Binary Phase Diagram to open it.
The Binary Phase Diagram appears with an expanded configuration area.
2. Expand the General section.
3. In the Title box, type the title of the graph.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 217
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 19 – Binary Phase Diagrams

Note: The title of the graph always includes parenthetical information related to the conditions under which
AVEVA Process Simulation calculates the data. This information includes the two components that comprise
the binary system and the value of the constant temperature or constant pressure.
4. Specify the fluid that you want to view data for by doing one of the following:
▪ In the Fluid Type list, select the Fluid Type.
▪ From the Model Library, drag a Fluid Type onto the Binary Phase Diagram.
After you select the Fluid Type, AVEVA Process Simulation uses property data from the Fluid Type to initialize
the Binary Phase Diagram configuration.
Important: Binary Phase Diagrams currently do not support Fluid Types that use the Electrolyte NRTL
(eNRTL) method as the System method.
5. Select either Mole Basis or Mass Basis to view the binary phase data in terms of molar compositions or mass
compositions, respectively.
6. Expand the Configure section if it is not already visible.
7. In the First Component list, select the first component in the binary system.
The Binary Phase Diagram displays all data points based on the composition of this component.
8. In the Second Component list, select the second component in the binary system.
9. In the Compositional Intervals box, type the number of data points that you want to include in the BVLE
calculations. Nonlinear portions of the Binary Phase Diagram may look linear and piecewise on the graph if
you do not use a sufficient number of data points.
This value also determines the number of data points that appear in any Microsoft Excel reports that you
generate for the Binary Phase Diagram. See Exporting Binary Phase Diagram Data to an Excel Report for
more information.
10. In the Calculate at Constant list, select one of the following options:
▪ Temperature: AVEVA Process Simulation calculates all data points at the specified temperature.
▪ Pressure: AVEVA Process Simulation calculates all data points at the specified pressure.
The default selection is Pressure.
11. In the Calculate at Constant box, enter the value of the constant temperature or constant pressure.
The default value for the constant temperature or constant pressure is the initial temperature or initial
pressure from the specified Fluid type, respectively.

Exporting Binary Phase Diagram Data to an Excel Report

You can export the data from your Binary Phase Diagram to a Microsoft Excel report.
By default, AVEVA Process Simulation exports data for temperature, pressure, liquid fractions for both
components, and vapor fractions for both components.
For Binary Phase Diagrams that display binary vapor-liquid equilibrium (BVLE) data, the Excel report includes the
following worksheets.
• Bubble Point: This worksheet displays the thermodynamic data for each data point on the bubble curve.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 218
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 19 – Binary Phase Diagrams

• Dew Point: This worksheet displays the thermodynamic data for each data point on the dew curve.
• Fluid Data: This worksheet displays the components in the binary system and the thermodynamic method
that AVEVA Process Simulation uses for the calculations.
• gamma-x: This worksheet displays the activity coefficient values as a function of the liquid composition. This
data is available only when you configure the Binary Phase Diagram at a constant temperature.
For Binary Phase Diagrams that display binary vapor-liquid-liquid equilibrium (BVLLE) data, the Excel report
includes the following worksheets.
• Liquid-Liquid Equilibrium: This worksheet displays the thermodynamic data for each data point on the
detailed liquid-liquid equilibrium diagram.
• Vapor-Liquid Equilibrium: This worksheet displays the thermodynamic data for each data point on the
vapor-liquid-liquid equilibrium diagram.
• Fluid Data: This worksheet displays the components in the binary system and the thermodynamic method
that AVEVA Process Simulation uses for the calculations.
• gamma-x1: This worksheet displays the activity coefficient values as a function of the liquid composition in
the Liquid 1 phase (x1). This data is available only when you configure the Binary Phase Diagram at a
constant temperature.
• gamma-x2: This worksheet displays the activity coefficient values as a function of the liquid composition in
the Liquid 2 phase (x2). This data is available only when you configure the Binary Phase Diagram at a
constant temperature.
The Excel report displays data in the UOMs that are specified in the UOM Slate for the Simulation.
To export Binary Phase Diagram data to Excel:
1. On the Canvas, double-click the Binary Phase Diagram to open the Binary Phase Diagram with the
configuration area expanded.
2. In the General section, select Mole Basis or Mass Basis to export the binary phase data in terms of mole
fractions or mass fractions, respectively.
3. In the Configure section, in the Compositional Intervals box, type the number of data points that you want
to include in the Excel report.
4. In the Calculate at Constant list, select one of the following options:
▪ Temperature: AVEVA Process Simulation calculates all data points at the specified temperature.
▪ Pressure: AVEVA Process Simulation calculates all data points at the specified pressure.
5. In the Calculate at Constant box, enter the value of the constant temperature or constant pressure.
6. Expand the Report section.
7. Click Generate Excel Report.
The Save As dialog box appears.
8. Browse to the location in which you want to save the Excel report.
9. In the File name box, type the name of the Excel report, and then click Save.
AVEVA Process Simulation creates the .xlsx file, which you can then open in Excel.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 219
Chapter 20

Ternary Phase Diagrams

About Ternary Phase Diagrams

Ternary Phase Diagrams generate vapor-liquid-liquid equilibrium (VLLE) data for a three-component system. They
help you understand and visualize the binary and ternary azeotropes, liquid-liquid separation, and phase
boundaries at the specified conditions.
Concepts
• Unlike Trends and Profiles, Ternary Phase Diagrams appear only on the Canvas, not in the Simulation
Manager
• A Ternary Phase Diagram displays data for only one Fluid Type at a time
• The Fluid Type that you use in the Ternary Phase Diagram must contain at least three components and use
either the Vapor/Liquid (VLE) or Vapor/Liquid1/Liquid2 (VLLE) selection in the Phases list
• The Ternary Phase Diagram automatically updates when you make any changes to the fluid that it uses or to
the configuration of the Ternary Phase Diagram
• If the Fluid Type uses the Vapor/Liquid (VLE) selection in the Phases list, the Ternary Phase Diagram displays
only azeotropes, not liquid-liquid equilibrium (LLE) tie lines
• You must specify the first, second, and third component in the ternary system to generate the data; no two
components should be the same
• The software generates the azeotrope data at a specified constant pressure
• You can use either an isothermal option or a bubble point temperature option to generate the LLE tie lines
• For the isothermal option, the software generates the LLE tie lines at a specified constant temperature and
pressure
• For the bubble point temperature option, the software generates the LLE tie lines at a specified constant
pressure and at the bubble point
• Ternary Phase Diagrams display data in the units of measure (UOMs) that are specified in the UOM Slate for
the Simulation
Actions
• Create a Ternary Phase Diagram on the Canvas
• Select a Fluid Type for the Ternary Phase Diagram; alternatively, drag a Fluid Type onto the Ternary Phase
Diagram
• Select the first, second, and third component for the Ternary Phase Diagram

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 220
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 20 – Ternary Phase Diagrams

• Select whether AVEVA Process Simulation calculates the LLE tile lines at a specified isotherm or at the bubble
point
• Show or hide the azeotropes on the diagram
• Show or hide the LLE tie lines on the diagram
• Generate a Microsoft Excel report for the azeotrope and LLE tie line data

Managing Ternary Phase Diagrams

This section describes creating, opening, renaming, and deleting Ternary Phase Diagrams.

Activity Directions

Creating a Ternary Phase Diagram On the Model Library, on the Tools tab, drag a
Ternary Phase Diagram onto the Canvas to
automatically create a new Ternary Phase Diagram.
Opening a Ternary Phase Diagram (expanded On the Canvas, double-click the Ternary Phase
configuration area) Diagram to view it. By default, the Configure
section is expanded.
Alternatively, on the Canvas, right-click the Ternary
Phase Diagram, and then click Full Properties.
Opening a Ternary Phase Diagram (collapsed On the Canvas, right-click the Ternary Phase
configuration area) Diagram, and then click View. The Ternary Phase
Diagram appears with a collapsed configuration
area.
To view the configuration area after you open the
Ternary Phase Diagram in this manner, click the
expansion button at the lower-right corner of
the Ternary Phase Diagram to expand the
configuration area.
Renaming a Ternary Phase Diagram On the Canvas, double-click the name of the
Ternary Phase Diagram, type a new name, and
then press Enter.
Deleting a Ternary Phase Diagram On the Canvas, right-click the Ternary Phase
Diagram, and then click Delete.

Configuring a Ternary Phase Diagram

You can configure a Ternary Phase Diagram so that it uses the Fluid Type, components, temperature, and
pressure of interest. You can also change the appearance of the Ternary Phase Diagram on the graph.
To configure a Ternary Phase Diagram:
1. On the Canvas, double-click the Ternary Phase Diagram to open it.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 221
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 20 – Ternary Phase Diagrams

The Ternary Phase Diagram appears with an expanded configuration area.

2. Expand the General section.
3. In the Title box, type the title of the graph.
Note: The title of the graph always includes information related to the conditions under which AVEVA
Process Simulation calculates the data. This information includes the three components that comprise the
ternary system and the value of the constant pressure.
4. Specify the fluid that you want to view data for by doing one of the following:
▪ In the Fluid Type list, select the Fluid Type.
▪ From the Model Library, drag a Fluid Type onto the Ternary Phase Diagram on the Canvas.
After you select the Fluid Type, AVEVA Process Simulation uses property data from the Fluid Type to initialize
the Ternary Phase Diagram configuration.
5. Expand the Configure section if it is not already visible.
6. In the First Component list, select the first component in the ternary system.
7. In the Second Component list, select the second component in the ternary system.
8. In the Third Component list, select the third component in the ternary system.
9. In the Calculation Option list, select one of the following options:
▪ Isothermal: AVEVA Process Simulation calculates all data points at the specified constant temperature
and pressure.
▪ BubblePointT: AVEVA Process Simulation calculates all data points at the bubble point and at the
specified constant pressure.
The default selection is Isothermal.
10. If you want to hide any azeotropes on the diagram, clear the Azeotropes check box.
11. If you want to hide the liquid-liquid equilibrium (LLE) tie lines on the diagram, clear the LLE tie lines check
box.

Exporting Ternary Phase Diagram Data to an Excel Report

You can export the data from your Ternary Phase Diagram to a Microsoft Excel report.
By default, AVEVA Process Simulation exports data for the binary azeotropes and the liquid-liquid equilibrium
(LLE) tie lines.
The Excel report includes the following worksheets.
• Azeotropes: This worksheet displays the temperature, pressure, liquid phase fractions, and vapor phase
fractions for each azeotrope that appears on the Ternary Phase Diagram.
• LLETieLines: This worksheet displays the liquid 1 phase fraction and liquid 2 phase fraction for each LLE tie
line that appears on the Ternary Phase Diagram.
• Fluid Data: This worksheet displays the components in the ternary system and the thermodynamic method
that AVEVA Process Simulation uses for the calculations.
The Excel report displays data in the UOMs that are specified in the UOM Slate for the Simulation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 222
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 20 – Ternary Phase Diagrams

To export Ternary Phase Diagram data to Excel:

1. On the Canvas, double-click the Ternary Phase Diagram to open it with the configuration area expanded.
2. Expand the Report section.
3. Click Generate Excel Report.
The Save As dialog box appears.
4. Browse to the location in which you want to save the Excel report.
5. In the File name box, type the name of the Excel report, and then click Save.
AVEVA Process Simulation creates the .xlsx file, which you can then open in Excel.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 223
Chapter 21

Groups

About Groups
A Group is a collection of related variables and parameters. Groups appear on the Mini Inspector and provide a
way for you to organize the variables and parameters within the Mini Inspector so that you can quickly locate the
variables and parameters that you are most interested in.
Concepts
• The order in which the Groups appear on the Mini Inspector is the same as the order in which the Groups
appear on the Model Editor
• Only Model Writers can create and configure Groups
• Model Writers can add both variables and parameters to a Group
• If a model does not contain Groups, you will see a flat list of the favorite variables and parameters on the
Mini Inspector
• If a model contains Groups, on the Mini Inspector, you will see a collapsible and expandable section for each
Group and the variables and parameters appear under their associated Groups
• Many models in the standard Model Libraries include a default set of Groups
• The Property Inspector sorts variables and parameters by Groups only if you sort the view based on the
Group value
Actions
• Create a Group
• Rename a Group
• Reorder the Groups
• Add a variable to a Group
• Add a parameter to a Group
• Delete a Group
• Sort the Property Inspector by Groups

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 224
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 21 – Groups

Sorting the Property Inspector by Groups

The Property Inspector does not automatically sort the variables and parameters by Groups as the Mini
Inspector does. However, you can mimic the view in the Mini Inspector by sorting the view based on the Group
value.
To sort the parameters in the Property Inspector by Groups:
1. On the Property Inspector, expand the Parameters area.
2. Drag the Group column onto the gray filter bar, which expands to show the list of columns by which AVEVA
Process Simulation sorts the parameters.

3. On the filter bar, drag the Model item onto the table of parameters.

The parameters are now sorted based on only the Groups.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 225
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 21 – Groups

To sort the variables in the Property Inspector by Groups:

1. On the Property Inspector, expand the Variables area.
2. Drag the Group column onto the gray filter bar, which expands to show the list of columns by which AVEVA
Process Simulation sorts the variables.

3. On the filter bar, drag the Model item onto the table of variables.

The variables are now sorted based on only the Groups.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 226
Chapter 22

Units of Measure (UOMs) and UOM

Slates

About UOM and UOM Slates

A Unit of Measure (UOM) Slate is a collection of UOMs that are used for numerical display within the user
interface. Each UOM Slate defines a default UOM to be used for each Variable Type. You can create, modify, copy
and delete UOM Slates. Furthermore, you can select the preferred UOM Slate to use while you are working on a
simulation, and the change will be reflected in the numeric values displayed in AVEVA Process Simulation.

Concepts
• Variable Types:
• Every variable and Real parameter in AVEVA Process Simulation is associated with a Variable Type, such
as Pressure, Temperature and Mass Flow
• Every Variable Type has a permanent internal UOM
• Displays:
• You can change a UOM in the Properties Inspector or Simulation Manager
• When you change a UOM for a specific model's variable, that variable is a always shown in that UOM,
except for Variable References and Trends
• Variable References and ports follow the variable's UOM until it is manually changed by the user. After a
manual change, it allows independent UOM selection
• Slates:
• A UOM Slate is a collection UOM defaults for the Variable Types

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 227
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 22 – Units of Measure (UOMs) and UOM Slates

• AVEVA Process Simulation provides you with two UOM Slates, SI and US Refining, but you can add more
• When you define UOM Slates, Variable Types are organized by category for easier navigation
Actions
• Add, modify, copy and delete UOM Slates in the UOM Manager
• Select a specific UOM Slate to be used for numeric display in your simulation by clicking the Units of
Measure drop-down on the Edit/View tab of the Application Ribbon
• Select a default UOM Slate that AVEVA Process Simulation uses for all newly created simulations
• Save UOM Slates to the Repository to share with other users, or you can save them with a specific simulation

Opening the UOM Manager

You can open the UOM Manager and work with existing, or create new, UOM Slates.
To open the UOM Manager:
• On the Start tab, in the UOM group, click the Manager button.

The UOM Slates window appears:

From the UOM Manager, you can create, copy, delete and modify existing UOM Slates.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 228
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 22 – Units of Measure (UOMs) and UOM Slates

Creating UOM Slates

You can create or modify a UOM Slate and apply it to your simulation.
To create a UOM Slate:
1. Open the UOM Manager.
2. Click the Slate drop-down arrow.
3. On the Create Slate submenu, click Repository if you want to save the UOM Slate to the Repository, or click
the name of your simulation if you want only your simulation to use the UOM Slate.

To modify an existing UOM Slate:

1. Open the UOM Manager.
2. Click the Slate drop-down arrow.
3. On the Open Slate submenu, select the UOM Slate.
4. Enter a Description for the UOM Slate.
5. If you want to change the display unit of a specific Variable Type, click the associated row in the Display Unit
column and select a new unit.

When you create a new UOM Slate, it is automatically saved and you can select it from the UOM Slate list on the
Start tab. If you installed AVEVA Process Simulation by using roaming profiles, the new UOM Slate is saved in the
%AppData%\SimSci\SimCentral\Custom directory. Otherwise, it is saved in the %LocalAppData%
\SimSci\SimCentral\Custom directory.
The UOM Slates are retained if you uninstall and reinstall AVEVA Process Simulation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 229
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 22 – Units of Measure (UOMs) and UOM Slates

Sorting the UOM Manager

You can sort the UOM Manager to group similar types of information.
To sort the UOM manager:
1. Open the UOM Manager.
2. Load a UOM Slate.
3. Select a column header to group by Variable Type, Display Unit, or Category.

Copying a UOM Slate

You can create a new UOM Slate and copy the complete specification (for each Variable Type) from an existing
UOM State to it.
To copy a UOM Slate:
1. Open the UOM Manager.
2. Create a new UOM Slate or open an existing one.
3. Click the Slate drop-down arrow, click Copy Slate From, and then click the UOM Slate from which you want
to copy the complete UOM specification.
The display units for each Variable Type are copied to the new UOM Slate.

Deleting a UOM Slate

You can delete a UOM Slate from the Repository or your simulation.
To delete a UOM Slate:
1. Open the UOM Manager.
2. Click Open Slate and open the UOM Slate you want to delete.
3. Click the Slate drop-down arrow, and then click Delete Slate.
4. Click Yes on the prompt that displays.
The UOM Slate will be deleted.

Specifying a Default UOM Slate

You can set a default UOM slate for AVEVA Process Simulation. When you create a new simulation, the
simulation automatically uses the default UOM slate. You can specify any existing UOM slate as the default UOM
slate. If you change the default UOM slate, the change does not apply to any existing simulations. If you delete
the UOM slate that you have specified as the default, AVEVA Process Simulation automatically sets the default
UOM slate to No Slate.
To specify a default UOM slate:
1. Close any open simulations.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 230
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 22 – Units of Measure (UOMs) and UOM Slates

2. On the Start tab, in the UOM group, in the list of UOM slates, select the UOM slate that you want to use as
the default.
Note: When a simulation is open, the value that appears in this list box is the UOM slate that the simulation
uses. It is not the default UOM slate.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 231
Chapter 23

Snapshots

About Snapshots
A snapshot is an archive of the state of the simulation at a previous solution. It contains all variable and real
parameter values and the variables' specification status. It can also include history data from Dynamics runs.
AVEVA Process Simulation allows you to create snapshots so that you can return your simulation to a previous
solution. For example, if you are planning to modify a simulation by adding new equipment models or equations,
saving a snapshot of your simulation will help you to return to a previous solution.
You can create a new snapshot or return to a previous one from the Application Ribbon or through the Snapshot
Manager. You can use the Snapshot Manager to add a description to a snapshot, rename a snapshot, delete a
snapshot and more. When you create a snapshot, it is saved with the simulation.

Concepts
• You can create multiple snapshots and return to a specific one
• You can create a snapshot from the Application Ribbon or manage a snapshot in the Snapshot Manager
• When you switch between simulation modes, a snapshot is automatically taken
• All variable and real parameter data is saved with each snapshot
• History data is not saved by default, but you can include history data when you capture a snapshot from the
Snapshot Manager
• When you restore a snapshot, you determine what data to load by clicking Reset, Revert, Invariant, or
Special
• Snapshot information is saved with the simulation.
• The Snapshots group on the Process, Fluid Flow, and Dynamics tab displays the snapshot that you last
loaded.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 232
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 23 – Snapshots

Actions
• Create, rename, and delete a snapshot.
• Create, rename, and delete a snapshot that includes history data.
• Return to a specific snapshot that you captured.
• Compare a snapshot to the current simulation.

Opening the Snapshot Manager

To open the Snapshot Manager:
1. Click any of the Simulation Mode tabs; for example, Process.
2. On the ribbon, in the Snapshots group, click Manager.

The Snapshot Manager appears.

Managing Snapshots in the Snapshot Manager

The Snapshot Manager allows you to capture, reset, revert, rename and delete snapshots, provide a description,
and choose simulation snapshot-specific settings to load if you choose to return to a previous state. The
Snapshot Manager is accessible from each of the Mode tabs.

Button Purpose

Capture a snapshot. Includes Real parameter

Snap
values, variable specifications and variable values.

Capture a snapshot and include the history data.

Snap with History
Includes Real parameter values, variable
specifications, variable values, and any history
data within Trends.
When you include the history data in a snapshot,
the file size of the simulation increases and may
affect performance if your snapshot includes a
large number of Trends or a large amount of
history data.
The History column in the list of snapshots
displays the reset icon for each snapshot that
contains history data.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 233
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 23 – Snapshots

Button Purpose

Reset Load only calculated values to the selected

snapshot.
When you reset a snapshot, all calculated
variables are reset to the unsolved state and the
simulation is marked as unsolved.
Revert Load all data in the selected snapshot.
When you revert a snapshot, all calculated
variables are reset to the unsolved state and the
simulation is marked as unsolved.
Invariant Load only the invariant data in the selected
snapshot.

Special Load or omit specific snapshot values. See

Specified Snapshot Values for more information.

Flush Flush all the history data for the Trends in the
selected snapshot.
The History column in the list of snapshots
displays the reset icon for each snapshot that
contains history data. After you flush the history
data, you can use the History column to verify
that your snapshot no longer contains history
data.
Delete Delete the selected snapshot.

Example: Selecting Snapshot Values to Load

You can load or omit specific snapshot values when you revert to a snapshot.
1. Open the Snapshot Manager.
2. Select a snapshot.
3. Click Special. A list of options appears. See Specified Snapshot Values for more information.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 234
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 23 – Snapshots

4. Select the check boxes for the values that you want to load, and then click Load. The list of options
disappears and the snapshot loads.

Specified Snapshot Values

You can customize the snapshot values that are updated when you revert to a snapshot. The following figure
shows the available snapshot value options.

The following table defines the available snapshot value options.

Option Description

Variable Calculated Values (Revert This option determines whether the snapshot values for the
and Reset) calculated variables overwrite the current values in the
simulation. If you select this option, the snapshot values
overwrite the current values for all the calculated variables.
This option applies when you revert or reset the simulation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 235
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 23 – Snapshots

Option Description

Variable Specified Values (Revert) This option determines whether the snapshot values for the
specified variables overwrite the current values in the
simulation. If you select this option, the snapshot values
overwrite the current values for all the specified variables.
Note that the snapshot values for invariant variables do not
overwrite the current values unless you also select the
Invariant Values check box.
Invariant Values This option determines whether the snapshot values for
invariant parameters and variables overwrite the current values
in the simulation. If you select this option, the snapshot values
overwrite the current values for all parameters and variables
that you specify as invariant.
Variable Specification Status This option determines whether the snapshot values for the
(Revert) variables' Specified status overwrite the current values in the
simulation. If you select this option, the snapshot values
overwrite the current values for the Specified status for all the
variables.
Variable State Values This option determines whether the snapshot values for the
state variables overwrite the current values in the simulation. If
you select this option, the snapshot values overwrite the
current values for all the state variables. Note that a state
variable is a variable whose value is calculated by the
evaluation and integration of its time derivative.
You can set this option only in Dynamics mode.
Real Parameter Values This option determines whether the snapshot values for the
Real parameters overwrite the current values in the simulation.
If you select this option, the snapshot values overwrite the
current values for all the real parameters. Note that the
snapshot values for invariant parameters do not overwrite the
current values unless you also select the Invariant Values check
box.
History Data This option determines whether the snapshot values for the
historical data that is stored in the Trends overwrites the
current values in the simulation. If you select this option, the
Trend data in the snapshot overwrites the current Trend data in
the simulation.
You can set this option only in Dynamics mode.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 236
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 23 – Snapshots

Option Description

External Tag Data This option determines whether the external tag data in the
snapshot overwrites the current values in the External Data
Manager.
See Reverting to Tag Collections from a Snapshot for more
information on the external tag data that is overwritten.

Managing Snapshots on the Ribbon

You can create and reset snapshots by using commands in the Snapshots group on the Application Ribbon, on
the Process, Fluid Flow, and Dynamics tabs. In addition to the commands, the name of the snapshot that you
last loaded for the simulation appears in the Snapshots group.

Button Purpose

Snap Capture the simulation specifications and values.

Revert Revert values and specification status to the last

snapshot that you took in the mode.
When you revert a snapshot, all calculated
variables are reset to the unsolved state and the
simulation is marked as unsolved.
Manager Open the Snapshot Manager to manage
snapshots that you have captured.

Comparing a Snapshot to the Current Simulation

You can compare a snapshot to the current simulation values and configuration by using the controls available in
the Snapshot Manager.
To compare a snapshot to the current simulation:
1. Open the Snapshot Manager.
2. Select the snapshot that you want to compare to the current simulation.
3. Select Compare.
The Snapshot Comparison window appears.
If your snapshot was captured in a different simulation mode than the current simulation, a warning appears
before the Snapshot Comparison window opens. You can choose to continue to the Snapshot Comparison
window or cancel the comparison.
By default, the snapshot comparison shows differences in specified and unspecified values as well as
specification status. It also shows differences where the parameters and variables are in the snapshot but are
not in the current simulation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 237
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 23 – Snapshots

4. (Optional) Clear the Specifications checkbox to hide any differences in variable specification status.
5. (Optional) Clear the Specified Values checkbox to hide any differences in specified variable values and
parameter values.
6. (Optional) Clear the Show Unmatched Items checkbox to hide any variables and parameters that are in the
snapshot but not in the current simulation.
7. (Optional) In the Tolerance box, enter the acceptable relative difference between snapshot values and
simulation values for the variables and real parameters to appear in the comparison table.

Applying Snapshot Comparison Values to the Current Simulation

You can apply selected snapshot values to the current simulation by using the controls on the Snapshot
Comparison window. This allows you to overwrite only a specified set of simulation values with those from the
snapshot instead of overwriting the entire simulation as you do in a snapshot revert.
To apply Snapshot Comparison values to the current simulation:
1. Open the Snapshot Manager.
2. Select the snapshot that you want to compare to the current simulation.
3. Select Compare.
The Snapshot Comparison window appears.
4. In the comparison table, in the Apply column, select the checkbox for each row that you want to apply to the
simulation.
You cannot select the Apply checkbox for rows in which the specification status is unspecified in both the
snapshot and the current simulation (that is, both the Status and Sim Status checkboxes are cleared).
You can select the checkbox at the top of the Apply column to select all the available checkboxes in Apply
column of the comparison table.
5. Select Apply.
The software overwrites the specification status and value for the selected variables and parameters in the
current simulation with the specification status and value from the snapshot.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 238
Chapter 24

Scenario Manager

About the Scenario Manager

The Scenario Manager allows you to script detailed scenarios so that you can perform a simulation without
manually executing the steps on your own. You store your scenarios as part of the simulation, or within the
simulation Repository.

Concepts
• Script detailed simulation scenarios
• Execute operational steps automatically
• Record simulation steps and save them as a scenario
• Scenarios can save the simulation results as snapshots
• Store scenarios as part of a simulation or the Repository
Actions
• Add, modify, and delete scenario command attributes
• Specify and unspecify variable status values
• Save a snapshot
• Revert and reset to snapshot values
• Export history through the History Manager

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 239
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 24 – Scenario Manager

Opening the Scenario Manager

To open the Scenario Manager:
• On the Process, Fluid Fluid, or Dynamics tab, in the Scenarios group, click the Manager button.

The Scenario Manager appears.

Managing Scenarios
This section describes creating, editing, copying, and deleting scenarios in the Scenario Manager.

Activity Directions

Creating a Scenario
Click Add Scenario .
Editing a Scenario Select a scenario, and click Edit.
Copying a Scenario Select a scenario, and click Copy.

Deleting a Scenario Select a scenario, and click Delete.

Example: Setting Variables, Solving and Saving Snapshots

In this example, the feed temperature will be modified in steps so that you can observe its affect on the power
output of a Turbine model. After each step, the software solves the simulation and captures a snapshot.
Notes: This example uses the U2 - Steam Turbine example simulation. You can import the simulation from the
%userprofile%\My Simulations\Examples directory. Refer to Understanding Command Arguments for
information on the commands used in this example.
1. Create a new scenario.

2. Expand the Configuration section and add a new configuration.

3. Enter VARIABLE as the Command.
4. Enter SET in the Argument 1 column.
5. Select Feed1.T in the Argument 2 column.
6. Enter 500 in the Argument 3 column.
7. Select K in the Argument 4 column.

8. Add a new configuration.

9. Enter SOLVE as the Command.

10. Add a new configuration.

11. Enter SNAPSHOT as the Command.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 240
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 24 – Scenario Manager

12. Enter SAVE in the Argument 1 column.

13. Click Run to execute your scenario.
Repeat steps 2-12 above for each subsequent step at declining intervals at which you want to solve your
simulation and save a snapshot; for example, 450 K, 400 K, etc. For repeatable commands such as solving your
simulation and saving snapshots, consider creating another scenario that you reference through the SCENARIO
command and entering the name of the scenario as the first argument.

Recording a Scenario
You can create a scenario by recording simulation actions so that you do not have to enter them manually in the
Scenario Manager.
To record a scenario:
1. Open the Scenario Manager.
2. Create a new scenario, as discussed in Managing Scenarios, or edit an existing one.

3. Press the Record button.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 241
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 24 – Scenario Manager

4. Complete the simulation actions you want to record in the Scenario Editor; for example, specify or unspecify
a variable, or set or change a variable value. The actions you complete will be recorded in the Scenario Editor
and automatically saved with the scenario you are editing.

5. Press Stop to finish recording.

Running a Scenario
You can run a scenario that you have previously recorded in order to save you from having to manually execute
simulation actions. You can run a scenario from the Dynamics tab on the ribbon, from the Scenario Manager, or
from the Scenario Editor.
To run a scenario from the Dynamics tab:
1. On the Dynamics tab, in the Scenarios group, in the list of scenarios, select the scenario that you want to
run.

2. Click Run Scenario .

AVEVA Process Simulation executes the actions defined in the scenario.
To run a scenario from the Scenario Manager:
1. Open the Scenario Manager.
2. Select the scenario that you want to run, and then click Run.
AVEVA Process Simulation executes the actions defined in the scenario.
To run a scenario from the Scenario Editor:
1. Open the Scenario Manager.
2. Edit a scenario.
3. Click Run.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 242
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 24 – Scenario Manager

AVEVA Process Simulation executes the actions defined in the scenario.

Understanding Command Arguments

You can execute the following command arguments to script detailed simulation scenarios.

Command Argument 1 Argument 2 Argument 3 Argument 4 Argument 5 Argument 6

variable set <variable <variable <uom>

name> description>
This
argument is
optional.
specify <variable
name>

ramp <variable <value> <uom> <time> <uom[time]>

name>

calculate <variable
name>

parameter set <parameter <value> <uom>

name>
This
argument is
optional if the
parameter is
real.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 243
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 24 – Scenario Manager

Command Argument 1 Argument 2 Argument 3 Argument 4 Argument 5 Argument 6

snapshot revert

reset

save

scenario <scenario
name>

solver auto

manual

solve

run until <value> <uom[time]>

until <condition>1

for <value> <uom[time]>

steadystate

steps <value>

mode process

fluidflow

dynamics
(1) The syntax for your conditional statement should follow the same rules for conditions in a model. See Condition Operators
in the AVEVA Process Simulation Model Writing Guide for more information. You can use variables and elements of a vector
variable in your conditional statements. The vector variable must be dimensioned over CompList, StreamList, or an integer-
type parameter.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 244
Chapter 25

Optimization Sets

About Optimization Sets

An Optimization Set contains the objective function, bound options, and independent variables that define a
flowsheet optimization problem. You can manage Optimization Sets in AVEVA Process Simulation through the
Optimization Set Manager.
Concepts
• An Optimization Set contains all the information that you need to maximize or minimize a defined variable.
• The objective function is defined by the value of a single variable that you choose.
• Each Optimization Set must contain at least one independent, specified variable that the AVEVA Process
Simulation solver will free up and calculate for the optimization.
• You can create multiple Optimization Sets
• You can provide upper and lower bounds for the variables in the Optimization Set.
• You can still start an Optimization Set run when variable values are outside the specified upper or lower
bounds.
• If the value of a non-independent variable is outside of its bounds, a warning badge appears for that
variable.
Actions
• Create an Optimization Set from the Optimization Set Manager.
• Select an objective variable.
• Define whether AVEVA Process Simulation minimizes or maximizes the chosen variable.
• Add variables to or remove variables from an Optimization Set.
• Add upper and lower bound values to the variables in an Optimization Set.
• Copy an Optimization Set and then edit it to save time when creating similar Optimization Sets.
• Run an Optimization Set to maximize or minimize the chosen variable.
• Delete an Optimization Set.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 245
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 25 – Optimization Sets

Opening the Optimization Set Manager

To open the Optimization Set Manager:
• On the Process or Fluid Flow tab, in the Optimization group, click Open Optimization Set Manager.

The Optimization Set Manager appears.

Managing Optimization Sets

This section describes creating, editing, copying, running, and deleting Optimization Sets.

Activity Directions

Creating an Optimization Set On the Optimization Set Manager, click Add Optimization Set

.
Editing an Optimization Set On the Optimization Set Manager, select an Optimization Set,
and click Edit. The Optimization Set Editor appears.
Specifying the type of objective On the Optimization Set Editor, expand the Objective Function
function to use for an area. Select Maximize or Minimize.
Optimization Set

Specifying the goal of the On the Optimization Set Editor, expand the Objective Function
optimization for an Optimization area. In the box, type the name of the variable that represents
Set the objective function (for example, HX1.Duty). A list of available
variables appears as you type.
Adding a variable to an On the Optimization Set Editor, expand the Variables area. Click
Optimization Set Add Variable . A new row appears in the list of variables. In
the Name column for the new row, type the name of the variable
that you want to add. A list of available variables appears as you
type.
Alternatively, drag a variable from any open Property Inspector
onto the list of variables in the Optimization Set Editor.
You can add both specified and calculated variables to an
Optimization Set.
The AVEVA Process Simulation solver modifies the values of the
variables in the Optimization Set to maximize or minimize the
objective function. At least one variable in the Optimization Set
should affect the objective function when you change the value
of that variable.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 246
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 25 – Optimization Sets

Activity Directions

Adding upper and lower bounds On the Optimization Set Editor, expand the Variables area. In the
to variables in an Optimization Set Lower Bound column, enter the minimum value to which the
solver can adjust the associated variable. In the Upper Bound
column, enter the maximum value to which the solver can adjust
the associated variable.
You can start an Optimization Set run when the variable values
are outside of the specified bounds. However, if the value of a
non-independent variable is outside of its bounds, a warning
badge appears for that variable.
Deleting a variable from an On the Optimization Set Editor, expand the Variables area. Select
Optimization Set the variable, and click Delete Variable .
Alternatively, select the variable and press Delete.
Running an Optimization Set On the Optimization Set Manager, select an Optimization Set,
and click Run.
Alternatively, on the Optimization Set Editor for the Optimization
Set, click Run.
Or
On the Process or Fluid Flow tabs, in the Optimization group,
select an Optimization Set in the list, and then click Run the
selected optimization set .
Copying an Optimization Set On the Optimization Set Manager, select an Optimization Set,
and click Copy.
Deleting an Optimization Set On the Optimization Set Manager, select an Optimization Set,
and click Delete.

Changing the Independent Status of a Variable in an Optimization

Set
A well-posed simulation will have a locally unique solution if it has the same number of equations and calculated
variables. However, if the simulation has more calculated variables than equations, there are an infinite number
of solutions from which an Optimizer can choose the "best" one (for example, the one that maximizes profit). We
call these extra variables "Independent" or "Independent and calculated."
You can use the Independent flag on the Optimization Set Editor to define the Independents. AVEVA Process
Simulation automatically sets specified variables as Independents when you add them to the Optimization Set.
You can change the Independent status for any specified variable in the Optimization Set. When the variable is
an Independent, AVEVA Process Simulation manipulates this ordinarily-specified variable to help achieve the
desired optimization.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 247
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 25 – Optimization Sets

You should not set calculated variables as Independents. If you do, an error badge appears that indicates the
discrepancy.
The specified and calculated status for variables may change based on the simulation mode. You may need to
change the variables that you set as Independents based on the simulation mode or create similar Optimization
Sets with different Independents for each simulation mode. For example, by default, the mass flow, W, of a
Source is specified in Process mode and calculated in Fluid Flow mode. If you set W as an Independent in an
Optimization Set, you can run the Optimization Set in Process mode but a warning appears if you try to run the
Optimization Set in Fluid Flow mode.
To change the independent status of a variable in an Optimization Set:
1. Open the Optimization Set Manager.
2. Select the Optimization Set that contains the variable that you want to change, and then click Edit. The
Optimization Set Editor appears.
3. Expand the Variables section if it is not already visible.

4. In the Independent flag column, click the flag icon for the variable.
A colored flag icon indicates that the ordinarily-specified variable is an Independent for an optimization run.
A gray flag icon indicates that the variable should behave as it does outside of an optimization run. For
example, if the variable is calculated in the current simulation mode, it remains calculated in the
optimization run. If it is specified in the current simulation mode, it remains specified during the
optimization run.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 248
Chapter 26

Case Studies

About Case Studies

A Case Study allows you to systematically modify the values of variables or parameters to determine how those
changes affect the simulation. That is, it allows you to analyze and understand the relationship between certain
design variables and the observed process performance.
A Case Study consists of a set of test cases, one for each combination of initial values and step changes in the
manipulated variables and parameters. During a Case Study run, the software re-solves the simulation for each
case. At the end of the Case Study run, the simulation remains at the values from the last case in the Case Study.
Important: Because the simulation retains the values from the last case in a Case Study, we highly recommend
that you capture a snapshot of your simulation before you run any Case Studies.
You can generate a plot of the case data to visualize the effects of your variable or parameter changes on the
simulation.
You can use Case Studies for numerous, far-reaching applications, including but not limited to:
• Developing a robust engineering design.
• Creating controller design studies.
• Performing simple optimization by enumerating the available options.
• Validating the thermodynamics of the system.
Concepts
• Use the Case Study Manager to create and manage your Case Studies.
• Use the Case Study Editor to configure your Case Studies. You can access the Case Study Editor from the Case
Study Manager.
• You can run a Case Study only in Process or Fluid Flow mode.
• You can add as many variables and parameters to a Case Study as needed. This includes:
• The variables and parameters that you want to change (manipulated variables and parameters).
• The variables for which you want to see the effects of those changes (observed variables).
• You can add only Real or Integer parameters to a Case Study.
• A Case Study must have at least one manipulated variable or parameter and one calculated variable or
parameter to run.
• You can manipulate up to two variables and parameters at a time in the following combinations:

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 249
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

• Two variables
• One variable and one parameter
• Two parameters
• For each manipulated variable or parameter, you must set the minimum value, maximum value, and number
of steps to define the different cases in the Case Study.
• The software automatically calculates the step change value after you set the minimum value, maximum
value, and number of steps for each manipulated variable or parameter. You cannot change this value.
• The units of measure (UOMs) in the Case Study Editor always match those in the simulation. If you want to
change the UOMs for a Case Study, you must change them in the simulation.
• Depending on the size of your simulation and the number of cases in your Case Study, you may have to wait
a significant amount of time for your Case Study run to complete. See Number of Cases and Performance for
more information.
• You can set the snapshot that you want to revert the simulation to if a case in the Case Study fails to solve.
• The Case Study retains case data for both failed and successful solves so that you can see the variable and
parameter values that the solver struggles with.
• The order of the variables and parameters in the Case Study determines which variable or parameter the
software manipulates first. See Reordering Variables and Parameters in a Case Study for more information.
• After a Case Study run, the simulation remains at the values from the last case in the Case Study.
• After you run a Case Study, you can generate a plot for the case data to visualize the effects of the changes in
the manipulated variables or parameters.
• The Case Study plot remembers your plot configuration settings so that you don't have to reconfigure the
plot every time you open it.
Actions
• Create a Case Study.
• Rename a Case Study.
• Add variables and parameters to a Case Study.
• Set up to two variables or parameters as manipulated values for each Case Study.
• Define each case in a Case Study by entering the minimum value, maximum value, and number of steps for
the manipulated variables or parameters.
• Run a Case Study.
• Stop a Case Study run if it takes too long to complete.
• Copy the Case Study results and paste them into a table or spreadsheet in another software program, such
as Microsoft Excel.
• Generate a plot for the result data in a Case Study.
• Manually return the simulation to the initial starting point before you ran a Case Study.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 250
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

Opening the Case Study Manager

To open the Optimization Set Manager:
• On the Process or Fluid Flow tab, in the Case Study group, select Open CaseStudy Manager.

The Case Study Manager appears.

Managing Case Studies

This section describes creating, editing, copying, running, and deleting Case Studies.

Activity Directions

Creating a Case Study

On the Case Study Manager, select Add Case Study .
Editing a Case Study On the Case Study Manager, select a Case Study, and then select
Edit. The Case Study Editor appears.
Running a Case Study On the Case Study Manager, select a Case Study, and then select
Run.
Alternatively, on the Case Study Editor for the Case Study, select
Run.
Or
On the Process or Fluid Flow tabs, in the Case Study group,
select a Case Study in the list, and then select Run the selected
case study .

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 251
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

Activity Directions

Stopping a Case Study run On the Case Study Manager, select a running Case Study, and
then select Stop.
Alternatively, on the Case Study Editor for the Case Study, select
Stop.
Or
On the Process or Fluid Flow tabs, in the Case Study group,
select a running Case Study in the list, and then select Stop the
selected case study .
Renaming a Case Study On the Case Study Manager, select the Case Study, and then
double-click the Name column. Then, enter the new name for
the Case Study.
Alternatively, on the Case Study Editor for the Case Study, in the
Name box, enter the new name for the Case Study.
Copying a Case Study On the Case Study Manager, select a Case Study, and then select
Copy.
Deleting a Case Study On the Case Study Manager, select a Case Study, and then select
Delete.

Specifying the Fallback Snapshot for a Case Study

If a case in a Case Study fails to solve, the software reverts the simulation to the fallback snapshot before it
solves the next case. The fallback snapshot should be an existing snapshot that you captured before you started
your Case Study run.
If you choose to manipulate an invariant parameter or variable in the Case Study, the current state of the
simulation won't match the configuration in the fallback snapshot because a regular snapshot revert does not
include invariant values. In this situation, please take extra care to validate the results for any cases that follow a
failed case.
To specify the fallback snapshot for a Case Study:
1. On the Case Study Manager, select the Case Study, and then select Edit.
The Case Study opens in the Case Study Editor.
2. In the General area, in the Snapshot list, select the snapshot that you want to use as the fallback snapshot.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 252
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

Adding a Variable or Parameter to a Case Study

You can add any type of variable to a Case Study. However, you can add only Real and Integer types of
parameters to a Case Study.
To add a variable or parameter to a Case Study:
1. On the Case Study Manager, select the Case Study, and then select Edit.
The Case Study opens in the Case Study Editor.
2. In the Variables and Parameters area, select Add manipulated variable or parameter or observed variable
.
A new row appears in the list of variables and parameters.

3. In the Name column for the new row, enter the name of the variable or parameter that you want to add.
A list of available variables and parameters appears as you type. You can select a variable or parameter from
this list to automatically complete the name of the variable or parameter in the Name column.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 253
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

4. Navigate away from the new variable or parameter in the list to automatically populate the Type and Units
columns.
Currently, the Units value comes from the simulation, and you cannot change it in the Case Study. If you
want to change this value for the Case Study, you must change the unit of measure (UOM) in the simulation.
5. (Optional) Specify the variable or parameter as a manipulated variable or parameter.
You can specify up to two variables and parameters as manipulated. See Specifying the Manipulated
Variables and Parameters for a Case Study for more information.

Specifying the Manipulated Variables and Parameters for a Case

Study
For each Case Study, you can manipulate up to two variables and parameters at a time in the following
combinations:
• Two variables
• One variable and one parameter
• Two parameters
Each Case Study must include at least one manipulated variable or parameter.
You should specify only independent, specified variables as manipulated variables.
To specify the manipulated variables and parameters for a Case Study:
1. On the Case Study Manager, select the Case Study, and then select Edit.
The Case Study opens in the Case Study Editor.

2. In the Variables and Parameters area, in the Manipulated flag column, select the flag icon for the
variables and parameters that you want to manipulate.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 254
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

3. For each manipulated variable or parameter:

a. In the Min column, enter the minimum value for the variable or parameter.
This serves as the starting point for the variable or parameter and is the value in the first case of the Case
Study.
b. In the Max column, enter the maximum value for the variable or parameter.
This serves as the endpoint for the variable or parameter and is the value in the last case of the Case
Study.
c. In the Steps column, enter the number of steps that you want the software to take to transition from the
Min value to the Max value.
The software automatically calculates the Size value, which is the change in the variable or parameter value
for each step. You cannot change this value.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 255
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

You can enter Min, Max, and Steps values for observed variables. However, the software does not change
the values for observed variables during a Case Study run.
You should always set the Min, Max, and Steps values for a manipulated Integer parameter such that the
Size value is a whole number. Otherwise, a warning appears for the Case Study and your cases likely won't
solve.

Number of Cases and Performance

The number of cases in a Case Study depends on the number of steps that you define for your manipulated
variables and parameters. If you have more than one manipulated variable or parameter, the growth in the
number of cases is multiplicative:

where
nm is the number of manipulated variables or parameters
ns,i is the number of steps associated with the manipulation of variable or parameter i
nt is the total number of cases
Currently, nm must be less than or equal to 2.
When you run a Case Study, the software re-solves the simulation for each case. Currently, the software solves
the entire simulation, and there is no way to isolate a portion of the simulation to limit the solve. If you use too
many steps or your simulation is very large, the Case Study may take a considerable amount of time to run.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 256
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

Reordering Variables and Parameters in a Case Study

The Case Study manipulates the variables in nested loops. The order of the variables and parameters determines
how the loops execute, and is therefore very important.
For example, consider the situation where we have two manipulated variables, A and B. If A appears before B in
the list of variables, the Case Study runs all steps for B while keeping A constant. It then increments A and runs
all steps for B again. It repeats this cycle until it reaches the maximum value of A, as shown in the following
figure.

Currently, you must delete and re-add parameters and variables to change their order in the list of variables and
parameters.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 257
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

To move a variable or parameter in a Case Study to the bottom of the list:

1. On the Case Study Editor, in the Variables and Parameters area, delete the variable or parameter from the
Case Study by doing one of the following:
▪ Select the variable or parameter, and then select Delete manipulated variable(s) or parameter(s) or
observed variable(s) .
▪ Select the variable or parameter, and then select the Delete key.
2. Re-add the variable or parameter to the Case Study. See Adding a Variable or Parameter to a Case Study for
more information.
The variable or parameter now appears at the bottom of the list.
3. If the variable or parameter is a manipulated variable or parameter, re-specify it as a manipulated variable or
parameter. See Specifying the Manipulated Variables and Parameters for a Case Study for more information.
To move a variable or parameter in a Case Study to the top of the list:
1. On the Case Study Editor, in the Variables and Parameters area, delete all other variables and parameters
from the Case Study by doing one of the following:
▪ Select all other variables and parameters, and then select Delete manipulated variable(s) or
parameter(s) or observed variable(s) .
▪ Select all other variables or parameters, and then select the Delete key.
The variable or parameter now appears at the top of the list as the only variable or parameter in the Case
Study.
2. Re-add the deleted variables and parameters from the preceding step to the Case Study. See Adding a
Variable or Parameter to a Case Study for more information.
3. If any of the deleted variables or parameters were manipulated variables or parameters, re-specify them as
manipulated variables and parameters. See Specifying the Manipulated Variables and Parameters for a Case
Study for more information.

Returning the Simulation to the Initial Point After a Case Study Run
During a Case Study run, the software re-solves the simulation for each case. At the end of the Case Study run,
the simulation remains at the values from the last case in the Case Study.
Important: Because the simulation retains the values from the last case in a Case Study, we highly recommend
that you capture a snapshot of your simulation before you run any Case Studies.
If you choose to manipulate an invariant parameter or variable in the Case Study, the current state of the
simulation won't match the configuration in any snapshots that you captured before the Case Study run because
a regular snapshot revert does not include invariant values. In this situation, you can perform a special snapshot
revert to include the invariant parameters and variables.
If you do not have a snapshot that you can fall back on, you can still return the simulation to the initial point by
discarding all simulation changes for the current simulation session. This may result in lost data if you made
changes to the simulation or Case Study in the current session, so we recommend that you use this option only if
absolutely necessary.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 258
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

To return the simulation to the initial point by using an existing snapshot:

1. Open the Snapshot Manager.
2. Select the snapshot that you want to revert the simulation to.
3. Select Special.
4. Ensure that the following checkboxes are selected:
▪ Variable Specified Values (Revert)
▪ Variable Calculated Values (Revert and Reset)
▪ Real Parameter Values (Revert)
▪ Variable Specification Status (Revert)
▪ Invariant Values

5. Select Load.
The simulation reverts to the selected snapshot, including any invariant values.
To return the simulation to the initial point without using a snapshot:
1. On the Canvas, right-click the tab for the simulation, and then select Discard Changes.
Important: Discarding changes undoes all changes made to the simulation since you last opened it. You may
lose data if you made any changes to the simulation other than running the Case Study.
2. Reopen the simulation.
The simulation opens to the initial point before you ran the Case Study. All Case Study results are gone.
3. If you made changes to your simulation other than running the Case Study, repeat them for this simulation
session.
4. (Recommended) Capture a snapshot of your simulation.

Viewing the Results of a Case Study

As a Case Study runs, the solution results for each case appear in the Case Study Editor, in the Results Table area.
This includes the following information:

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 259
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

• The solution status for the case (the Solved column value).
• The time that the solver took to solve the case (the Duration column value).
• The values for all variables and parameters that you have added to the Case Study.
You can use the Duration value to determine which cases are giving the solver the most trouble. If you have
failed cases, you can use the Solved value to determine which values for the manipulated variables and
parameters result in an unconverged simulation.
You can generate plots for your Case Study results to visualize the effects of the changes in the manipulated
variables and parameters. See Generating and Configuring a Case Study Plot for more information.
To view the results of a Case Study:
1. On the Case Study Manager, select the Case Study, and then select Edit.
The Case Study opens in the Case Study Editor.
2. In the Results Table area, review the solution results for each case.
If you do not see any cases listed in the Results Table area, run the Case Study to populate the results.
Depending on the size of your simulation and the number of cases in your Case Study, it may take a
significant amount of time for the Case Study to run. See Number of Cases and Performance for more
information.

Copying the Results of a Case Study

If you want to use a third-party tool (such as Microsoft Excel) to work with or visualize your Case Study results,
you can copy your Case Study result in tabular form and paste them into a table or spreadsheet in your preferred
third-party tool.
To copy the entire results table for your Case Study:
1. On the Case Study Manager, select the Case Study, and then select Edit.
The Case Study opens in the Case Study Editor.
2. In the Results Table area, select the Case column.
The entire results table is selected.
3. Press Ctrl+C.
To copy a single column of the results table for your Case Study:
1. On the Case Study Manager, select the Case Study, and then select Edit.
The Case Study opens in the Case Study Editor.
2. In the Results Table area, select the column heading for the column that you're interested in.
The entire column is selected.
3. Press Ctrl+C.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 260
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

Generating and Configuring a Case Study Plot

You can visualize your Case Study results by generating a Case Study plot. For each variable and parameter in the
Case Study, you can choose:
• Whether the variable or parameter appears on the plot.
• Whether the variable or parameter appears on the bottom or left axis.
• Whether the variable or parameter is parametric.
If you assign a variable or parameter as parametric, the software groups the results by the distinct values for that
variable or parameter. That is, you see individual lines for each value of that variable or parameter. Typically, you
assign a manipulated variable or parameter as parametric. Otherwise, you see one group for each case, which
makes the plot very difficult to read.
The Case Study plot remembers your plot configuration settings so that you don't have to reconfigure the plot
every time you open it.
To generate and configure a Case Study plot:
1. On the Case Study Manager, select the Case Study, and then select Edit.
The Case Study opens in the Case Study Editor.
2. If there are Case Study results in the Results Table area, select Show Plot. Otherwise, run the Case Study,
and then select Show Plot.
The Case Study Plot appears with the configuration section expanded.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 261
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

3. In the Variables area, in the Axis column, select one of the following for each variable and parameter:
▪ Left: The variable or parameter values appear on the left axis. Typically, the left axis is reserved for
dependent values, but you can choose whether the values on this axis are dependent or independent.
▪ Bottom: The variable or parameter values appear on the bottom axis. Typically, the bottom axis is
reserved for independent values, but you can choose whether the values on this axis are dependent or
independent.
▪ Parametric: The software should group results by the values of this variable or parameter. A separate
line appears for each value of the variable or parameter. You should use this option only for a
manipulated variable or parameter.

4. In the Show column, select the checkbox for each variable and parameter that you want to appear on the
plot.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 262
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 26 – Case Studies

5. (Optional) In the Configure area, in the Title box, enter a new title for the Case Study plot.
6. (Optional) If you want the scaling of the left axis to be logarithmic, in the Configure area, in the Left Axis
Scale list, select Logarithmic.
Currently, you can change the scaling for the left axis only.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 263
Chapter 27

External Data Manager

The External Data Manager allows you to interface with tag data in external databases. It contains tag
collections. Each tag collection connects to a single external database. Currently, AVEVA Process Simulation
supports connections to OSIsoft PI Data Archive and PI AF Server only. Please see the OSIsoft PI System
documentation for more information on how to install and configure PI System.
After you add tags to a tag collection, you can then map those tags to model variables within AVEVA Process
Simulation.

Concepts
• The External Data Manager contains tag collections.
• The Tag Collection Editor allows you to connect to an external database and add tags to the tag collection.
• The Read/Write External Data window allows you to specify the time window for the data that you want to
read from the external database and to manage the data transfer between the external database, the tag
collection, and the associated model variables.
• AVEVA Process Simulation uses the time-weighted average of the data in the time window when it imports
the tag data. If the external database does not contain any data for a tag within the specified time window,
the tag value remains blank.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 264
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

Actions
• Create and edit a tag collection.
• Connect to an OSIsoft PI Data Archive server.
• Connect to an OSIsoft PI Asset Framework server.
• Add tags to a tag collection.
• Search tags in the external database.
• Map tags to AVEVA Process Simulation model variables.
• Export the tag mapping configuration to a .csv file.
• Import a tag mapping configuration (.csv) file.
• Change the time selection for a tag collection.
• Specify the minimum and maximum value for a tag.
• Specify the data clipping option for tag values that are outside the minimum and maximum range for a tag.
• Read in tag values from an external database.
• Screen new tag values read in from an external database.
• Apply screened tag values from an external database to AVEVA Process Simulation model variables.
• Update the Last Good Value data for tags after you have applied the screened tag values to the model
variables and validated that the simulation converges without problems.
• Get model variables for output tags and apply them to the tag values.
• Write the tag values for the output tags back to the external database.

Connecting to an OSIsoft PI Data Archive Server

You must have the OSIsoft PI Asset Framework (AF) software development kit (SDK) installed on the same
computer in which you installed AVEVA Process Simulation to successfully connect to an OSIsoft PI Data Archive
server, and therefore to the PI databases.
The PI AF SDK uses Windows authentication to connect to PI servers.
To connect to a PI Data Archive server:
1. Install the PI AF SDK on the same computer on which you installed AVEVA Process Simulation.
You can access the PI AF SDK from the PI AF installation package. Please see the PI AF documentation for
more information on how to install the PI AF SDK.
2. Open any AVEVA Process Simulation simulation.
3. Open the External Data Manager.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 265
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

4. Create a new tag collection.

5. Select the tag collection and then select Define. The Tag Collection Editor appears.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 266
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

6. In the General area, in the Provider list, ensure that you see OSI PI (PI Tags).
7. In the Server box, type the name of the PI Data Archive server that you want to connect to.

8. Select Search or Check all tags to establish a connection to the server. The Server badge indicates the
connection status.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 267
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

Connecting to an OSIsoft PI Asset Framework Server

You must have the OSIsoft PI Asset Framework (AF) software development kit (SDK) installed on the same
computer in which you installed AVEVA Process Simulation to successfully connect to a PI AF server, and
therefore to the PI databases.
You can connect to a PI AF server to add attributes from the PI AF server as tags in your tag collections. Attributes
from a PI AF server can include equipment configuration information and process data. In some cases, the
process data is PI point data pulled from a PI Data Archive server. Currently, the Tag Collection Editor supports
only PI AF attributes that:
• Reference a PI point.
• Are single-precision real values (that is, the Value Type in PI AF is Single).
• Are double-precision real values (that is, the Value Type in PI AF is Double).
Each attribute resides in a parent element, which typically represents a physical piece of equipment. When you
search for PI AF attributes in the Tag Collection Editor, you must search for the PI AF element to load a list of
available attributes.
To connect to a PI AF server:
1. Install the PI AF SDK on the same computer on which you installed AVEVA Process Simulation.
You can access the PI AF SDK from the PI AF installation package. Please see the PI AF documentation for
more information on how to install the PI AF SDK.
2. Open any AVEVA Process Simulation simulation.
3. Open the External Data Manager.

4. Create a new tag collection.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 268
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

5. Select the tag collection, and then select Define.

The Tag Collection Editor appears.

6. In the General area, in the Provider list, select OSI PI (AF Attributes).
7. In the Server box, enter the name of the PI AF server and database that you want to connect to. Separate
the server name and database name with a backslash (\).

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 269
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

8. (Optional) In the AF Root box, enter the root path for an element that contains numerous attributes that you
want to add to the tag collection.
When you use the controls on the Tags Configuration toolbar to add a tag to the tag collection, the software
copies the text in the AF Root box into the Tag Name box. This allows you to quickly append the text to
specify the desired attribute instead of typing the full attribute name, which is typically a long string.
The AF Root text does not affect the attributes that appear in the Tags Browser when you search for an
attribute. That is, a tag search finds attributes from any root path as long as the attribute meets the search
criteria.
If you change the AF Root, then the software updates all tags that include the old AF Root path to use the
new AF Root path. You should perform another tag check after you change the AF Root.
Tip: The Tag Name box always shows the short name for the attribute (Element|Attribute format) instead of
the full attribute name until you edit the Tag Name. However, you can hover over the Tag Name to see the
full attribute name on the tooltip.

9. Select Search or Check all tags to establish a connection to the server.

The Server badge indicates the connection status.

Managing Tag Collections

On the External Data Manager, you can create, rename, and delete tag collections. On the Tag Collection Editor,
you can connect a tag collection to an external database, add tags to the tag collection, and map the tags to
AVEVA Process Simulation model variables.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 270
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

Activity Directions

Opening the External Data Manager On the Process, Fluid Flow, or Dynamics tab, in the External

Data group, select Open External Data manager .

Creating a Tag Collection
On the External Data Manager, select Add tag collection .
Opening the Tag Collection Editor On the External Data Manager, select the tag collection that you
want to modify and then select Define.
Connecting a Tag Collection to an External On the Tag Collection Editor, in the Provider list, select the type
Database of database that you want to connect to. Currently, AVEVA
Process Simulation can connect to OSIsoft PI Data Archive servers
and AF attributes only. In the Server list, type the name of the
database that you want to connect to.
Adding a Tag to the Tag Collection If you know the server name of the tag, in the Tags Configuration
area, select Add Tag Mapping . A new line appears in the tag
list. Select the Tag Name column on the new line and type the
server name of the tag. Select Check all tags to verify that the
tag is present on the server.
Alternatively, you can search for a tag and add it from the Tags
Browser area.
Searching for a Tag On the Tag Collection Editor, in the Tags Browser area, in the
Contains box, type a search string, and then select Search. A list
of tags that contain the search string appears. Select next to a
tag to add it to the tag collection. The added tag appears in the
Tags Configuration area.
If you are searching for attributes in a PI Asset Framework (AF)
server, you must search for the parent element to load a list of
available attributes.
Mapping a Tag to a Model Variable On the Tag Collection Editor, in the Tags Configuration area,
select the Model variable column for the tag that you want to
map. Type the name of the model variable that you want to map
to the tag. A list of model variables in the simulation appears as
you type.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 271
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

Activity Directions

Exporting a Tag Mapping Configuration On the Tag Collection Editor, in the Tags Configuration area,
select Export tag mapping table to a csv file . Browse to the
folder in which you want to save the tag mapping file, type the
name of the file, and then select Save.
The tag mapping file includes all the information from the Tags
Configuration area for archival purposes. However, the software
loads only the Sim Variable and Tag Name values if you import
the .csv file in another simulation.
Importing a Tag Mapping Configuration On the Tag Collection Editor, in the Tags Configuration area,
select Import a pre-configured tag mapping table csv file .
Browse to and select the .csv file that contains the desired tag
mapping, and then select Open.
The import loads the Sim Variable and Tag Name values, but
does not load Sim Units or Tag Units. The Sim Units update to
the units of measure (UOMs) from the simulation. The Tag Units
update to the UOMs from the database the next time you select
Check all tags .
If you have added UOM mappings for OSIsoft PI tags, the Sim
Units values update according to the corresponding Tag Units
values the next time you select Check all tags . See Adding
UOM Mappings for OSIsoft PI Tags for more information.
Checking All Tags Across All Tag Collections On the External Data Manager, select Check All. The software
checks all the tags in all the tag collections, and all Status badges
update to show the current status.
You can exclude tags from the tag check. See Excluding Tags from
the Tag Check for more information.
Example: Adding a Tag to a Tag Collection and Mapping It to a Model Variable
1. Open the External Data Manager.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 272
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

2. Select the tag collection that you want to add the tag to, and then select Define. The Tag Collection Editor
appears.

3. In the Tags Browser area, in the Contains box, type a text string that appears in the name of the tag that you
want to add.
For this example, we type CC2 to search for all tags related to the CC2 unit.

4. Select Search.
A list of tags that match the search criteria appears.

5. Select next to a tag to add it to the tag collection.

The added tag appears in the Tags Configuration area.
For this example, we add the CC2:TEMP tag.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 273
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

6. In the Tags Configuration area, select the Sim Variable column for the newly added tag. Type the name of a
model variable that has the same dimension as the tag.
A list of available model variables appears as you type.
For this example, CC2:TEMP represents a temperature variable, so we map it to the temperature variable in
the CC2Feed unit, CC2Feed.T.

7. In the Sim Units column, select the UOM for the model variable so that it uses the same UOM as the tag.
For this example, the UOM for the model variable does not match the UOM for the tag, so we change the
UOM for the model variable to C, the UOM for the tag.

If you have added UOM mappings for OSIsoft PI tags, the Sim Units values should automatically update
based on the mappings that you provide in the UOM mapping file, and you should be able to skip this step.
See Adding UOM Mappings for OSIsoft PI Tags for more information.

8. Select Check all tags to ensure that the tag mapping is valid.

Adding UOM Mappings for OSIsoft PI Tags

By default, when you add a tag to a tag collection, the Sim Units value uses the unit of measure (UOM) that's
currently selected in the simulation for the associated model variable. You can change the Sim Units value to
match the Tag Units value as needed. However, if you repeatedly make the same changes, you can instead add a
UOM mapping for OSIsoft PI tags. Any defined UOM mappings automatically override the Sim Units value based
on the corresponding Tag Units value.
We store the UOM mappings in the External Data UOM Autocomplete.csv file in the AVEVA Process Simulation
installation. The location of this file changes based on how you installed AVEVA Process Simulation. The following
table shows the possible folder locations for this file.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 274
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

Edition Install Folder

Location

Single-user Default %LocalAppData%\SimSci\SimCentral\Server\Extensions\OSIPIProvider

Single-user Custom <InstallFolder>\SimCentral\Server\Extensions\OSIPIProvider, where <InstallFolder>
is the destination folder that you specified during the install
All-users Default %ProgramFiles%\SimSci\SimCentral\Server\Extensions\OSIPIProvider
All-users Custom <InstallFolder>\SimCentral\Server\Extensions\OSIPIProvider, where <InstallFolder>
is the destination folder that you specified during the install
The External Data UOM Autocomplete.csv file that comes along with the install already contains a few example
UOM mappings. These examples show the format that you should use when you add your own UOM mappings
to the file.
To add UOM mappings:
1. In Windows File Explorer, browse to the External Data UOM Autocomplete.csv file, and then open it in any
text editor or in Microsoft Excel.
2. At the end of the list of comma separated values, on a new row, type the Tag Units value, a comma, and the
corresponding Sim Units value.
If you opened the .csv file in Microsoft Excel, you do not need to type the comma to separate the two UOM
entries. Instead, ensure that you type the Tag Units value in column A and the Sim Units value in column B.
3. Repeat step 2 until you've added all the desired UOM mappings.
4. Save and close the file.
We recommend that you always save and use the included .csv file and do not use the Save As option to
create a new version of the .csv file. This ensures that the .csv file uses the proper text encoding (UTF-8) so
that all special characters, such as the degree symbol, appear correctly in AVEVA Process Simulation.
5. Restart AVEVA Process Simulation if you had it open while you were adding UOM mappings.

Excluding Tags from the Tag Check

When you select Check all tags on the Tag Collection Editor or Check All on the main External Data Manager
window, the software checks the tags to ensure they meet the following criteria:
• The tag exists on the server.
• The tag's data type corresponds to real values.
• The tag mapping is complete.
If a tag doesn't meet this criteria, warning or error badges appear on the tag and on the associated tag
collection.
You may have tags in a tag collection that are placeholders and aren't completely configured. These tags can
cause warnings to appear for the tag collections when you perform a tag check. You can avoid these warnings by
excluding the tags from the tag check.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 275
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

Excluded tags also do not participate in the following tag operations:

• Read
• Screen
• Set
• Update Last Good
• Get
• Write
To exclude a tag from the tag check:
1. On the External Data Manager, select the tag collection that contains the tag that you want to exclude.
2. Select Define.
The Tag Collection Editor appears.
3. In the Tags Configuration section, clear the checkbox for the tag that you want to exclude.
The Status badge for the tag disappears, and the tag no longer participates in the tag check.

Changing the Time Selection for a Tag Collection

To change the time selection for a tag collection:
1. Open the External Data Manager.

2. Select the tag collection that you want to modify, and then select Transfer.
The Read/Write External Data window appears.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 276
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

3. In the Time Selection section, do one of the following:

▪ In the Start Date & Time box, type the date and time that you want to use as the start of the data
collection. You can use the drop-down menu to select the date from a calendar view.
▪ Select the Insert Current Date & Time checkbox to set the Start Date & Time value to the current date
and time.
4. In the Time Span box, type the value of the time span and then select the units of measure for the time
span. You can set the value to a negative number. This indicates that the time span will encompass data
going backwards in time from the specified start date and time.

Reading In Tag Values from an External Database

When you read in tag values from an external database, AVEVA Process Simulation retrieves the current time-
averaged tag values from the external database and copies them into the Tag Value data in the External Data
Manager. It does not copy the values to the associated model variables until you decide to set the model
variables to the tag values. See Setting Model Variables to the Screened Tag Values for more information.
To read in tag values from an external database:
1. Open the External Data Manager.
2. Select the tag collection that contains the tags that you want to read in values for, and then select Transfer.
The Read/Write External Data window appears.
3. In the Tag List section, in the Input Processing area, select Read.
The Tag Value data in the table updates to the current time-averaged values from the external database.
The Quality column shows the current status of the tag values.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 277
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

4. (Optional) If you know the quality of a retrieved tag value does not match the value shown in the Quality
column, press and hold Shift and then select the tag's Quality badge to cycle through the different quality
statuses:
▪ Green: The tag has a good quality status.
▪ Red: The tag has a bad quality status.
▪ Yellow: The tag has a questionable quality status.

Setting Data Clipping Options for Tag Data

Before you screen tag values, you can specify a valid range for tag values and clip incoming tag data to values
within the specified range or ignore values that fall outside of the range.
In the Read/Write External Data window, you can set the Min and Max value for a tag. The If Under Min and If
Over Max selections then determine how the software clips the data if the incoming tag values are less than or
greater than the specified Min and Max values, respectively. Typically, the Min and Max values represent
physical or process-related constraints on the tag values. For example, a valve that cannot open more than 80%
for safety reasons should have a Max value of 0.80 on its Pos variable.
To set data clipping options for a tag:
1. Open the External Data Manager.
2. Select the tag collection that contains the tags that you want to set data clipping options for, and then select
Transfer.
The Read/Write External Data window appears.
3. In the Tag List section, in the Min and Max columns, enter the minimum and maximum values for the tag
data, respectively.
If you leave the Min and Max value blank, the software does not apply any data clipping for the tag data.

4. In the If Under Min and If Over Max lists, select the action that the software should take if the tag value is
outside the Min or Max value, respectively.
▪ Clip: Set the Screened Value to the Minimum value or Maximum value, respectively.
▪ Use Last Good Value: Set the Screened Value to the Last Good Value.
▪ Report Error: Leave the Screened Value blank. In addition, the system logs an error, but currently does
not display the error in the Log pane.
▪ Do Nothing: Leave the Screened Value blank.
The next time you screen tag values, the software clips the data according to your specifications.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 278
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

Screening Tag Values

When you screen tag values, AVEVA Process Simulation analyzes the quality status for each tag and updates the
Screened Value data in the External Data Manager. When you set the model variables to the tag values, the
software uses the Screened Value data instead of the direct Tag Value data to avoid updating the model
variables to tag values of bad quality.
If the quality status for a tag is good (green Quality badge) or questionable (yellow Quality badge), the software
updates the Screened Value to the current Tag Value.
If the quality status for a tag is bad (red Quality badge), the software updates the Screened Value according to
the If Bad Quality selection.
The Screened Value data in the External Data Manager always appears in the internal units of measure (UOMs).
You may need to convert a Screened Value to accurately compare it to a Tag Value or Sim Value. See Internal
Units of Measure for more information.
To screen tag values:
1. Open the External Data Manager.
2. Select the tag collection that contains the tag values that you want to screen, and then select Transfer.
The Read/Write External Data window appears.
3. In the Tag List section, in the If Bad Quality list for each tag, select the action that the software should take if
the tag has a bad quality status.
▪ Do Nothing: Leave the Screened Value blank and do not update the value of the associated model
variable when you set the model variables to the tag values.
▪ Use Last Good Value: Set the Screened Value to the Last Good Value and update the value of the
associated model variable when you set the model variables to the tag values.
▪ Report Error: Leave the Screened Value blank and do not update the value of the associated model
variable when you set the model variables to the tag values. In addition, the system logs an error, but
currently does not display the error in the Log pane.
4. In the Input Processing area, select Screen.
Values in the Screened Value column update according to the quality status of the tags.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 279
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

Setting Model Variables to the Screened Tag Values

When you read or screen tag values from an external database, AVEVA Process Simulation does not apply the tag
values to the associated model variables until you specifically decide to set those model variables to the
screened tag values.
The software always uses the Screened Value data instead of the direct Tag Value data to avoid updating the
model variables to tag values of bad quality. If there is no Screened Value data available for a model variable, the
software does not update the value of that model variable when you set the model variables to the screened tag
values.
To set model variables to the screened tag values:
1. Open the External Data Manager.
2. Select the tag collection that contains the tag values that you want to apply to the model variables, and then
select Transfer.
The Read/Write External Data window appears.
3. In the Tag List section, in the Input Processing area, select Set.
AVEVA Process Simulation updates the values for all the associated model variables. For specified model
variables, it sets the values to the current Screened Value data in the External Data Manager. For calculated
model variables, it recalculates the values based on the new specifications.

Updating the Last Good Values

The Last Good Value data in the External Data Manager provides a set of good quality tag values that you can fall
back on if the current tag values from the external database have a bad quality status. Typically, you update the
last good values after you set the model variables to the screened tag values and your simulation solves without
errors.
The Last Good Value data in the External Data Manager always appears in the internal units of measure (UOMs).
You may need to convert a Last Good Value to accurately compare it to a Tag Value or Sim Value. See Internal
Units of Measure for more information.
To update the last good values:
1. Open the External Data Manager.
2. Select the tag collection that contains the tag values of interest, and then select Transfer.
The Read/Write External Data window appears.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 280
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

3. In the Tag List section, in the Input Processing area, select Set.
AVEVA Process Simulation sets the Last Good Value data to the Screened Value data. If a Screened Value is
blank, the software does not update the associated Last Good Value.

Getting Tag Values from the Model Variables

When you set model variables to screened tag values, AVEVA Process Simulation updates all the specified model
variables to the Screened Value data in the External Data Manager and recalculates all the calculated model
variables. The calculated model variables are typically associated with tag values that you need to send back to
the external database.
However, AVEVA Process Simulation communicates only Tag Value data back to the external database to provide
you a greater amount of control over the data that you send to your external databases. If you want to send the
values of the model variables to the external database, you must first get the tag values from the model
variables.
To get tag values from the model variables:
1. Open the External Data Manager.
2. Select the tag collection that contains the tag values that you want to get from the model variables, and then
select Transfer.
The Read/Write External Data window appears.
3. In the Tag List section, in the Output Processing area, select Get.
AVEVA Process Simulation copies the values for all the associated model variables (Sim Value) to the Tag
Value data.
The software also updates the Quality for the tag. If the solved status for the associated model variable
shows a successful solve, the quality is good (green badge). Otherwise, the quality is bad (red badge).

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 281
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

Reverting to Tag Collections from a Snapshot

Snapshots include tag collection data. The stored tag collection data includes the tag mapping information (Tag
Name and Sim Variable) and the following data values from the Read/Write External Data window:
• Quality
• Tag Value
• Screened Value
• Last Good Value
• Min
• Max
• Tag Time Stamp
When you revert a simulation to a snapshot, the tag collection data is included in the revert by default. If you do
not want to overwrite the current tag collection data, you can use the Special list in the Snapshot Manager to
remove the external tag data from the revert. See Specified Snapshot Values for more information.
The Sim Value and Sim Units values are always taken directly from the current values of the simulation and are
not included in the snapshot data. However, you may see these values changed based on the variable values
captured in the snapshot.
Snapshots do not include data for the data clipping and screening options (If Under Min, If Over Max, and If Bad
Quality). These values remain the same when you revert a simulation to a snapshot.
To revert to tag collections from a snapshot:
1. Open the Snapshot Manager.
2. Select the snapshot that contains the tag collection data that you want to load.
3. Select Revert.
The tag collection data in the snapshot overwrites the current tag collection data in the simulation.
4. Open the External Data Manager.
5. Select a tag collection, and then select Transfer to open the Read/Write External Data window.
6. Verify that the tag collection data is correct and update the data if needed.
If you need to update the tag mapping configuration, see Managing Tag Collections for more information.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 282
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 27 – External Data Manager

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each tag collection that you are interested in.

Writing Tag Values to the External Database

When you write tag values to the external database, AVEVA Process Simulation overwrites the external database
values with the current Tag Value data in the External Data Manager. The software applies the Tag Value data
regardless of whether the associated model variables are specified or calculated.
If needed, you can manually update the Tag Value data in the External Data Manager before you write the tag
values to the external database.
To write tag values to the external database:
1. Open the External Data Manager.
2. Select the tag collection that contains the tag values that you want to write to the external database, and
then select Transfer.
The Read/Write External Data window appears.
3. In the Tag List section, in the Output Processing area, select Get.
AVEVA Process Simulation copies the values for all the associated model variables (Sim Value) to the Tag
Value data.
The software also updates the Quality for the tag. If the solved status for the associated model variable
shows a successful solve, the quality is good (green badge). Otherwise, the quality is bad (red badge).
4. Review the tag values and change the Quality if needed.
5. In the Time Selection section, in the Start Date & Time box, type the date and time that you want to use as
the timestamp for the write operation. You can use the drop-down menu to select the date from a calendar
view.
6. In the Tag List section, in the Output Processing area, select Write.
The software adds a new record with the specified timestamp and Tag Value data to the database.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 283
Chapter 28

Script Runner

About the Script Runner

The Script Runner (ScScript.exe) is a ribbon utility that you can use to run a .csx file. Typically, the .csx file is a
script written in C# that includes calls to the AVEVA Process Simulation Scripting Interface. The controls in the
Run Script group on the Advanced tab allow you to run a script directly from the AVEVA Process Simulation user
interface (UI) without opening an integrated development environment (IDE), such as Microsoft Visual Studio, or
a command-line tool.
Typically, you use scripts to automate actions and processes in AVEVA Process Simulation. You can also extend
your scripts to include application programming interfaces from third-party software, such as data visualization
software. This allows you to transfer data to and from AVEVA Process Simulation and third-party applications to
extend your data visualizations, as shown in the following diagram.

Concepts
• Scripts use the AVEVA Process Simulation Scripting Interface to automate changes within AVEVA Process
Simulation.
• You can use the the AVEVA Process Simulation Scripting Interface Help documentation distributed along with
the Scripting Interface software development kit (SDK) to learn more about the available functions.
• You can find the Scripting Interface SDK in the AVEVA Process Simulation installation package, in the Toolkits
folder.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 284
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 28 – Script Runner

• Scripts can also access third-party applications or utilities to meet your needs.
• The Script Runner uses the %userprofile%\My Simulations folder as the current working directory. This
means that:
• Any relative paths that you use in your .csx file are relative to the %userprofile%\My Simulations folder.
• Any generated output files appear in the %userprofile%\My Simulations folder.
Actions
• Open and review the AVEVA Process Simulation Scripting Interface Help.
• Add scripts to the user script folder to populate the list of scripts that you can run.
• Select a script (.csx file) to run.
• Run a script.

Opening the AVEVA Process Simulation Scripting Interface Help

You must install the software development kit (SDK) for the AVEVA Process Simulation Scripting Interface to open
the AVEVA Process Simulation Scripting Interface Help. Step 1 of the following procedure provides the basic
installation instructions for the Scripting Interface SDK. If you have already installed the Scripting Interface SDK,
then you can skip to step 2.
To open the AVEVA Process Simulation Scripting Interface Help:
1. In the AVEVA Process Simulation installation package, in the Toolkits folder, right-click the Scripting
Interface.zip file, and then extract the file contents to the desired folder.
2. In File Explorer, browse to the <ScriptingSDKLocation>\Docs\API folder, where <ScriptingSDKLocation> is the
folder that you extracted the Scripting Interface SDK to.
3. Double-click the _ScriptingInterfaceHelp.html file.
The AVEVA Process Simulation Scripting Interface Help opens in your default browser.

Adding Scripts to the List of Available Scripts

On the Advanced tab, in the Run Script group, the list of available scripts shows only the script files that appear
in the user script folder. If you want to add a script to the list, you must add the script file to the user script
folder.
To add scripts to the list of available scripts:
1. In File Explorer, browse to a script file that you want to add to the list.
2. Copy the script file.
3. In the AVEVA Process Simulation user interface (UI), on the Advanced tab, in the Run Script group, select

Open user script folder ( ).

A new File Explorer window opens to the user script folder.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 285
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 28 – Script Runner

If you used roaming profiles when you installed AVEVA Process Simulation, the user script folder is
%AppData%\Simsci\SimCentral\Scripts\User. Otherwise, the user script folder is the %LocalAppData%
\Simsci\SimCentral\Scripts\User.
4. Paste the copied script file into the user script folder.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 until you have pasted all the desired script files.
6. Close and reopen the AVEVA Process Simulation UI.

Running a Script (.csx File)

You can use the Script Runner (ScScript.exe) controls on the Advanced tab to run a script (.csx file) directly from
the AVEVA Process Simulation user interface (UI).
To run a script from the AVEVA Process Simulation user interface:
1. On the Advanced tab, in the Run Script group, select the desired script from the dropdown list.
The list shows only those scripts that appear in the user script folder. See Adding Scripts to the List of
Available Scripts for more information.
2. (Optional) Switch the toggle button from Off to On to open a console window that shows the script output
whenever you run the script.
The script continues to run in the AVEVA Process Simulation UI until you close the console window.

3. Select Run selected script ( ).

After the run completes, the badge in the Run Script group shows the run status.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 286
Chapter 29

History Manager

About the History Manager

The History Manager allows you to define the frequency and quantity of simulation data that you want to save
for historical reference. The software saves the data as part of a snapshot. You can access and manage the data
further in the Snapshot Manager, as shown in the following conceptual diagram.

The default configuration settings in the History Manager are appropriate for most scenarios. If you change the
configuration settings, then the changes apply to the active simulation but do not affect other simulations saved
in the Repository. The software saves recent data at shorter time intervals and older data at longer time
intervals. There are three data collections: Fast, Medium, and Slow. By changing the number of data points in
each data collection, you define how much data the software saves in each data collection as well.
Concepts
• The configuration settings in the History Manager define the historical data that the software saves in a
snapshot.
• The software captures historical data only for a finite period of time.
• You can choose to save historical data for only the variables that appear in a Trend or for all favorite variables
in the simulation.
• The History Manager always shows time in terms of seconds.
Actions
• For each data collection:
• Define the frequency at which to save data.
• Define the number of data points to include in the historical data.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 287
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 29 – History Manager

• Select whether the historical data includes only the variables that appear in a Trend or includes all the
favorite variables in the simulation.

Opening the History Manager

To open the History Manager:
1. On the application ribbon, select the Dynamics tab.
2. In the History group, select Manager.

The History Manager appears.

Managing the Collection of Data in the History Manager

In the History Manager, you can manage the intervals in which the software collects the historical data and the
number of data points to collect.
There are three data collections: Fast, Medium, and Slow. Each data collection has a calculated step interval
(Interval), starting time (From), and ending time (To) that depend on the specified:
• Time step (dt) of the simulation
• Time-step multiplier (Multiple)
• Number of data points (Points)
The Fast data collection always starts at the most recent data point (From = 0 s) and proceeds backwards in time
up to the calculated Fast ending time.
You save historical data in a snapshot. When you capture a snapshot of a simulation, you can choose whether
the snapshot includes the historical data. See Managing Historical Data in the Snapshot Manager for more
information.
You can choose to save historical data for only the variables that appear in a Trend or for all favorite variables in
the simulation. Snapshots that include historical data for all favorite variables are often very large and may
significantly increase the size of a simulation. You can reduce the size of your snapshots (and therefore the
simulation) by saving historical data for only the variables that appear in a Trend. However, if you add new
variables to a Trend and then revert to a snapshot that includes historical data for only the variables that appear
in a Trend, then trend data is not available for those new variables.
To manage the collection of data:
1. Open the History Manager.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 288
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 29 – History Manager

The three collections (Fast, Medium, and Slow) allow you to specify the frequency at which you want to
collect data and the number of data points that you want to collect.
2. In the Multiple box, type the time-step multiplier that you want to use for the Interval calculation.
The Interval value equals the simulation time step (dt) multiplied by the Multiple value
(Interval = dt × Multiple).
3. In the Points box, type the number of data points that you want to include in the data collection.
The From and To values depend on the Points and Interval values.
For the Fast collection, the From value is 0 s (From = 0 s), and the To value equals the Points value multiplied
by the Interval value (To = Points × Interval).
For the Medium and Slow collections, the From value equals the preceding To value, and the To value equals
the From value plus the Points value multiplied by the Interval value (To = From + Points × Interval).
4. In the Configuration section, select one of the following:
▪ Trended variables: Collect and save historical data for only variables that appear in a Trend.
▪ Trended and Favorite variables: Collect and save historical data for all favorite variables and any non-
favorite variables that appear in a Trend.

Managing Historical Data in the Snapshot Manager

Because you save historical data in snapshots, the Snapshot Manager allows you to "restore" all historical data
associated with a specific snapshot.
To restore historical data saved in a snapshot:
1. Open the Snapshot Manager.
2. Select the snapshot in which the historical data resides.

The badge appears in the History column for each snapshot that includes historical data.
3. Select the Special menu.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 289
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Chapter 29 – History Manager

4. Select the History Data checkbox.

5. Select Load.
Historical data is available in the simulation and you can see the trend data for the variables in your Trends.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 290
Chapter 30

AVEVA Unified Engineering

AVEVA Unified Engineering is an integration solution that allows AVEVA Process Simulation and AVEVA
Engineering to communicate and share data. After you export your AVEVA Process Simulation data to AVEVA
Engineering, you can interface with many other AVEVA products, including AVEVA Everything 3D, which builds
and maintains 3D visualizations of your process plants to help you plan and design all the process units that you
will need in your plant. This solution helps you reduce the time, cost, and effort in the front-end engineering and
design of your plants.
The following figure shows an overview of the data connections between AVEVA Process Simulation, AVEVA
Engineering, and the other software that supports this connection (AVEVA Integration Service and AVEVA NET
Gateway for SimCentral).

The AVEVA Engineering tab in the AVEVA Process Simulation user interface contains all of the controls to
connect to and share data with AVEVA Engineering. If you are interested in using AVEVA Unified Engineering,
please see the AVEVA Unified Engineering documentation for details on the entire process, including how to
configure and work with AVEVA Engineering and other AVEVA products. If you do not have a copy of the AVEVA
Unified Engineering documentation, please contact your local customer support center to request a copy.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 291
Appendix A

Glossary of Terms

The following terms are used in AVEVA Process Simulation, the product documentation, or the online help.

A
Application Ribbon
A horizontal ribbon that contains tabs to invoke Process, Fluid Flow and Dynamics simulation actions; set
simulation view preferences; and display the product help.

Auto Solve
The automatic solution of portions of a simulation when sufficient information is available.

AVEVA Process Simulation Server

The computer used to host the solver and the Repository.

B
Badge
A symbol next to an AVEVA Process Simulation object that describes its state to the user. For example, in the
Properties Inspector and Simulation Manager, objects like model instances, variables, and equations have badges
to indicate an error status with tooltips that describe the nature of the error.

C
Calculated Variable
A variable with a value that is not specified by the user and with its specification box unchecked. The solver
determines the value of calculated variables.

Canvas
The graphical representation of the Flowsheet on which models are placed and connected to build a simulation.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 292
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Appendix A – Glossary of Terms

Client
The computer used to run the user interface and that connects to the server computer.

Condition
An object defined by the Model Writer within the Model Editor which evaluates a boolean expression composed
of parameters. When conditions are used in a simulation, they describe the variables, equations, and submodels
that are used by the model instance based on parameter selections made by the Simulation Builder.

Connection
An object that provides the numerical equivalence of variables that it connects. Connections between model
Instances with the same Port Type define variable streams that represent the material flowing between the
models. See Variable Connections and Parameter Connections.

Connection Model
A library model that looks like a connector on the Canvas. Typical connection models are Pipes and Streams.

Connector
The graphical representation of a connection on the Canvas.

D
Description
Descriptive text provided by the Model Writer for models and their parameters, variables, and equations, or by
the Simulation Builder for model instances placed on the Canvas. Descriptions can normally be viewed by
mouse-over tooltips.

Dynamic Attribute
A variable attribute for a Dynamic simulation. Possible values are state variables, operated on by the der()
function, and time-derivative variables created by the der() operator.

Dynamics Mode
A Simulation Mode that solves both algebraic and time-derivative equations over successive integration time
steps.

E
Editor
See Model Editor, Port Editor, and Fluid Editor.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 293
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Appendix A – Glossary of Terms

Enumerated Parameter
A type of parameter with text-based options that are selectable by the Simulation Builder.

Equation
An object that describes the mathematical relationship of variables and real parameters. Model Writers add
equations to Model Types through the Model Editor. Simulation Builders may also create Flowsheet-level
equations using the Simulation Manager.

External
An object defined by the Model Writer within the Model Editor that defines an external DLL in which variable
relationships reside.

F
Fluid Editor
A configuration editor used by Simulation Builders to modify the fluids used by a simulation.

Fluid Flow Mode

A pressure-driven steady state Simulation Mode. Fluid Flow Mode is defined by the collection of variable
specifications which typically invoke a simultaneous network solution.

Fluid State (Instance)

An instance of a Fluid State submodel whose variables represent the thermodynamic state of that fluid instance
through values such as temperature, pressure, and enthalpy.

Fluid State (Model Type)

A Model Type that represents fluid behavior. Used as a submodel in process equipment Model Types.

Fluid Type
A Fluid Type describes the thermodynamic behavior assigned to model instances in a simulation.

Free Variable
See Calculated Variable.

G
Grid
Visible, equally-spaced vertical and horizontal lines on the Canvas that can be used to align objects.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 294
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Appendix A – Glossary of Terms

Group Box
An area within the Roles Manager, Properties Inspector, and editors to which columns are dragged to group data.
When empty, the Group Box reads "group by area" and "Drag a field here to group by that field."

Guide Lines
A vertical or horizontal line that appears on the simulation Canvas when a model instance being moved is
adjacent to another. Used to help align model instances with one another.

H
History Manager
An editor that allows you to define the frequency and quantity of simulation data that you want to save for
historical reference.

I
Icon
The graphical symbol that defines the appearance of all Model Types, Port Types, and Fluid Types on the Canvas.

Integer Parameter
A Parameter that contains integer values. Integer parameters, such as the number of ports, are used to configure
models.

Invariant Attribute
A Variable and Parameter attribute that indicates the value does not change when you revert a simulation to an
earlier snapshot.

K
Keyword View
The detailed information pane of the Simulation Manager, which allows modification of a selected object.

L
Library
See Model Library.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 295
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Appendix A – Glossary of Terms

M
Manager
See Simulation Manager, UOM Manager, Snapshot Manager, and Role Manager.

Mode
The solution mode of a simulation that includes a collection of predefined variable specifications and, in some
cases, special solvers.

Model Editor
The configuration editor used by Model Writers to define Model Types.

Model (Instance)
The mathematical relationships defined by a Model Type composed of parameters, variables, and equations that
define a specific unit operation, such as a valve or pump that exists within a Flowsheet.

Model Library
A collection of Model Types, Fluid Types, Curve Types, and Port Types residing in the Repository, or a single
simulation-specific Model Library residing with a simulation.

Model Library (Display)

A UI component that displays Model Libraries, shapes, and references that can be dragged onto the Canvas.
A parameter that contains integer values. Integer parameters can be used to configure a model, such as defining
how many ports it has.
The act of writing a Model Type.

N
Not Solved Variable Attribute
A Variable attribute that indicates that the variable is invalid, stale, or otherwise incorrect and should not be
used. Not solved variables are indicated in grey strike-through text.

P
Parameter
An object that represents the static values of a simulation. Model Writers can add parameters using the Model
Editor and Simulation Builders can add parameters through the Simulation Manager. See Real Parameter,
Enumerated Parameter, Integer Parameter and Fluid Type.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 296
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Appendix A – Glossary of Terms

Parameter Connection
A parameter connection is defined in the Model Editor to directionally transfer parameter values through port
connections. Parameter connections of a special parameter type called FluidType are used to transfer fluid
information to connected models.

Parameter Connection
A way of connecting parameters across ports and submodels to transfer parameter values, such as Fluid Types.

Port Editor
The configuration editor used by Model Writers to define Port Types.

Port Type
A defined collection of variables that define the stream connection information between model instances
connected by identical Port Types.

Process Mode
Process Mode performs steady state simulations to create and improve process design.

Profile
An object which graphically displays scalar and vector data.

Properties Inspector
A model instance property view accessed through the Canvas or Simulation Manager that allows Simulation
Builders to inspect and configure model instances.

Q
Quick Filter
A disposable Simulation Manager filter created for the immediate search of an object in the Simulation Manager.
Save it if you want to use it again.

R
Real Parameter
A parameter that contains real numerical values (not integers or enumerations) and is defined using Variable
Types. Real parameters can be used in equations, but are treated as a fixed value. A typical real parameter could
be Pi with the value 3.14159.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 297
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Appendix A – Glossary of Terms

Repository
The storage location of simulations, Model Libraries, and Variable Types on the server to which all AVEVA Process
Simulation users of that server have access.

Repository Manager
The UI component that displays simulations in the Repository.

Required Variable Attribute

A variable attribute for which a Simulation Builder must provide a numerical value.

Reset Snapshot
A function that resets only the calculated values of a previously captured Snapshot. The variable specifications
and real parameters of the simulation being reset are not changed.

Revert Snapshot
A function that reverts the variable specifications, both specified and calculated variable values, and real
parameter values of a previously captured Snapshots.

Ribbon
A set of controls at the top of the UI where common user operations are grouped.

Role
Your role within AVEVA Process Simulation. You can select Model Writing, which is the creation and modification
of Model Types, or Simulation Building, which is the use of existing Model Types within a simulation. Additional
roles may be defined in the Role Manager.

Roles Manager
A manager used to modify default roles and add new roles.

S
Scenario Manager
An editor that allows you to manually script, automatically record and run simulation actions.

Set By User Variable Attribute

A Variable attribute that is set when the Simulation Builder enters a value for a specified variable.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 298
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Appendix A – Glossary of Terms

Shapes
Primitive drawing objects, such as squares or circles, that can be dragged from the Shapes Model Library to the
Canvas.

Simulation
A collection of Flowsheets and their connected model instances that define a process.

Simulation Building
The act of building a simulation using existing Model Types.

Simulation Canvas
See Canvas.

Simulation Manager
A hierarchical view of a simulation that allows the Simulation Builder to explore and modify the simulation and
its objects.

Snapshot
The collection of simulation data saved with the simulation that defines the variable specifications, variable
values, and real parameter values. A Snapshot is used to reset or revert a simulation state as it existed at the
point that it was saved.

Snapshot Manager
The UI component that lets you manage existing simulations and capture new ones.

Solver
The software component that solves the mathematical relationships of a simulation.

Specified Variable
A variable with a value specified by the Simulation Builder and with its specification box checked. The solver does
not change the value of specified variables.

State Variable
A Variable with the dynamic attribute "State Value," whose value is calculated by the evaluation and integration
of its time derivative.

Status Bar
The single-line display at the bottom of the user interface which provides system status information.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 299
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Appendix A – Glossary of Terms

Submodel
A Submodel is a model which is part of another model, such as a Fluid State submodel. Typically, submodels are
defined so that they can be reused across many different models.

T
Theme
A collection of text, background, and highlighting colors that can be selected per user preference. Themes
include Dark, Light, and Windows.

Thermo Type
The implementation that AVEVA Process Simulation uses to determine the Fluid State's properties, such as
SimSci Thermodynamics, an external DLL, or a named set of Equations in the Fluid State Submodel.

Trend
An object which graphically displays the time-dependent behavior of a variable during a dynamic simulation.

Types
See Model Types, Variable Types, Port Types, and Fluid Types.

U
UOM Categories
A sortable grouping of related Variable Types for the purpose of updating their display UOM in a UOM Slate.

UOM Manager
A manager used to create and manage UOM Slates.

UOM Slate
A collection of UOM settings for all Variable Types, typically representative of a specific country or industry. SI is a
standard UOM Slate which comes with AVEVA Process Simulation.

V
Variable
An object that represents a single point value to the solver, and is related by equations to other variables.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 300
 AVEVA™ Process Simulation Simulation Building Guide
Appendix A – Glossary of Terms

Variable Attribute
A set of properties of a variable, in addition to its value, which is used to help manage the status of the variable.
See Required Variable Attribute and Not Solved Variable Attribute.

Variable Connection
Connecting two variables in the Model Editor so that they behave the same way with the same value and
specification status in the user interface and the solver.

Variable Reference
A reference to a variable that displays its value on the Canvas. Variable References may be dragged from the
References section of the Model Library.

Variable Type
A collection of typical variable properties such as unit of measure, conversion factors, typical minimum and
maximum values, and a typical default value. Pressure is an example of a Variable Type. The AVEVA Process
Simulation UI does not allow addition or modification of Variable Types.

Version 2024
© 2015-2023 AVEVA Group Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Page 301